查看: 4904|回复: 13
收起左侧

[基础知识] Mechant Ship Construction Second Edition D A Taylor

[复制链接]
发表于 2023-2-18 23:04 | 显示全部楼层 |阅读模式 来自: 中国上海
merchant-ship-construction-d-a-taylor_compress.pdf (14.62 MB, 下载次数: 141) [attach]-3[/attach]一本老书,下载地址:https://libgen.unblockit.bio/lib ... 5A19EF1AA9E3211DBC8
Contents
1The ship-its functions, features and types
2Ship stresses and shipbuilding materials
3Shipbuilding
4Welding and cutting processes
5Major structural items
AKeel and bottom construction
BShell plating, framing systems and decks
CBulkheads and pillars
DFore end construction
EAft end construction
FSuperstructures and accommodation
6Minor structural items
7Outfit
8Oil tankers, liquefied gas carriers and bulk carriers
9Ventilation
10Organisations and regulations
11Corrosion and its prevention
12Surveys and maintenance
13Principal ship dimensions and glossary of term
目录
1 船舶的功能、特点和类型
2 船舶应力和造船材料
3 造船
4 焊接和切割工艺
5 主要结构项目
A 龙骨和底部结构
B 船外板、骨架系统和甲板
C 舱壁和支柱+
D 艏端结构
E 尾端结构
F 上层建筑和住舱
6 次要结构项目
7 舾装
8 油轮、液化气运输船和散货船
9 通风
10 组织和法规
11 腐蚀及其预防
12 调查和维护
13 船舶主要尺寸和术语表


1
The Ship-its Functions, Features and Types
Merchantships exist to carry cargoes across the waterways of the world safely, speedilyand economically. Since a large part of the world's surface, approximatelythree-fifths, is covered by water, it is reasonable to consider that themerchant ship will continue to perform its function for many centuries to come.The worldwide nature of this function involves the ship, its cargo and its crewin many aspects of international life. Some features of this internationaltransportation, such as weather and climatic changes, availability of cargo handlingfacilities and international regulations, will be considered in later chapters.
The ship, in itsvarious forms, has evolved to accomplish its function depending upon three mainfactors - the type of cargo carried, the type of construction and materialsused, and the area of operation.
Three principalcargo-carrying types of ship exist today: the general cargo vessel, the tankerand the passenger vessel. The general cargo ship functions today as a generalcarrier and also, in several particular forms, for unit-based or unitised cargocarrying. Examples include container ships, pallet ships and 'roll-on, roll-off’ships. The tanker has its specialised forms for the carriage of crude oil,refined oil products, liquefied gases, etc. The passenger ship includes, generallyspeaking, the cruise liner and some ferries.
The type ofconstruction will affect the cargo carried and, in some generally internalaspects, the characteristics of the ship. The principal types of constructionrefer to the framing arrangement for stiffening the outer shell plating, thethree types being longitudinal, transverse and combined framing. The use ofmild steel, special steels, aluminium and other materials also influences thecharacteristics of a ship. General cargo ships are usually of transverse orcombined framing construction using mild steel sections and plating. Mosttankers employ longitudinal or combined framing systems and the larger vesselsutilise high tensile steels in their construction. Passenger ships, with theirlarge areas of superstructure, employ lighter metals and alloys such asaluminium to reduce the weight of the upper regions of the ship.
The area of trade,the cruising range, the climatic extremes experienced, must all be borne in mindin the design of a particular ship. Ocean-going vessels require several tanksfor fresh water and oil fuel storage. Stability and trim arrangements must besatisfactory for the weather conditions prevailing in the area of operation.The strength of the structure, its ability to resist the effects of waves,heavy seas, etc., must be much greater for an ocean-going vessel than for aninland waterway vessel.
Considerations ofsafety in all aspects of ship design and operation must be paramount, so theship must be seaworthy. This term relates to many aspects of the ship: it mustbe capable of remaining afloat in all conditions of weather: it must remain afloatfollowing all but the most serious damage; and it must remain stable and behavewell in the various sea states encountered. Some of the constructional andregulatory aspects of seaworthiness will be dealt with in later chapters.Stability and other design aspects are explained in detail in NavalArchitecture for Marine Engineers, by W. Muckle (Butterworths.1975).
The development ofship types will continue as long as there is a sufficient demand to be met in aparticular area of trade. Recent years have seen such developments as verylarge crude carriers (VLCCs) for the transport of oil, and the liquefiednatural gas and liquefied petroleum gas tankers for the bulk carriage of liquidgases. Container ships and various barge carriers have developed for generalcargo transportation. Bulk carriers and combination bulk cargo carriers arealso relatively modern developments.
Several basic shiptypes will now be considered in further detail. The particular features ofappearance, construction, layout, size, etc., will be examined for the followingship types:
(1)General cargo ships.
(2)Tankers.
(3) Bulkcarriers.
(4)Container ships.
(5)Passenger ships.
Many other typesand minor variations exist, but the above selection is considered to berepresentative of the major part of the world's merchant fleet.

General cargo ships
Thegeneral cargo ship is the 'maid of all work', operating a worldwide 'goanywhere' service of cargo transportation. It consists of as large a clear opencargo-carrying space as possible, together with the facilities required forloading and unloading the cargo (Figure 1.1). Access to the cargo storage areasor holds is provided by openings in the deck called hatches. Hatches are madeas large as strength considerations will allow to reduce horizontal movement ofcargo within the ship. Hatch covers of wood or steel, as in most modern ships,are used to close the hatch openings when the ship is at sea. The hatch coversare made watertight and lie upon coamings around the hatch which are set somedistance from the upper or weather deck to reduce the risk of flooding in heavyseas.
One or moreseparate decks are fitted in the cargo holds and are knows as tween decks.Greater flexibility in loading and unloading, together with cargo segregationand improved stability, are possible using the tween deck spaces. Variouscombinations of derricks, winches and deck cranes are used for the handling ofcargo. Many modern ships are fitted with deck cranes which reduce cargo-handlingtimes and manpower requirements. A special heavy-lift derrick may also befitted, covering one or two holds.
Since full cargoescannot be guaranteed with this type of ship, ballast-carrying tanks must befitted. in this way the ship always has a sufficient draught for stability andtotal propeller immersion. Fore and aft peak tanks are fitted which also assistin trimming the ship. A double bottom is fitted which extends the length of theship and is divided into separate tanks, some of which carry fuel oil and freshwater. The remaining tanks are used for ballast when the ship is sailing emptyor partly loaded. Deep tanks may be fitted which can carry liquid cargoes orwater ballast.
The accommodationand machinery spaces are usually located with one hold between them and the aftpeak bulkhead. This arrangement improves the vessel's trim when it is partiallyloaded and reduces the lost cargo space for shafting tunnels compared with thecentral machinery space arrangement. The current range of sizes for generalcargo ships is from 2000 to 15 000 displacement tonnes with speeds of 12-18knots.
Figure1.1 General cargo ships
Refrigerated general cargo ship
Thefilling of refrigeration plants for the cooling of cargo holds enables thecarriage of perishable foodstuffs by sea. Refrigerated ships vary little fromgeneral cargo ships. They may have more than one tween deck, and all holdspaces will be insulated to reduce heal transfer. Cargo may be carried frozenor chilled depending upon its nature. Refrigerated ships are usually fasterthan general cargo ships, often having speeds up to 22 knots, and they may alsocater for up to 12 passengers.
Tankers
Thetanker is used to carry bulk liquid cargoes, the most common type being the oiltanker. Many other liquids are carried in tankers and specially constructedvessels are used for chemicals, liquefied petroleum gas, liquefied natural gas.etc.
The oil tanker hasthe cargo-carrying section of the vessel split up into individual tanks bylongitudinal and transverse bulkheads (Figure 1.2). The cargo is discharged bycargo pumps fitted in one or more pumprooms either at the ends of the tanksection or sometimes in the middle. Each tank has its own suction arrangementwhich connects to the pumps, and a network of piping discharges the cargo to thedeck from where it is pumped ashore. No double bottom is fitted in thecargo-carrying section of an oil tanker. Fore and aft peak tanks are used forballast, with often a pair of wing tanks situated just forward of midships.These wing tanks are ballast-only tanks and are empty when the ship is fullyloaded. Small slop tanks are fitted at the after end of the cargo section andare used for the normal carriage of oil on loaded voyages. On ballast runs the sloptanks are used for storing the contaminated residue from tank-cleaningoperations.
Large amounts ofpiping are to be seen on the deck running from the pump-rooms to the dischargemanifolds positioned at midships, port and starboard.
Hose-handlingderricks are fitted port and starboard near the manifolds. The accommodationand machinery spaces are located aft in modern tankers. The range of sizes foroil tankers at present is enormous, from small to 700000 deadweight tonnes.Speeds range from 12 to 16 knots. Oil tankers are dealt with in more detail in Chapter8.

Figure1.2 Oil tanker

Liquefied gas tankers

Liquefiedgas tankers are used to carry, usually at low temperature, liquefied petroleumgas (LPG) or liquefied natural gas (LNG). A separate inner tank is usually employedto contain the liquid and this lank is supported by the outer hull which has adouble bottom (Figure 1.3).
LNG tankers carrymethane and other paraffin products obtained as a by-product of petroleumdrilling operations. The gas is carried at atmospheric pressure and temperaturesas low as -164°C in tanks of special materials (see Table 2.3), which canaccept the low temperature. The tanks used may be prismatic, cylindrical orspherical in shape and self-supporting or of membrane construction. Thecontaining tank is separated from the hull by insulation which also acts as asecondary barrier in the event of leakage.
LPG tankers carrypropane, butane, propylene, etc., which are extracted from natural gas. Thegases are carried either fully pressurized, part pressurized-part refrigeratedor fully refrigerated. The fully pressurised tank operates at 18 bar andambient temperature, the fully refrigerated tank at 0.25 bar and -50°C.Separate containment tanks within the hull are used and are surrounded by insulationwhere low temperatures are employed. Tank shapes are either prismatic,spherical or cylindrical. Low temperature steels may be used on the hull whereit acts as a secondary barrier.
Displacement sizesfor gas carriers range up to 60 000 tonnes, with speeds of 12-16 knots. Liquefiedgas carrier, are dealt with in more detail in Chapter 8.

Figure1.3 Liquefied petroleum gas (LPG) tanker (W.B. water ballast tanks)

Bulk Carriers
Bulkcarriers are single-deck vessels which transport single-commodity cargoes suchas grain. sugar and ores in bulk. The cargo-carrying section of the ship is dividedinto holds or tanks which may have any number of arrangements, depending uponthe range of cargoes to be carried. Combination carriers are bulk carriersdesigned for flexibility of operation and able to transport anyone of severalbulk cargoes on anyone voyage, e.g. ore or crude oil or dry bulk cargo.
The general-purposebulk carrier, in which usually the central hold section only is used for cargo,is shown in Figure 1.4 and 1.5(a). The partitioned tanks which surround it areused for ballast purposes either on ballast voyages or, in the case of thesaddle tanks, to raise the ship's centre of gravity when a low density cargo iscarried. Some of the double-bottom tanks may be used for fuel oil and freshwater. The saddle tanks also serve to shape the upper region of the cargo holdand trim the cargo. Large hatchways are a feature of bulk carriers, since theyreduce cargo-handling time during loading and unloading.
An ore carrier hastwo longitudinal bulkheads which divide the cargo section into wing tanks portand starboard, and the centre hold which is used for ore. The high doublebottom is a feature of ore carriers. On ballast voyages the wing tanks anddouble bottoms provide ballast capacity. On loaded voyages the ore is carriedin the central hold, and the high double bottom serves to raise the centre of gravityof this very dense cargo. The vessel's behaviour at sea is thus much improved.The cross-section is similar to that of the ore/oil carrier shown in Figure 1.5(b).Two longitudinal bulkheads are employed to divide the ship into centre and wingtanks which are used for the carriage of oil cargoes. When ore is carried, onlythe centre tank section is used for cargo. A double bottom is fitted beneaththe centre tank but is used only for water ballast. The bulkheads and hatchesmust be oiltight.
The ore/bulk/oilcarrier has a cross-section similar to the general bulk carrier shown in Figure1.4. The structure is, however, significantly stronger, since the bulkheadsmust be oiltight and the double bottom must withstand the high density ore load.Only the central tank or hold carries cargo, the other tank areas beingballast-only spaces, except the double bottom which may carry oil fuel or freshwater.
Large hatches are afeature of all bulk carriers, to facilitate rapid simple cargo handling. Alarge proportion of bulk carriers do not carry cargo-handling equipment,because they trade between special terminals which have particular equipmentfor loading and unloading bulk commodities. The availability of cargo-handlinggear does increase the flexibility of a vessel and for this reason it is sometimesfitted. Combination carriers handling oil cargoes have their own cargo pumps, pipingsystems, etc., for discharging oil. Bulk carriers are dealt with in more detailin Chapter 8. Deadweight capacities range from small to 150000 tonnes dependingupon type of cargo, etc. Speeds are in the range of 12-16 knots.

Figure1.4 Bulk carrier
Figure1.5 Tansverse sections: (a) bulk carrier; (b) ore /oil carrier

Container ships
Thecontainer ship is, as its name implies, designed for the carriage of container.A container is a re-usable box of 2435 mm by 2435 mm section, with lengths of6055, 9125 and 12190 mm. Containers are in use for most general cargoes, andliquid-carrying versions also exist. in addition, refrigerated models are in use.
The cargo-carryingsection of the ship is divided into several holds which have hatch openings thefull width and length of the hold (Figure 1.6). The containers are racked in specialframeworks and stacked one upon the other within the hold space. Cargo handlingtherefore consists only of vertical movement of the cargo in the hold.Containers can also be stacked on the hatch covers where a low density cargo iscarried. Special lashing arrangements exist for this purpose and this deckcargo to some extent compensates for the loss of underdeck capacity.
The various cargoholds are separated by a deep web-framed structure to provide the ship withtransverse strength. The ship section outboard of the containers on each sideis a box-like arrangement of wing tanks which provides longitudinal strength tothe structure. These wing tanks may be utilised for water ballast and can bearranged to counter the heeling of the ship when discharging containers. Adouble bottom is also fitted which adds to the longitudinal strength andprovides additional ballast space.
Accommodation andmachinery spaces are usually located aft to provide the maximum length of full-bodiedship for container stowage. Cargo-handling gear is rarely fitted, as theseships travel between specially equipped terminals for rapid loading and discharge.Container ship sizes vary considerably with container-carrying capacities from100 to 2000 or more. As specialist carriers they are designed for rapidtransits and are high powered, high speed vessels with speeds up to 30 knots.Some of the larger vessels have triple-screw propulsion arrangements.
Figure1.5 Container ship
Passenger ships
Thepassenger liner, or its modern equivalent the cruise liner, exists to provide ameans of luxurious transport between interesting destinations, in pleasantclimates, for its human cargo. The passenger travelling in such a ship paysfor, and expects, a superior standard of accommodation and leisure facilities.Large amounts of superstructure are therefore an essential feature of passengerships. Several tiers of decks are fitted with large open lounges, ballrooms,swimming pools and promenade areas (Figure 1.7).
Aesthetically pleasinglines are evident with usually well-raked clipper-type bows and unusual funnelshapes. Stabilisers are fitted to reduce rolling and bow thrust devices are employedfor improved maneuverability. Large passenger liners are rare, themoderate-sized cruise liner of 12000 tonnes displacement now being the moreprevalent. Passenger-carrying capacity is around 600, with speeds in the regionof 22 knots.

Figure1.6 Passenger ship

1 船舶功能、特点和类型

商船的存在是为了安全、快速和经济地将货物运送到世界各地的水道上。由于世界表面的很大一部分,大约五分之三,被水覆盖,因此可以合理地认为,商船将在未来许多世纪继续发挥其功能。这一职能的全球性质涉及船舶、货物和船员参与国际生活的许多方面。这种国际运输的一些特点,如天气和气候变化、货物装卸设施的可用性和国际条例,将在后面的章节中讨论。
船以各种形式发展以完成其功能,具体取决于三个主要因素 - 运载的货物类型,使用的结构和材料类型以及操作区域。
目前存在三种主要的载货船舶类型:杂货船,油轮和客船。如今,杂货船作为通用承运船,也以几种特定形式用于基于单元或单元的货物运输。示例包括集装箱船、托盘船和“滚装船”。油轮有其专门用于运输原油、成品油、液化气等的形式。一般来说,客船包括游轮和一些渡轮。
结构类型将影响所携带的货物,在某些一般内部方面,会影响船舶的特性。主要结构类型是指用于加强船体外板的骨架布置,三种类型是纵向、横向和组合骨架。低碳钢、特殊钢、铝和其他材料的使用也会影响船舶的特性。杂货船通常是使用低碳钢型材和板的横向或组合骨架结构。大多数油轮采用纵向或组合骨架系统,较大的船舶在其结构中使用高强度钢。上层建筑面积大的客船采用较轻的金属和合金(如铝)来减轻船舶上层建筑的重量。
贸易区域、续航里程、经历的极端气候,都必须在设计特定船舶时牢记在内。远洋船舶需要几个用于储存淡水和石油燃料的舱。稳性和纵倾布置必须符合运营区域普遍存在的天气条件。结构的强度,抵抗海浪,波涛汹涌等影响的能力,对于远洋船舶来说必须比内河船舶大得多。
船舶设计和操作各个方面的安全考虑必须是最重要的,因此船舶必须适航。该术语涉及船舶的许多方面:它必须能够在所有天气条件下保持漂浮:除了最严重的损坏外,它必须在所有损坏后保持漂浮;它必须保持稳定并在遇到的各种海况中表现良好。适航性的一些构造和监管方面将在后面的章节中讨论。稳性和其他设计方面在W. Muckle(Butterworths.1975)的Naval Architecturefor Marine Engineers中进行了详细解释。
只要在特定贸易领域有足够的需求需要满足,船型的发展就会继续下去。近年来,用于运输石油的超大型原油运输船(VLCC)以及用于散装液化气运输的液化天然气和液化石油气油轮等得到了发展。集装箱船和各种驳船已经发展用于普通货物运输。散货船和组合散货船也是相对现代化的发展。
现在将更详细地考虑几种基本船型。将检查以下船型的外观、构造、布局、尺寸等特殊特征:
(1)杂货船。
(2)油轮。
(3)散货船。
(4)集装箱船。
(5)客船。
存在许多其他类型和微小变化,但上述选择被认为是世界商船队主要部分的代表。

杂货船

杂货船是“所有工作的女仆”,在全球范围内提供“随处可去”的货物运输服务。它由尽可能大的敞开载货空间以及装卸货物所需的设施组成(图1.1)。进入货物存储区或货舱的通道由甲板上的开口提供,称为舱口。舱口的尺寸要从强度考虑允许的情况下尽可能大,以减少货物在船内的水平移动。与大多数现代船舶一样,木头或钢制舱口盖用于在船舶出海时关闭舱口。舱口盖是水密的,位于舱口周围的围板上,这些罩子与上层或露天甲板有一定距离,以减少在汹涌的大海中发生进水的风险。
一个或多个单独的甲板安装在货舱中,称为中层甲板。使用中层甲板空间可以提高装卸灵活性,以及货物隔离和更高的稳性。井架、绞车和甲板起重机的各种组合用于货物的搬运。许多现代船舶都配备了甲板起重机,减少了货物装卸时间和人力需求。也可以安装一个特殊的重型起重井架,覆盖一个或两个货舱。
由于这种类型的船舶无法保证满载货物,因此必须安装压载舱。通过这种方式,船舶始终具有足够的吃水深度,以确保稳性和螺旋桨完全浸没。安装了首尾尖舱,这也有助于减小船舶纵倾。安装了一个双层底,延长了船的长度,并分为单独的舱,其中一些装有燃料油和淡水。剩余的舱用于船舶空载或部分装载时的压载物。可以安装深舱,可以装载液体货物或压载水。
住舱和机舱位于尾部,在它们和尾尖舱壁之间通常还有一个货舱。与中置机舱布置相比,这种布置改善了船舶在部分装载时的纵倾,并减少了由于轴隧产生货物空间损失。目前杂货船的尺寸范围为2000至15 000排水吨,速度为12-18节。

图1.1 杂货船

冷藏杂货船

用于冷却货舱的制冷设备使易腐食品的海上运输成为可能。冷藏船与杂货船差别不大。它们可能有多个中层甲板,并且所有保持空间都将绝缘以减少热量转移。货物可以根据其性质冷冻或冷藏运输。冷藏船通常比杂货船快,通常速度可达 22 节,它们还可以容纳多达 12 名乘客。

油轮

油轮用于运载散装液体货物,最常见的类型是装载石油的油轮。油轮也运输许多其他液体,专门建造的船只用于化学品,液化石油气,液化天然气等。
油轮的载货部分通过纵向和横向舱壁分成单独的舱(图1.2)。货物由安装在一个或多个泵房中的货泵排出,这些泵房位于舱段末端或有时位于中间。每个舱都有自己的吸入装置,连接到泵,管道网络将货物排放到甲板上,从那里被泵上岸。油轮的载货部分没有安装双层底。(此书成书于1970年代,现在MARPOL要求油舱有双壳保护。)首尾尖舱用于压载,通常有一对边舱位于船中部的前方。这些边舱是仅压载舱,当船满载时是空的。小型污油舱安装在货物部分的后端,用于装在载航程中正常运油。在压载航程中,污油舱用于储存舱清洁操作中受污染的残留物。
甲板上可以看到大量的管道,从泵房到位于船中部、左舷和右舷的排放总管。在总管附近的左舷和右舷安装有软管处理井架。住舱和机舱位于现代油轮的船尾。目前油轮的尺寸范围很大,从小吨到700000载重吨不等,速度范围从 12 到 16 节。第8章更详细地论述了油轮。

图1.2 油轮

液化气船

液化气船通常用于在低温下运载液化石油气(LPG)或液化天然气(LNG)。通常采用单独的内舱来容纳液体,该舱由具有双层底的外船体支撑(图1.3)。
液化天然气油轮运载甲烷,沼气。以及作为石油钻井作业副产品获得的其他石蜡链烷(属)烃产品。气体在大气压下输送,温度低至-164°C,采用特殊材料的舱体(见表2.3),可以接受低温。所使用的舱可以是棱柱形、圆柱形或球形,并且是自支撑的或膜结构的。容纳舱通过绝缘材料与船体隔开,绝缘材料在泄漏时也可用作辅助屏障。
液化石油气油轮运载丙烷、丁烷、丙烯等,这些是从天然气中提取的。气体要么完全加压,要么部分加压 -部分冷藏或完全冷藏。全加压舱在 18 bar 和环境温度下运行,全冷藏舱在 0.25 bar 和 -50°C 下运行。 使用船体内单独的容纳舱,并在使用低温的地方被绝缘材料包围。舱形状为棱柱形、球形或圆柱形。船体用低温钢,船体也作为辅助屏障。
气体运输船的排水量可达60000吨,速度为12-16节。液化气体运输船,在第8章中有更详细的论述。

图1.3 液化气船(W.B. 压载水舱)

散货船

散货船是运输谷物、散装糖和矿石等单一商品货物的单甲板船舶。船舶的载货部分分为货舱或,根据要运载的货物范围,可以有任意数量的液舱布置。组合运输船是为操作灵活性而设计的散货船,能够在任何航行中运输几批散装货物中的任何一种,例如矿石或原油或干散货。
通用散货船的中央货舱部分通常只用于转载货物,如图1.4和1.5(a)所示。围绕它的分隔舱用于压载目的,要么是在压载航行中,要么对于鞍形舱,在运输低密度货物时提高船舶的重心。一些双层底舱可用于燃料油和淡水。鞍形舱还用于塑造货舱的上层区域并修剪货物。大型舱口是散货船的一个特点,因为它们减少了装卸过程中的货物装卸时间。

图1.4 散货船
矿石运输船有两个纵向舱壁,将货物部分分为左舷和右舷边舱和用于装载矿石的中央货舱。高双底是矿石运输船的一个特点。在压载航行中,边舱和双底提供压载能力。在装载的航行中,矿石在中央货舱中运输,高双底用于提高这种非常密集的货物的重心。因此,船舶在海上的表现得到了极大的改善。横截面与图1.5(b)所示的矿石/石油载体的截面相似。两个纵向舱壁用于将船舶分为中舱和用于运输石油货物的边舱。运输矿石时,只有中舱部分用于货物。中舱下方装有双层底,但仅用于压载水。舱壁和舱口必须油密。

图1.5 横剖面 (a)散货船; (b)矿石/石油运输船
矿石/散装/石油运输船的横截面类似于图1.4所示的一般散货船。然而,该结构明显更坚固,因为舱壁必须油密,双层底必须承受高密度矿石负载。只有中舱或货舱运载货物,其他舱区域是压载空间,除了双层底舱可能携带油燃料或淡水。
大型舱口是所有散货船的特点,便于快速简单的货物处理。很大一部分散装货船不携带货物装卸设备,因为它们在拥有装卸散装商品的特殊设备的特殊码头之间进行贸易。提供货物装卸设备确实增加了船舶的灵活性,因此有时会安装它。装卸油品的组合运输船有自己的货泵、管道系统等,用于卸油。散装货船将在第8章中更详细地讨论。载重量从小到150000吨不等,具体取决于货物类型等,速度在 12-16 节的范围内。

集装箱船

顾名思义,集装箱船是为集装箱运输而设计的。集装箱是截面为2435 毫米 x 2435 毫米的可重复使用的箱子,长度为 6055、9125 和 12190 毫米。大多数普通货物都使用集装箱,也存在液体运输版本。另外,冷藏型号也正在使用中。
船舶的载货部分分为几个货舱,货舱的整个宽度和长度都有舱口(图1.6)。集装箱被架在特殊的框架中,并在货舱空间内一个接一个地堆叠。因此,货物装卸仅包括货舱中货物的垂直移动。集装箱也可以堆放在运输低密度货物的舱口盖上。为此目的存在特殊的绑扎设施,这种甲板货物在一定程度上弥补了甲板下容量的损失。
各个货舱由深强肋骨结构隔开,为船舶提供横向强度。集装箱的船体剖面每侧外侧都有箱状的边舱布置,为结构提供纵向强度。这些边舱可用于压载水,并且可以布置成在卸货集装箱时对抗船舶的倾斜。还安装了双层底,增加了纵向强度并提供额外的压载空间。
住舱和机舱通常位于船尾,以提供集装箱装载的全体船舶的最大长度。货物装卸设备很少安装,因为这些船舶在专门配备的码头之间快速装卸。集装箱船的尺寸差异很大,集装箱运载能力从100到2000或更多。作为专业承运船,它们专为快速运输而设计,是速度高达 30 节的高功率高速船舶。一些较大的船只具有三螺旋推进装置。

图1.6 集装箱船

客船

客轮,或其现代等价物邮轮,的存在是为了在宜人的气候下,在有趣的目的地之间为其人类货物提供一种豪华的运输方式。乘坐此类船舶的乘客付费并期望获得更高标准的住舱和休闲设施。因此,大量的上层建筑是客船的基本特征。多层甲板配有大型开放式休息室、宴会厅、游泳池和海滨长廊区(图 1.7)。
通常倾斜良好的剪刀式船首和不寻常的烟囱形状,线条美观。安装稳定器以减少横摇,并采用艏侧推以提高机动性。大型客轮很少见,排水量为12000吨的中型邮轮现在更为普遍。载客能力约为600,速度在22节左右。


图1.7 客船
2
Ship Stresses and Shipbuilding Materials
Theship at sea or lying in still water is being constantly subjected to a widevariety of stresses and strains, which result from the action of forces fromoutside and within the ship. Forces within the ship result from structuralweight, cargo, machinery weight and the effects of operating machinery.Exterior forces include the hydrostatic pressure of the water on the hull andthe action of the wind and waves. The ship must at all times be able to resistand withstand these messes and strains throughout its structure. It musttherefore be constructed in a manner, and of such materials, that will providethe necessary strength. The ship must also be able to function efficiently as acargo-carrying vessel.
The various forcesacting on a ship are constantly varying as to their degree and frequency. Forsimplicity, however, they will be considered individually and the particularmeasures adopted to counter each type of force will be outlined.
The forces mayinitially be classified as static and dynamic. Static forces are due to thedifferences in weight and buoyancy which occur at various points along thelength of the ship. Dynamic forces result from the ship's motion in the sea andthe action of the wind and waves. A ship is free to move with six degrees offreedom - three linear and three rotational. These motions are described by theterms shown in Figure 2.1.
These static anddynamic forces create longitudinal, transverse and local stresses in the ship'sstructure. Longitudinal stresses are greatest in magnitude and result in bendingof the ship along its length.

Figure 2.1 Shipmovement – the six degrees of freedom

Longitudinal stresses

Static loading

If the ship is consideredfloating in still water, two different forces will be acting upon it along itslength. The weight of the ship and its contents will be acting vertically downwards.The buoyancy or vertical component of hydrostatic pressure will be actingupwards. in total, the two forces exactly equal and balance one another suchthat the ship floats at some particular draught. The centre of the buoyancyforce and the centre of the weight will be vertically in line. However, atparticular points along the ship's length the net effect may be an excess ofbuoyancy or an excess of weight. This net effect produces a loading of thestructure, as with a beam. This loading results in shearing forces and bending momentsbeing set up in the ship's structure which tend to bend it. The static forcesacting on a ship's structure are shown in Figure 2.2(a). This distribution ofweight and buoyancy will also result in a variation of load, shear forces andbending moments along the length of the ship, as shown in Figures 2.2(b)-(d).Depending upon the direction in which the bending moment acts, the ship willbend in a longitudinal vertical plane. This bending moment is known as thestill water bending moment (SWBM). Special terms are used to describe the twoextreme cases: where the buoyancy amidships exceeds the weight, the ship is saidto 'hog', and this condition is shown in Figure 2.3; where the weight amidshipsexceeds the buoyancy, the ship is said to 'sag', and this condition is shown inFigure 2.4.

Figure 2.2 Static loadingof a ship’s structure

Figure 2.3 Hoggingcondition

Figure 2.4 Saggingcondition

Dynamic loading

If the ship is nowconsidered to be moving among waves, the distribution of weight will still bethe same. The distribution of buoyancy, however, will vary as a result of thewaves. the movement of the ship will also introduce dynamic forces.
The traditionalapproach to solving this problem is to convert this dynamic situation into anequivalent static one. To do this, the ship is assumed to be balanced on astatic wave of trochoidal form and length equalto the ship. The profile of a wave at sea is considered to be a trochoid. Thisgives waves where the crests are sharper than the troughs. The wave crest is consideredinitially at midships and then at the ends of the ship. The maximum hogging andsagging moments will thus occur in the structure far the particular loadedcondition considered, as shown in Figure 2.5.
The total shearforce and bending moment are thus obtained and these will include the stillwater bending moment considered previously. If actual loading conditions forthe ship are considered which will make the above conditions worse, e.g. heavyloads amidships when the wave trough is amidships, then the maximum bending momentsin normal operating service can be found.
The ship'sstructure will thus be subjected to constantly fluctuatingstresses resulting from these shear forces and bending moments as the wavesmove along the ship's length.

Figure 2.5 Dynamicloading of a ship’s structure: (a) still water condition; (b) saggingcondition; (c) hogging condition

Stressing of the structure

The bending of aship causes stresses to be set up within its structure. When a ship sags,tensile stresses are set up in the bottom shell plating and compressive tressesare set up in the deck. When the ship hogs, tensile stresses occur in the decksand compressive stresses in the bottom shell. This stressing, whethercompressive or tensile, reduces in magnitude towards a position known as theneutral axis. The neutral axis in a ship is somewhere below half the depth andis, in effect, a horizontal line drawn through the centre of gravity of the ship'ssection.
The fundamentalbending equation for a beam is
M / I = σ / y
whereM is The bending moment, I is the second moment of area of the section aboutits neutral axis, σ is thestress at the outer fibres, and y is the distance from the neutral axis to theouter fibres.
This equation hasbeen proved in full-scale tests to be applicable to the longitudinal bending ofa ship. From the equation the expression
σ = M / I/y
isobtained for the stress in the material at some distance y from the neutralaxis. The values M, I and y can be determined for the ship, and the resultingstresses in the deck and bottom shell can be found. The ratio I/y is known asthe section modulus, Z, when y is measured to the extreme edge of the section.The values are determined for the midship section, since the greatest momentwill occur at or near midships (see Figure 2.2). A more detailed explanation ofthis process is given in Muckle's work, Naval Architecture for MarineEngineers, previously cited.
The structuralmaterial included in the calculation for the second moment I will be all thelongitudinal material which extends for a considerable proportion of the ship'slength. This material will include side and bottom shell plating, inner bottomplating (where fitted), centre girders and decks. The material forms what is knownas the hull girder, whose dimensions are very large compared to its thickness.

Transverse stresses

Staticloading

A transversesection of a ship is subjected to static pressure from the surrounding water inaddition to the loading resulting from the weight of the structure, cargo, etc.Although transverse stresses are of lesser magnitude than longitudinalstresses, considerable distortion of the structure could occur, in the absenceof adequate stiffening (Figure 2.6).
The parts of thestructure which resist transverse stresses are transverse bulkheads, floors in thedouble bottom (where fitted), deck beams, side frames and the brackets betweenthem and adjacent structure such as tank top flooring or margin plates

Figure 2.6 Staticwater pressure loading of a ship’s structure

Dynamicstresses

When a ship is rollingit is accelerated and decelerated, resulting in forces in the structure tendingto distort it. This condition is known as racking and its greatest effect is feltwhen the ship is in the light or ballast condition (Figure 2.7). The bracketsand beam knees joining horizontal and vertical items of structure are used toresist this distortion.

Figure 2.7 Racking

Localised stresses

The movement of aship in a seaway results in forces being generated which are largely of a localnature. These forces are, however, liable to cause the structure to vibrate andthus transmit stresses to other pans of the structure.

Slamming or pounding

In heavy weather,when the ship is heaving and pitching, the forward end leaves and re-enters thewater with a slamming effect (Figure 2.8). This slamming down of the forwardregion on to the water is known as pounding. Additional stiffening must befitted in the pounding region to reduce the possibility of damage to thestructure. This is discussed further in Section A of Chapter 5.

Figure 2.8 Pounding

Panting

The movement ofwaves along a ship causes fluctuations in waterpressure on the plating. The tends to create an in-and-out movement of theshell plating, known as panting. The effect is particularly evident at the bowsas the ship pushes its way through the water.
The pitching motionof the ship produces additional variations in water pressure, particularly atthe bow and stem, which also cause panting of the plating. Additionalstiffening is provided in the form of panting beams and stringers. This is discussedfurther in Section D of Chapter 5.

Localisedloading

Heavy weights, suchas equipment in the machinery spaces or particular items of general cargo, cangive rise to localised distortion of the transverse section (Figure 2.9).Arrangements for spreading the load, additional stiffening and thicker platingare methods used in dealing with this problem.

Figure 2.9 Localisedloads tending to distort the ship’s structure

Superstructuresand discontinuities

The ends of superstructuresrepresent major discontinuities in the ship's structure where a considerable changein section modulus occurs. Localised stresses will occur which may result in crackingof adjacent structure. Sharp discontinuities, are therefore to be avoided bygradual tapers being introduced. Thicker strakes of deck and shell plating may also be fittedat these points.
Any holes oropenings cut in decks create similar areas of high local stress. well-roundedcomers must be used where openings are necessary, and doubling plates may alsobe filled. in the case of hatchways the bulk of the longitudinal strength materialis concentrated outboard of the hatch openings on either side to reduce thechange in section modulus at the openings. This is discussed further in SectionsB and F of Chapter 5.

Vibrations

Vibrations set upin a ship due to reciprocating machinery, propellers, etc., can result in thesetting up of stresses in the structure. These are cyclic stresses which couldresult in fatigue failure of local items of structure leading to more generalcollapse. Balancing of machinery and adequate propeller tip clearances can reducethe effects of vibration to acceptable proportions. Apart from possible damageto equipment and structure, the presence of vibration can be most uncomfortableto any passengers and the crew.
The design of the structureis outside the scope of this book. The various shipbuilding materials used to providethe structure will now be considered.

Steel

Steel is the basicshipbuilding material in use today. Steel may be regarded as an iron-carbonalloy, usually containing other elements, the carbon content not usually exceedingabout 2%. Special steels of high tensile strength are used on certain highlystressed parts of the ship's structure. Aluminium alloys have particularapplications in the construction of superstructures, especially on passengerships.

Production

'Acid' or 'basic'are terms often used when referring to steels. The reference is to theproduction process and the type of furnace lining, e.g. an alkaline or basiclining is used to produce basic steel. The choice of furnace lining is dictatedby the raw materials used in the manufacture of the steel. There are three particularprocesses currently used for the manufacture of carbon steel namely the open hearthprocess, the oxygen or basic oxygen steel process and the electric furnace process.in all these processes the hot molten metal is exposed to air or oxygen whichoxidises the impurities to refine the pig iron into high quality steel.
In the open hearthprocess a long shallow furnace is used which is fired from both ends. A highproportion of steel scrap may be used in this process. High quality steel is producedwhose properties can be controlled by the addition of suitable alloyingelements.
In the oxygen orbasic oxygen steel process the molten metal is contained in a basic linedfurnace. A jet of oxygen is injected into the molten metal by an overheadlance. Alloying elements can be introduced into the molten metal and a highquality steel is produced.
In the electricfurnace process, an electric arc is struck between carbon electrodes and thesteel charge in the furnace. Accurate control of the final composition of thesteel and a high standard of purity are possible with this process.

Finishing treatment

Steels from theabove-mentioned processes will all contain an excess of oxygen, usually in theform of iron oxide. Several finishing treatments are possible in the finalcasting of the steel.
Rimmed steel is producedas result of little or no treatment to remove Oxygen. in the molten state theoxygen combines with the carbon in the steel, releasing carbon monoxide gas. Onsolidifying, an almost pure iron outer surface is formed. The central core ofthe ingot is, however, a mass of blow holes. Hot rolling of the ingot usually 'weldsup' these holes but thick plates of this material are prone to laminations.
Killed steel is producedby fixing the Oxygen by the addition of aluminium or silicon before pouring thesteel into the mould. The aluminium or silicon produces oxides reducing theiron oxides to iron. A homogeneous material of superior quality to rimmed steelis thus produced.
Balanced or semi-killedsteels are an intermediate form of steel. This results from the beginning ofthe rimming process in the mould and its termination by the use of deoxidisers.
Vacuum degassedsteels are produced by reducing the atmospheric pressure when the steel is illthe molten state. The equilibrium between carbon and oxygen is thus obtained ata much lower level and the oxygen content becomes very small. Final residualdeoxidation can be achieved with the minimum additions of aluminium or silicon.A very 'clean' steel is produced with good notch toughness properties andfreedom from lamellar tearing problems (lamellartearing is explained in Chapter 4).
The composition ofsteel has a major influence on its properties and this will be discussed in thenext subsection. The properties of steel are further improved by various formsof heat treatment which will now be outlined. in simplified terms the heattreatment of steels results in a change in the grain structure which alters themechanical properties of the material.

Normalising.The steel is heated to a temperature of 850-950°C depending upon its carboncontent and then allowed to cool in air. A hard strong steel with a refinedgrain structure is produced.

Annealing.Again the steel is heated to around 850-950°C, but is cooled slowly either in thefurnace or in an insulated space. A softer more ductilesteel than that in the normalised condition is produced.

Hardening.The steel is heated to 850-950°C and then rapidly cooled by quenching in oil orwater. The hardest possible condition for the particular steel is thus producedand the tensile strength is increased.

Tempering.This process follows the quenching of steel andinvolves reheating to some temperature up to about 680°C. The higher thetempering temperature the lower the tensile properties of the steel. Oncetempered, the metal is rapidly cooled by quenching.

Composition and properties

Various terms areused with reference to steel and other materials to describe their properties.These terms will now be explained in more detail

Tensilestrength. This is the main single criterion with reference to metals. It is ameasure of the material's ability to withstand the loads upon it in service.Terms such as stress, strain, ultimate tensile strength, yield stress and proofstress are all different methods of quantifying the tensile strength of thematerial. The two main factors affecting tensile strength are the carboncontent of the steel and its heat treatment following manufacture.

Ductility.This is the ability of a material to undergo permanent changes in shape withoutrupture or loss of strength. It is particularly important where metals undergoforming processes during manufacture.

Hardness.     This is a measure of the workability of thematerial. It is used as an assessment of the machinability of the material andits resistance to abrasion.

Toughness.This is a condition midway between brittlenessand softness. It is often quantified by the value obtained in a notched bartest.

Standard steel sections

A variety ofstandard sections are produced with varying scantlings to suit theirapplication. The stiffening of plates and sections utilises one or more ofthese sections. which are shown in Figure 2.10.

Figure 2.10 Standardsteel sections: (a) flat plate; (b) offset bulb plate; (c) equal angle; (d)unequal angle; (e) channel; (f) tee

Shipbuilding steels

The steel used in shipconstruction is mild steel with a 0.15-0.23% carbon content. The propertiesrequired of a good shipbuilding steel are:

(1) Reasonablecost.
(2) Easily weldedwith simple techniques and equipment.
(3) Ductility andhomogeneity.
(4) Yield point tobe a high proportion of ultimate tensile strength.
(5) Chemicalcomposition suitable for flame cutting without hardening.
(6) Resistance to corrosion.

These features areprovided by the five grades of mild steel (A-E) designated by the classificationsocieties (see Chapter 10). To be classed, the steel for ship construction mustbe manufactured under approved conditions, and inspected, and prescribed testsmust be carried out on selected specimens. Finished material is stamped withthe society's brand, a symbol with L superimposed on R being of Lloyd’s Register.The chemical composition and mechanical properties of a selection of mild steelgrades are given in Table 2.1.

Table 2.1PROPERTIES AND COMPOSITION OF SOME MILD STEELS

Table 2.2PROPERTIES AND COMPOSITION OF SOME HIGH TENSILE STEELS

Table 2.3PROPERTIES AND COMPOSITION OF LOW TEMPERATURE CONSTRUCTIONAL MATERIALS

Developments in steelproduction and alloying techniques have resulted in the availability of higherstrength steels for ship construction. These higher tensile strength (HTS)steels, as they are called, have adequate notch toughness, ductility andweldability, in addition to their increased strength. The increased strengthresults from the addition of alloying elements such as vanadium, chromium,nickel and niobium. Niobium in particular improves the mechanical properties oftensile strength and notch ductility. Particular care must be taken in thechoice of electrodes and welding processes for these steels. Low hydrogenelectrodes and welding processes must be used. Table 2.2 indicates the chemicalcomposition and mechanical properties of several high tensile steel grades. Aspecial grade mark, H, is used by the classification societies to denote highertensile steel.
Benefits arisingfrom the use of these steels in ship construction include reduced structuralweight, since smaller sections may be used; larger unit fabrications arepossible for the same weight and less welding time, although a more specialisedprocess, is needed for the reduced material scantlings.
Cryogenic or lowtemperature materials are being increasingly used as a consequence of thecarriage of liquefied gases in bulk tankers. Table 2.3 details the propertiesand composition of several of these cryogenic materials. The main criterion ofselection is an adequate amount of notch toughness at the operating temperatureto be encountered. Various alloys are principally used for the very lowtemperature situations, although special quality carbon/manganese steels havebeen used satisfactorily down to -50°C.

Castings and forgings

The larger castingsused in ship construction are usually manufactured from carbon or carbonmanganese steels. Table 2.4 details the composition and properties of thesematerials. Examples of large castings are the stern frame, bossings, A-bracketsand parts of the rudder. The examples mentioned may also be manufactured as forgings.Table 2.4 also details the composition and properties of materials used forforgings.

Table 2.4PROPERTIES AND COMPOSITION OF CASTING AND FORGING MATERIALS

Table 2.5PROPERTIES AND COMPOSITION OF ALUMINIUM ALLOY CONSTRUCTIONAL MATERIALS

Aluminium alloys

The increasing useof aluminium alloy has resulted from its several advantages over steel.Aluminium is about one-third the weight of steel for equivalent volume ofmaterial. The use of aluminium alloys in a structure can result in reductionsof 60% of the weight of an equivalent steel structure. This reduction in weight,particularly in the upper regions of the structure, can improve the stability ofthe vessel. This follows from the lowering of the vessel's centre of gravity,resulting in an increased metacentric height. Stability is discussed in detailin Muckle's Naval Architecture for Marine Engineering. The corrosion resistanceof aluminium is very good but careful maintenance and insulation from theadjoining steel structure are necessary. The properties required of analuminium alloy to be used in ship construction are much the same as for steel,namely strength, resistance to corrosion, workability and weldabilily. Theserequirements are adequately met, the main disadvantage being the high cost ofaluminium.
The chemicalcomposition and mechanical properties of the common shipbuilding alloys areshown in Table 2.5. Again these are classification society gradings where thematerial must be manufactured and tested to the satisfaction of the society.
Aluminium alloysare available as plate and section, and a selection of aluminium alloy sectionsis shown in Figure 2.11. These sections are formed by extrusion, which is theforcing of a billet of the hot material through a suitably shaped die.Intricate or unusual shapes to suit particular applications are thereforepossible.
Where aluminiumalloys join the steel structure, special insulating arrangements must be employedto avoid galvanic corrosion where the metals meet (see Chapter II). Whererivets are used, they should be manufactured from a corrosion-resistant alloy(see Table 2.5).

Figure 2.11 Aluminiumalloy sections

Materials testing

Various qualitiesof the materials discussed so far have been mentioned. These qualities aredetermined by a variety of tests which are carried out on samples of the metal.
The terms 'stress'and 'strain' are used most frequently. Stress or intensity of stress, itscorrect name, is the force acting on a unit area of the material. Strain is thedeforming of a material due to stress. When the force applied to a materialtends to shorten or compress the material, the stress is termed 'compressivestresses’. When the force applied to a material tends to lengthen the material,the stress is termed 'tensile stresses’. When the force tends to cause thevarious parts of the material to slide over one another the stress is termed'shear stress'.
The tensile test isused to determine the behaviour of a material up to its breaking point. A speciallyshaped specimen piece (Figure 2.12) of standard size is gripped in the jaws ofa testing machine. A load is gradually applied to draw the ends of the barapart such that it is subject to a tensile stress. The original test length L1of the specimen is known and for each applied load the new length L2can be measured. The specimen will be found to have extended by some smallamount L2 -L1. This deformation, expressed as
Extension /Original length
isknown as the linear strain.
Figure 2.12 Tensiletest specimens: (a) for plates, strips and sections (a = thickness ofmaterial); (b) for hot-rolled bar
Additional loadingof the specimen will produce results which show a uniform increase of extensionuntil the yield point is reached. Up to the yield point the removal of load wouldhave resulted in the specimen returning to its original size. Stress and strainare therefore proportional up to the yield point, or elastic limit as it is alsoknown. The stress and strain values for various loads can be shown on a graphsuch as Figure 2.13.
Figure 2.13 Stress/ Strain graph for mild steel
Figure 2.14 Stress/ Strain graph for higher tensile steel

If the testing werecontinued beyond the yield point the specimen would 'neck' or reduce in cross-section.The load values divided by the original specimen cross-sectional area wouldgive the sharp shown in Figure 2.14. The highest value of stress is known asthe ultimate tensile stress (UTS) of the material.
Within the elasticlimit, stress is proportional to strain, and therefore
Stress / Strain =constant
Thisconstant is known as the 'modulus of elasticity' (E) of the material and hasthe same units as stress. The yield stress is the value of stress at the yieldpoint. Where a clearly defined yield point is not obtained a proof stress valueis given. This is obtained by a line parallel to the stress-strain line beingdrawn at some percentage of the strain, such as 0.1%, The intersection of thisline with the stress-strain line is considered the proof stress (see Figure2.14).
The bend test is usedto determine the ductility of a material. A piece of material is bent over aradiused former, sometimes through 180 degrees. No cracks or surface laminations should appear in the material.
Impact tests canhave a number of forms but the Charpy vee-notch test is usually specified. Thetest specimen is a 10 mm square cross-section, 55 mm in Length. A vee-notch is cutin the centre of one face, as shown in Figure 2.15. The specimen is mountedhorizontally with the notch axis vertical. The test involves the specimen beingstruck opposite the notch and fractured. A striker or hammer on the end of aswinging pendulum provides the blow which breaks the specimen. The energyabsorbed by the material in fracturing is measured by the machine. A particularvalue of average impact energy must be obtained for the material at the testtemperature. This test is particularly important for materials to be used in lowtemperature regions. For low temperature testing the specimen is cooled byimmersion in a bath of liquid nitrogen or dry ice and acetone for about 15minutes. The specimen is then handled and tested rapidly to minimise anytemperature changes. The impact test, in effect, measures a material'sresistance to fracture when shock loaded.
Figure 2.15 Charpyimpact test

A dump test is usedon a specimen length of bar from which rivets are to be made. The bar is compressedto half its original length and no surface cracks must appear. Other rivetmaterial tests include bending the shank until the two ends touch without anycracks or fractures appearing. The head must also accept flattening until itreaches two and a half times the shank diameter.


船舶应力和造船材料

在海上或静水中的船舶不断受到各种应力和应变的作用,这些应力和应变来自船舶内外的力的作用。船内的力来自结构重量、货物、机器重量和操作机器的影响。外力包括水对船体的静水压力以及风和波浪的作用。船舶必须始终能够抵抗和承受整个结构中的这些应力和应变。因此,它必须以提供必要强度的方式和材料来构造。船还必须能够有效地作为载货船只。
作用在船上的各种力在程度和频率上不断变化。然而,为了简单起见,它们将被单独考虑,并且将概述为对抗每种类型的力而采取的特定措施。
力初步可以分为静态力和动态力。静力是由于重量和浮力的差异而产生的,这种差异出现在沿船舶长度方向的不同点上。动力来自船在海里的运动以及风和波浪的作用。一艘船可以自由移动,有六个自由度——三个线性自由度和三个旋转自由度。这些运动用图2.1所示的术语来描述。

图2.1船的运动-6个自由度

这些静态和动态力在船舶结构中产生纵向、横向和局部应力。纵向应力最大,导致船舶沿其长度弯曲。

图2.2船体结构的静态载荷

纵向应力

静态载荷

如果船被认为是漂浮在静止的水中,两种不同的力将沿着它的长度方向作用于它。船的重量及其内容物将垂直向下作用。静水压力的浮力或垂直分量将向上作用。总的来说,这两个力正好相等并相互平衡,这样船就能在特定的吃水深度下漂浮。浮力的中心和重量的中心将垂直地在一条线上。然而,在沿船舶长度的特定点上,净效应可能是浮力过剩或重量过剩。这种净效应产生了结构的载荷,就像梁一样。这种负载导致船舶结构中产生剪切力和弯矩,从而使其弯曲。作用在船舶结构上的静力如图2.2(a)所示。如图2.2(b)-(d)所示,重量和浮力的这种分布也会导致载荷、剪切力和弯矩沿船舶长度的变化。根据弯矩作用的方向,船将在纵向垂直平面内弯曲。这个弯矩被称为静水弯矩(SWBM)。特殊术语用于描述两种极端情况:当船中部的浮力超过重量时,船舶被称为“中拱”,这种情况如图2.3所示;当船中部的重量超过浮力时,船舶被称为“中垂”,这种情况如图2.4所示。

图2.3中拱状态
图2.4中垂状态

动态载荷

如果船现在被认为是在波浪中运动,重量的分布仍然是一样的。然而,浮力的分布会因波浪而变化。船的运动也将引入动态力。
解决这个问题的传统方法是将这种动态情况转换成等效的静态情况。为了做到这一点,假设船舶在与船舶长度相等的余摆线形式的静态波浪上保持平衡。海上波浪的轮廓被认为是次摆线。这就产生了波峰比波谷更尖锐的波浪。波峰最初被认为是在船的中部,然后是在船的两端。如图2.5所示,在所考虑的特定载荷条件下,最大中拱和中垂力矩将出现在结构中。

图2.5船体结构的动态负载:(a)静水状态;(b)中垂状态;(c)中拱状态

这样就得到总剪力和弯矩,其中包括前面考虑的静水弯矩。如果考虑到船舶的实际装载工况,这将使上述状态变得更糟,例如,当波谷位于船中部时,船中部的重负载,则可以找到正常运行服务中的最大弯矩。
因此,当波浪沿着船的长度移动时,船的结构将受到由这些剪切力和弯矩产生的不断波动的应力。

结构的应力

船的弯曲使其结构内部产生应力。当船中垂时,船底外板会产生拉应力,甲板会产生压应力。当船中拱时,甲板上会产生拉应力,船底会产生压应力。这种应力,无论是压缩应力还是拉伸应力,都朝着称为中性轴的位置减小。船的中性轴在一半深度以下的某个地方,实际上是一条穿过船身重心的水平线。
梁的基本弯曲方程为
M / I = σ / y
其中M是弯矩,I是截面绕中性轴的二阶面积矩,σ是外层纤维的应力,y是中性轴到外层纤维的距离。
该方程在实船试验中已被证明适用于船舶的纵向弯曲。从方程中,得到表达式
σ = M / (I/y)
是在离中性轴一定距离y处的材料中的应力。可以确定船舶的MIy值,并且可以找到甲板和船底外板中的合成应力。当y测量到截面的最边缘时,比值I/y称为截面模量Z。这些值是对于船中截面确定的,因为最大力矩将出现在船中或靠近船中 (见图2.2)。这个过程的更详细的解释在前面引用的Muckle的著作《海洋工程师的船舶建筑》中给出。
在计算二阶面积矩I时,包括的结构材料将是延伸相当一部分船舶长度的所有纵向材料。这种材料将包括船舷和船底外板、内底板(如有安装)、中纵桁和甲板。这种材料形成了所谓的船体梁,与厚度相比,它的尺寸非常大。

横向应力

静态载荷

除了由结构、货物等的重量产生的载荷之外,船的横截面还受到来自周围水的静压力。尽管横向应力比纵向应力小,但如果没有足够的加强,结构可能会发生相当大的变形(图2.6)。
抵抗横向应力的结构部分是横向舱壁、双层底的肋板(如安装)、甲板横梁、舷侧肋骨和它们之间的肘板以及相邻结构,如舱顶肋板或边缘板。

图2.6横向船体结构的静水压力载荷

动态应力

当船横摇时,它被加速和减速,导致结构中的力倾向于扭曲它。这种情况被称为倾侧,当船舶处于空载或压载状态时,其影响最大(图2.7)。连接水平和垂直结构的肘板和梁弯头用来抵抗这种变形。

图2.7倾侧

局部应力

船舶在海上的运动导致产生的力主要是局部性质的。然而,这些力容易导致结构振动,从而将应力传递到结构的其他部分。

砰击或冲击

在恶劣天气下,当船舶发生垂荡和纵摇时,艏端离开并重新进入水中,产生砰击效应(图2.8)。这种艏部区域向水中的猛烈撞击被称为砰击(冲击)。必须在砰击区域安装额外的加强件,以降低损坏结构的可能性。这将在第5章A节中进一步讨论。

图2.8砰击

拍击

波浪沿着船的运动导致了板上水压的波动。倾向于产生外板的进出运动,称为拍击(振颤)。当船在水中前进时,这种效应在船头尤其明显。
船舶的纵摇运动会产生额外的水压变化,尤其是在船头和船尾,这也会导致船板拍击。额外的加强以抗震横梁和纵材的形式提供。这将在第5章D节中进一步讨论。

局部负载

较重的重量,如机舱中的设备或某些杂货,会引起横截面的局部变形(图2.9)。处理这一问题的方法是分散载荷、额外的加强和加厚板。

上层建筑和不连续性

上层建筑的末端代表了船舶结构中的主要不连续性,在此处,截面模量发生了相当大的变化。将出现局部应力,这可能导致相邻结构开裂。因此,通过引入渐变来避免尖锐的不连续性。在这些点上也可以安装较厚的甲板列板和船外板。
甲板上的任何孔洞或开口都会产生类似的高局部应力区域。在需要开口的地方必须使用圆角,也可以安装复板。对于舱口的情况,大部分纵向强度材料集中在舱口开口两侧的舷外侧,以减少开口处截面模量的变化。这将在第5章B和F节中进一步讨论。


图2.9趋使船体结构扭转变形的局部载荷

振动

由于往复机器、螺旋桨等在船上产生的振动。会导致结构中产生应力。这些是循环应力,可能导致结构局部的疲劳破坏,进而导致更普遍的倒塌。机器平衡和适当的螺旋桨桨尖间隙可以将振动的影响降低到可接受的程度。除了可能损坏设备和结构之外,振动的存在可能会使乘客和船员感到非常不舒服。
结构的设计超出了本书的范围。现在将考虑用于提供该结构的各种造船材料。

钢铁

钢是今天使用的基本造船材料。钢可以被认为是一种铁碳合金,通常含有其他元素,碳含量通常不超过2%。高抗拉强度的特种钢被用在船体结构的某些高应力部位。铝合金在建造上层建筑,尤其是客轮上有特殊的用途。

生产

“酸性”或“碱性”是指钢时经常使用的术语。参考生产工艺和炉衬类型,例如碱性炉衬用于生产碱性钢。炉衬的选择取决于炼钢所用的原材料。目前有三种用于制造碳钢的特殊方法,即平炉法、氧气或碱性氧气炼钢法和电炉法。在所有这些过程中,熔融金属暴露在空气或氧气中,氧化杂质,将生铁炼成高质量的钢。
在平炉工艺中,使用一个从两端燃烧的长而浅的炉子。在这个过程中可能会用到大量的废钢。生产高质量的钢,其性能可以通过添加合适的合金元素来控制。
在氧气或碱性氧气炼钢法中,熔融金属装在碱性炉衬炉中。用头顶的喷枪将氧气喷入熔融金属中。合金元素可以被引入到熔融金属中,从而生产出高质量的钢。
在电炉法中,电弧在碳电极和炉中的钢料之间产生。用这种方法可以精确控制钢的最终成分和高标准的纯度。

整理处理

上述过程产生的钢都含有过量的氧,通常以氧化铁的形式存在。在钢的最终铸造中,可以进行几种精整处理。
沸腾钢是由于很少或根本没有脱氧处理而产生的。在熔融状态下,氧与钢中的碳结合,释放出一氧化碳气体。凝固时,形成几乎纯铁的外表面。然而,钢锭的中心是一大堆气孔。钢锭的热轧通常会“焊住”这些孔,但这种材料的厚板容易分层。
镇静钢是通过在将钢倒入模具之前添加铝或硅来固定氧而生产的。铝或硅产生氧化物,将氧化铁还原成铁。这样就生产出了质量优于沸腾钢的同质材料。
平衡钢或半镇静钢是钢的一种中间形态。这是由于模具中沸腾过程的开始和终止阶段使用脱氧剂。
当钢处于熔融状态时,通过降低大气压力来生产真空脱气钢。碳和氧之间的平衡因此在低得多的水平上获得,并且氧含量变得非常小。添加最少量的铝或硅就能达到最终的残余脱氧。一种非常“干净”的钢被生产出来,具有良好的缺口韧性,并且没有层状撕裂问题(层状撕裂在第4章中解释)。
钢的成分对其性能有重大影响,这将在下一小节中讨论。钢的性能通过各种形式的热处理得到进一步改善,下面将对此进行概述。简而言之,钢的热处理会导致晶粒结构的变化,从而改变材料的机械性能。

正常化。根据钢的含碳量,将钢加热到850-950 ℃,然后在空气中冷却。生产出具有精细晶粒结构的高强度钢。

退火。钢再一次被加热到850-950℃左右,但是在炉子里或者在一个隔热的空间里慢慢冷却。生产出比正常状态下更软、更有韧性的钢。

硬化。钢被加热到850-950 ℃,然后通过在油或水中淬火来快速冷却。因此产生了特定钢的最坚硬的可能条件,并增加了抗拉强度。

回火。这一过程在钢淬火后进行,包括加热到680℃左右。回火温度越高,钢的拉伸性能越低。一旦回火,金属通过淬火迅速冷却。

成分和性质

在描述钢和其他材料的特性时,使用了不同的术语。现在将更详细地解释这些术语。

拉伸强度。这是关于金属的主要单一标准。这是衡量材料在使用中承受负荷的能力。诸如应力、应变、极限拉伸强度、屈服应力和验证应力等术语都是量化材料拉伸强度的不同方法。影响抗拉强度的两个主要因素是钢的碳含量及其制造后的热处理。

延展性。这是一种材料在不破裂或不损失强度的情况下永久改变形状的能力。在制造过程中金属经受成形过程的地方,这一点尤其重要。

硬度。这是对材料可加工性的一种度量。它用于评估材料的可加工性及其耐磨性。

韧性。这是介于脆性和柔软性之间的一种状态。它通常由缺口棒试验中获得的值来量化。

标准型钢

各种各样的标准节生产与各种构件尺寸,以适应他们的应用。板和型材的加强利用了这些型材中的一个或多个。如图2.10所示。

图2.10标准型钢:(a)扁钢;(b)球扁钢;(c)等边角钢;(d)不等边角钢;(e)槽钢;(f)T型材

造船用钢

用于造船的钢是含碳量为0.15-0.23%的低碳钢。一种好的造船用钢所需的性能是:

(1)成本合理。
(2)易于焊接,工艺和设备简单。
(3)延展性和均匀性。
(4)屈服点是极限抗拉强度的一个高比例。
(5)化学成分适合火焰切割,无需硬化。
(6)抗腐蚀性。

这些特性由船级社指定的五个等级的低碳钢(A-E)提供(见第10章)。要进行入级,造船用钢必须在批准的条件下生产,并进行检验,而且必须对选定的样品进行规定的试验。成品材料上印有该协会的品牌,这是一个L叠加在R上的劳氏船级社标志。表2.1给出了一系列低碳钢的化学成分和机械性能。

钢铁生产和合金化技术的发展使得更高强度的钢可用于造船。这些所谓的高抗拉强度(HTS)钢,除了增加强度之外,还具有足够的缺口韧性、延展性和可焊性。强度的增加是由于添加了合金元素,如钒、铬、镍和铌。铌尤其提高了拉伸强度和缺口延展性的机械性能。对于这些钢,在选择电极和焊接工艺时必须特别小心。必须使用低氢焊条和焊接工艺。表2.2显示了几种高强度钢的化学成分和机械性能。船级社使用特殊的等级标记H来表示高强度钢。
在船舶建造中使用这些钢的好处包括减少结构重量,因为可以使用更小的截面;对于相同的重量和更少的焊接时间,更大的单元制造是可能的,尽管减少材料尺寸需要更专业的工艺。
由于用散装油轮运输液化气体,低温材料正越来越多地被使用。表2.3详细列出了几种低温材料的特性和成分。选择的主要标准是在工作温度下要有足够的缺口韧性。各种合金主要用于非常低的温度环境,尽管特殊质量的碳/锰钢已经在低至-50℃的情况下得到令人满意的应用。
表2.1某些低碳钢的化学成分和机械性能
表2.3某些高碳钢的化学成分和机械性能
表2.3某些低温材料的化学成分和机械性能

铸件和锻件

用于造船的大型铸件通常由碳钢或碳锰钢制成。表2.4详细说明了这些材料的成分和特性。大型铸件的例子有船尾肋骨、桨毂、A字支架和舵的零件。提到的例子也可以制造成锻件。表2.4还详细说明了锻件所用材料的成分和性能。
表2.4铸件和锻件的化学成分和机械性能
表2.5铝合金材料的化学成分和机械性能

铝合金

铝合金的使用越来越广泛,这是因为它比钢有几个优点。对于同等体积的材料,铝的重量大约是钢的三分之一。在结构中使用铝合金可以使同等钢结构的重量减少60%。这种重量的减少,特别是在结构的上部区域,可以提高船的稳性。这是由于船只重心降低,导致稳心高度增加。稳性在Muckle的《海洋工程船舶建筑》中有详细讨论。铝的耐腐蚀性非常好,但小心维护和与相邻钢结构的绝缘是必要的。用于造船的铝合金所要求的性能与钢的性能大致相同,即强度、耐腐蚀性、可加工性和可焊性。这些要求已充分满足,主要缺点是铝的成本高。
常用造船合金的化学成分和机械性能见表2.5。同样,这些是船级社分级,材料必须按照船级社的要求进行制造和测试。

图2.11铝合金型材

铝合金可用于板材和型材,图2.11显示了铝合金型材的选择。这些部分通过挤压形成,挤压是将热材料的坯料挤压通过合适形状的模具。因此,适合特定应用的复杂或不寻常的形状是可能的。
在铝合金连接钢结构的地方,必须采用特殊的绝缘装置,以避免金属接触处的电化腐蚀(见第二章)。如果使用铆钉,它们应该由耐腐蚀合金制成(见表2.5)。

材料试验

到目前为止所讨论的各种质量的材料已经提到。这些质量是由对金属样品进行的各种试验来确定的。
“应力”和“应变”这两个词用得最多。应力或应力强度,它的正确名称是作用在材料单位面积上的力。应变是材料因应力而产生的变形。当施加在材料上的力趋向于缩短或压缩材料时,这种应力称为“压应力”。当施加在材料上的力趋向于拉长材料时,这种应力称为“拉应力”。当力趋向于使材料的不同部分相互滑动时,这种应力称为“剪切应力”。

图2.12拉伸试验试样:(a)板、条、型材(a = 材料厚度);(b)热轧棒材
拉伸试验用于确定材料在断裂点之前的行为。标准尺寸的特殊形状试样(图2.12)被夹在试验机的钳口中。逐渐施加载荷以拉开杆的端部,使其承受拉伸应力。本的原始测试长度L1是已知的,并且对于每个施加的载荷,新的长度L2可以被测量。通过将L2 - L1人们将会发现,这个样本已经延伸了某个很小的量。这种变形表现为
延伸量/原始长度
被称为线性应变。
对试样加额外的载荷将产生结果,该结果显示延伸均匀增加,直到达到屈服点。在屈服点之前,移除载荷会导致试样恢复到其原始尺寸。因此,直到屈服点或弹性极限,应力与应变成正比。各种载荷下的应力和应变值可以显示在图2.13中。

图2.13低碳钢的应力-应变图
图2.13高拉力钢的应力-应变图

如果试验持续到超过屈服点,试样的横截面就会“收缩”或缩小。载荷值除以原始试样的横截面积,就得到图2.14所示的曲线。应力的最高值称为材料的极限拉伸应力(UTS)。
在弹性极限内,应力与应变成正比,因此
应力/应变=常数
该常数被称为材料的弹性模量”(E),其单位与应力相同。屈服应力是屈服点处的应力值。如果没有获得明确定义的屈服点,则给出一个验证应力值。这是通过在应变的某个百分比(0.1%)画一条平行于应力-应变线的线获得的,这条线与应力-应变线的交点被认为是验证应力(见图2.14)
弯曲试验用于确定材料的延展性。一块材料在一个弧形样板上弯曲,有时弯曲180度。材料中不应出现裂纹或表面分层。

图2.15夏比冲击试验
冲击试验可以有多种形式,但夏比v形缺口试验通常是指定的。试样是一个10毫米见方的横截面,长55毫米。在一个面的中心切出一个v形切口,如图2.15所示。试样水平安装,缺口轴垂直。该试验包括在缺口对面撞击样品并使其断裂。在摆动的钟摆末端有一个撞针或锤子,它提供了击碎样品的力量。破裂时材料吸收的能量由机器测量。必须获得材料在试验温度下的特定平均冲击能量值。该测试对于在低温区域使用的材料尤为重要。对于低温试验,将样品浸入液氮或干冰和丙酮浴中冷却约15分钟。然后快速处理和测试样本,以最大限度地减少任何温度变化。冲击试验实际上是测量材料在冲击载荷下的抗断裂能力。
倾倒试验用于制作铆钉的一段棒材样品。棒材被压缩至其原始长度的一半,并且不得出现表面裂纹。其他铆钉材料测试包括弯曲铆钉杆,直到两端接触而不出现任何裂纹或断裂。头部也必须接受展平,直到它达到柄直径的两倍半。






回复

使用道具 举报

龙船学院
 楼主| 发表于 2023-2-18 23:05 | 显示全部楼层 来自: 中国上海
3
Shipbuilding

Building a ship is a complex process involving the many departments of the ship building organization, the arrangement and use of shipyard facilities and the many skills of the various personnel involved. Those departments directly involved in the construction, the shipyard layout, material movement and the equipment used will be examined in turn.

Drawing office

The main function of the shipyard's design and drawing offices is to produce the working drawing to satisfy the owner's requirements, the rules of the classification societies and the shipyard's usual building practices. A secondary, but nevertheless important, function is to provide information to the production planning and control departments, the purchasing departments, etc., to enable steelwork outfitting and machinery items to be ordered and delivered to satisfy the building programme for the ship.
Closely following the basic design drawing will be the production of the lines plan. This plan (Figure 3.1) is a scale drawing of the moulded dimensions of the ship in plan, profile and section. The ship's length between the forward and after perpendiculars is divided into ten equally spaced divisions or stations numbered 1 to 10. Transverse sections of the ship at the various stations are drawn to give a drawing known as the body plan. Since the vessel is symmetrical, half-sections are given. The stations 0 to 5 representing the after half of the ship are shown on the left side of the body plan with the forward sections shown on the right. The profile or sheer plan shows the general outline of the ship, any sheer of the decks, the deck positions and all the waterlines. For clarity, the deck positions have been omitted from Figure 3.1 and only three waterlines are shown. The various stations are also drawn on this view. Additional stations may be used at the fore and aft ends, where the section change is considerable. The half-breadth plan shows the shape of the waterlines and the decks formed by horizontal planes at the various waterline heights from the keel. This plan is usually superimposed upon the profile or sheer plan, as shown in Figure 3.1.
The initial lines plan is drawn for the design and then checked for 'fairness'. To be 'fair' all the curved Lines must run evenly and smoothly. There must also be exact correspondence between dimensions shown for a particular point in all the three different views. The fairing operation, once the exclusive province of a skilled loftsman, is now largely accomplished by computer programs.
Once faired, the final lines plan is prepared and a table of offsets is compiled for use in producing the ship's plates and frames.
The traditional practice of drawing plans according to structural areas such as the shell, the deck, the double-bottom framing, etc., is inconvenient in many cases since the ship is nowadays built up of large prefabricated units. A unit may consist of shell plating, some framing and part of a deck. An expansion of a ship's shell is given in Figure 3.2, showing the positions of the various units.
Plans are therefore drawn in relation to units and contain all the information required to build a particular unit. A number of traditional plans are still produced for classification society purposes, future maintenance and reference, but without the wealth of manufacturing information which is only needed on the unit plans.
The planning and production control departments require drawing information to compile charts for monitoring progress, compiling programmes, producing programmes for material delivery, parts production and assembly and finally unit production and erection.

Figure 3.1 Lines plan

Figure 3.2 Shell expansion by units

Figure 3.3 Nesting of plans

Plan approval

The fundamental design plans and basic constructional details must all receive classification society approval and, of course, the shipowner's approval. Unusual aspects of design and innovations in constructional methods will receive special attention, as will any departures from standard practice. Progress is not hindered by the classification societies, whose main concern is the production of a sound and safe structure.
The shipowner will normally have clearly indicated his requirements from the design inception and his approval of plans is usually straightforward. Most large ship owning companies have a technical staff who utilise their practical experience in developing as near perfect and functional a design as possible.

Plan issue

With plan approval the ordering of equipment, machinery, steel section and plate, etc., will begin and the plans will be issued to the various production departments in the shipyard. The classification society, the owners and their representatives in the shipyard also receive copies of the plans.
During the manufacturing processes, as a result of problems encountered, feedback from previous designs, modifications requested by the owner, etc., amendments may be made to plans. A system of plan recall, replacement or modification in the production departments must be available. This ensures that any future ships in a series do not carry the same faults and that corrective action has been taken.

Steel ordering

The ordering of steel to ensure availability in line with programmed requirements is essential. It must therefore begin at the earliest opportunity, occasionally before plan approval where delivery problems may occur. The steel ordering is a key function in the production process, requiring involvement with the drawing office, planning departments, production departments and the steel supplier. The monitoring and control of stock is also important, since the steel material for a ship is a substantial part of the ship's final cost. Stock held by a shipyard represents a considerable capital investment.

Loft work

Loft work takes place in a mould loft. The mould loft is a large covered area with a wooden floor upon which the ship's details are drawn to full size or some smaller more convenient scale. Much of the traditional loft work is now done by computer but some specialist areas still require wooden templates to be made, mock-ups to be constructed, etc.
In the traditional mould loft operation the lines plan and working drawing information is converted into full-scale lines drawn on the loft floor. From these lines the fairing or smoothness of the ship's lines is checked and a scrieve board produced. A scrieve board is a wooden board with the body sections at every frame spacing drawn in. Once the ship's lines are checked and fair, a half-block model is constructed by joiners usually to about 1/50th scale. This model has the exact lines of the ship and is used to mark out the actual plates on the shell giving all the positions of the butts and seams.
The loftsman can now produce templates for marking, cutting and bending the actual plates using the full-size scrieve board markings in conjunction with the plate positions from the model. A table of offsets is produced finally for the various frames and plates, giving manufacturing information for the various trades involved in production.

One-tenth scale lofting

With one-tenth scale lofting the mould loft becomes more of a drawing office with long tables. Fairing is achieved using the one-tenth scale drawings. The scrieve board is made to one-tenth scale, perhaps on white-painted plywood. One-tenth scale drawings are then made of the ship's individual plates. These drawings may then be photographed and reduced in scale to one-hundredth of full size for optical projection and marking of the plates. Alternatively, the one-tenth scale drawings may be traced directly by a cutting machine head.

Figure 3.4 Production of numerical control machine input data

Numerical control

A numerical control system is one where a machine is operated and controlled by the insertion of numerical data. The numerical data is a sequence of numbers which fully describe a part to be produced. ln addition, the use of certain code numbers enables instructions to be fed into the machine to enable it to operate automatically. A reading device on the machine converts the numbers into electrical impulses which become control signals for the various parts of the machine which produce the finished part.
The input data for the machine is initially produced from drawings and offset information. The various parts to be produced are programmed and then coded or described in numerical terms. Punched card, punched tape or magnetic tape is then produced containing the numerical data. The card or tape information is then fed into a computer nesting program. The various parts are then ' nested' or economically fitted into a standard plate size (Figure 3.3). A final punched or magnetic tape as produced which is used for the operation of the numerically controlled machine. This process as illustrated by a simple flow chart in Figure 3.4.

Shipyard layout

The shipyard layout is arranged to provide a logical ordered flow of materials and equipment towards final unit build-up, erection and outfitting of the ship. The various production stages are arranged in work areas or 'shops' and as far as practicable in modern yards, take place under cover. The sequence of events is outlined in Figure 3.5.

Preliminary ship design

Drawing of detailed plans                Steel ordered                        Steel delivered
Approval of plans and issue

Loftwork and production of table of offsets

Issue or steel and production begun

Material preparation - shot-blasting and priming

Manufacture of plates and sections – marking, cutting, machining and shaping

Subassemblies and assemblies produced

Units fabricated and delivered to the berth

Units erected, faired and welded

Figure 3.5 Shipbuilding sequence of events

Steel plates and sections are usually stored in separate stockyards and fed into their individual shot-blasting and priming machines. The plates are cleaned by abrasive shot or girt and then coated with a suitable prefabrication priming paint to a limited thickness for ease of welding. The major areas of steel are therefore protected from corrosion during the various manufacturing processes which follow.
The plates and sections follow their individual paths to the marking or direct cutting machine which produces the suitably dimensioned item. Flame cutting or mechanical guillotines may be used. Edge preparation for welding may also be done at this stage. Various shaping operations now take place using plate-bending rolls, presses, cold frame benders, etc., as necessary. The material transfer before, during and after the various processes in shipbuilding utilises many handling appliances, such as overhead travelling cranes, vacuum lift cranes or magnetic cranes, roller conveyors, fork-lift equipment, etc.
The various steel parts in plate and section form are now joined to ether by welding to produce subassemblies, assemblies and units. A subassembly is several of steel making up a two-dimensional part which, together with other subassemblies, will join to form a unit. Subassemblies may weigh up to 5 tonnes or more and examples would be transverses, minor bulkhead and web frame (Figure 3.6). Assemblies consist of larger, usually three-dimensional, structures of plating and sections weighing up to 20 tonnes. Flat panels and bulkheads are examples and consist of various pieces of shell plating with stiffeners and perhaps deep webs crossing the stiffeners (Figure 3.7). The flat or perhaps curved panel may form part of the shell, deck or side plating of, for instance, a tanker. Units are complex built-up sections of a ship, perhaps the complete fore end forward of the collision bulkhead, and can weigh more than 100 tonnes (Figure 3.8), their size being limited by the transportation capacity of the yard's equipment.
The various subassemblies, assemblies or units are moved on to the building berth or storage area until required for erection at the ship. At this stage, or perhaps earlier, items of pipework and machinery may be fitted into the unit in what is known as pre-outfitting. Once erected at the berth the units are cut to size, where necessary, by the removal of excess or 'green' material. The units are faired and tack welded one to another and finally welded into place to form the hull of the ship.

Figure 3.6 Subassembly – web frame

Figure 3.7 Assembly

Figure 3.8 Unit

Materials handling

The layout of a shipyard should aim to reduce materials handling to a minimum by appropriate location of workstations or areas. The building of large units and the capacity to transport them will reduce the number of items handled but will require greater care and more sophisticated equipment. The building of a ship is as much governed by the shipyard layout as the materials handling equipment and its capacity.
An actual shipyard layout is shown in Figure 3.9. The progression of materials through the various production stages can clearly be seen. The various working processes which the plates and sections undergo will now be examined in more detail.

Figure 3.9 Shipyard layout

Materials preparation

Plates and sections received from the steel mill are shot-blasted to remove scale, primed with a temporary protective paint and finally straightened by rolling to remove any curvature.

Shot-blasting and priming

A typical machine will first water-wash then heat-dry the plates before descaling.
The plates are then simultaneously shot-blasted both sides with metallic abrasive.
The plate is fed in horizontally at speeds of up to 5 m/min, and around 300 t/h of shot are projected on to it. Blowers and suction devices remove the shot which is cleaned and recycled. The clean plates are immediately covered with a coat of priming paint and dried in an automatic spraying machine (Figure 3.10). A thickness of about 1 mm of compatible priming paint is applied to avoid problems with fillet welds on to the plating.

Straightening

Plate straightening or levelling is achieved by using a plate rolls machine (Figure 3.11). This consists basically of five large rollers, the bottom two being driven and the top ones idling. The top rollers can be adjusted for height independently at each end and the bottom rollers have adjustable centres. A number of smaller supporting rollers are positioned around the five main rollers. The plate is fed through with the upper and lower rollers spaced at its thickness and is subsequently straightened. This machine is also capable of bending and flanging plate.

Figure 3.10 Automatic paint-spraying machine

Figure 3.11 Plate straightening

Cutting and shaping

Various machines and equipment are used for cutting and shaping the steel parts which form the subassemblies, assemblies and units.

Contour or profile-cutting machine

This machine is made up of a robust portal frame for longitudinal travel which is traversed by several burner carriages, some of which are motorised (Figure 3.12). A motorised carriage can pull one or more slave carriages for congruent or mirror-image operation. The burner carriages may be equipped with single burners or up to three heads which can be angled and rotated for edge preparation in addition to cutting, as shown in Figure 3.12. Fully automatic operation is possible with punched paper tape input under numerical control. Semi-automatic operation can be achieved by a photoelectric tracing table using 1:1, 1:2.5, 1:5 or 1:10 scale drawings. Complex shapes such as floor plates in double bottoms can be cut with these machines, and also plate edge preparation may be carried out while cutting shell plates to the required shape.

Figure 3.11 Profile-cutting machine

Flame planer

A typical flame planer can have up to three gantries which run on supporting carriages. The gantries are traversed by one or two burner heads – Figure 3.13(a). With triple-nozzle heads, cutting to size and edge preparation of one or more edges of a plate can take place simultaneously. The operation of the machine is largely automatic, although initial setting up is by manual adjustment. With a three-gantry machine, the longitudinal plate edges can be cut to size and also the transverse edges - Figure 3.13(b). The transversely cutting gantries will operate once the longitudinal gantry is clear. The flame planer can split or cut plates to a desired length or width by straight-line cuts. The use of a compound or triple-nozzle head enables simultaneous cutting and edge preparation of plates. All straight-line edge preparations, such as. V, X, Y or K, are possible with this machine.

Figure 3.13 Flame planing machine: (a) flame planer; (b) three-gantry operation of flame planer

Mechanical planer

Steel plate can also be planed or cut to size using roller shears, as in the mechanical planer. The plates are held by hydraulic clamps. Setting-up time is somewhat longer than for flame planning, although the actual mechanical cutting operation is much quicker. Modern machines use milling heads for edge preparation to produce an accurate high standard of finish far superior to gas-cutting techniques - Figure 3.14(a). These machines can also achieve high speed shearing on the lighter gauges of plating. The most complex edge preparations can be obtained by the use of the rotatable head and assorted cutter shapes - Figure 3.14(b).

Gap or ring press

The gap or ring press is a hydraulically-powered press which cold works steel plate. The operations of bending, straightening, dishing and swedging of steel plates can all be achieved by the use of the different die blocks on the bed and the ram (Figure 3.15). The gap press provides better access all round and is more versatile than the plate rolls.

Figure 3.14 Mechanical edge planer: (a) assembly; (b) mechanically cut edge preparation - (i) single bevel without nose, suitable for batches of plates; (ii) single bevel with sheared nose 15 mm (5/8 in) maximum or milled nose; (iii) double bevel and nose; (iv) J preparation and nose using 'circular' cutter; (v) double-J preparation; (vi) facing on flanges of structural sections

Figure 3.15 Gap press operations: (a) edge curving; (b) plate flattening; (c) plate flanging or bending; ( d) plate straightening; (e) plate swaging


Plate rolls

This machine has already been described with reference to plate straightening. It is also used for rolling shell plates to the curvature required. By adjusting the height of the top roller and the centre distance of the bottom rollers, large or small radius bends can be made. Bulkhead Ganging is also possible when the machine is fitted with a flanging bar and bottom block. These various arrangement are shown in Figure 3.16. Control of the machine is by manual settings and operations carried out from a console located nearby. A shaped metal or wooden lathe is used to check the finished shape.

Figure 3.16 Roll press operations: (a) sheer strake rolling; (b) half-round rolling for masts, derrick posts, etc; (c) 90-degree flanging; (d) bulkhead flanging

Punching and notching press

Air holes and drain holes required in many plates and sections can be cut on a profile burner or by a punching press. A fully automated press can be used to punch round and elliptical holes, as well as rectangular and semicircular notches, at preset pitches along a plate or section. The machine is hydraulically powered and fed. Setting up is against datum rollers on the machine. Manual operation is possible, in addition to the automatic mode.

Guillotines

Hydraulically-powered shearing machines or guillotines are used for small jobbing work. The plates are fed, positioned and often held by hand. Small items, such as brackets and machinery space floor plates, may be produced in this manner.


Frame bender

Ships' frames are shaped by cold bending on a hydraulically-powered machine. Three initially in-line clamps hold part of the frame in position. The main rams then move the outer two clamps forward or backwards to bend the frame to the desired shape (Figure 3.17). The clamps are then released and the frame is advanced through the machine by a motorised drive. The next portion is then similarly bent. Offset bulb and angle bar plates can be bent two at a time, placed back to back. in this way, port and starboard frames are produced simultaneously.
The machine can be controlled by hand and the frame bent to match a template made of wood or steel strip. Modern machines are now equipped for the numerical control of frame bending which enables fully automatic operation without the use of templates.


Figure 3.17 Frame bender operation: (a) bow flare bend; (b) initial position; (c) bilge turn bend


Materials handling equipment

Between the various machines and during build-up of the plates and sections into units, numerous items of materials-handling equipment are used.
Cranes. of various types are used in shipyards. The overhead electric travelling crane (OETC) will be found in burning halls and fabrication shops. This crane traverses a gantry which is itself motorised to travel along rails mounted high on the walls of the hall or shop. Using this type of crane the sorting, loading and unloading operations can be combined and maximum use is made of the ground area. Lifting is usually accomplished by magnet beams, vacuum devices or grabs.
Goliath cranes are to be seen spanning the building docks of most new ship yards. Although of high first cost, this type of crane is flexible in use and covers the ground area very efficiently. Some degree of care is necessary in the region of the rails which run along the ground. Mobile cranes are used for internal materials movement, usually of a minor nature.
Special motorised heavy-lift trailers or transporters are used to transfer units and large items of steelwork around the shipyard and to the berth or building dock. Fork-lift trucks, trailer-pulling trucks, roller conveyor lines and various other devices are also used for materials movement of one kind or another.


Panel lines

Most modern shipyards use panel lines for the production of flat stiffened panels. A number of specialist work stations are arranged for the production of these panels.
The plates are first fed into the line, aligned, clamped and manually tack welded together. The plate seams are then welded on one side and the plate turned over. The second side welding of the plate seams then takes place. Some panel lines use a one-sided welding technique which removes the plate-turning operation. The panel is now flame planed to size and marked out for the webs and stiffeners which are to be fitted. The stiffeners are now injected from the side, positioned, clamped and welded on to the panel one after another. The stiffened panel is then transferred to the fabrication area if further build up is required, or despatched directly to the ship for erection. The process is shown in Figure 3.18.

Figure 3.18 Panel line

Shipyard welding equipment

The equipment required for the manual welding of a ship's hull should enable the operator to use high amperages with large-gauge electrodes and yet still have adequate control of current for the various welding positions adopted and the plate thicknesses being welded. It should also be robust in construction and safe in operation.
Multi-operator systems, in which a three-phase transformer supplies up to six operators, are favoured in shipyard. Each operator has his own regulator and a supply of up to 150 A. The regulator is fed from an earthed distribution box on the transformer and provides a range of current selections. The regulator should be positioned fairly close to the welder both to reduce power losses and the time taken when changing current settings. Remote-controlled transformers, whose current can be altered by the welder through his electrode holder cable, are now fitted in some shipyards. The various welding processes are described in Chapter 4.


 
造船

造船是一个复杂的过程,涉及造船组织的许多部门、造船厂设施的安排和使用以及各种相关人员的许多技能。将依次检查直接参与建造、造船厂布局、材料移动和所用设备的部门。

绘图室

造船厂设计和制图办公室的主要功能是制作结构图,以满足船东的要求、船级社的规则和造船厂通常的建造惯例。一个次要但重要的功能是向生产图纸和控制部门、采购部门等提供信息,以便订购和交付钢结构舾装和机器项目,满足船舶建造图纸。
紧随基本设计图纸的将是线图的制作。该图(图3.1)是船舶在俯视平面图、侧视立面图和横视剖面图中的模制尺寸的比例图。船舶在首垂线与尾垂线之间的长度分为10个等间距的区间或站,编号为1至10。船在不同位置的横剖面被绘制成一个叫做船体平面图(横视图)的图。因为船是对称的,所以给出了半剖面。代表船的后半部分的站0至5显示在船体平面图的左侧,前半部显示在右侧。侧面轮廓图或舷弧平面图显示了船的总体轮廓、甲板的舷弧、甲板位置和所有水线。为了清楚起见,图3.1中省略了甲板位置,只显示了三条水线。各站也绘制在该视图上。在截面变化相当大的地方,可在艏端和艉端使用额外的站。半宽平面图显示了在离龙骨不同的水线高度处的水平面形成的水线和甲板的形状。该平面图通常叠加在剖面图或舷弧平面图上,如图3.1所示。

图3.1 线图
为设计绘制初始型线图,然后检查其“光顺度”。为了达到光顺,所有的曲线必须平滑均匀。在所有三个不同视图中为特定点显示的尺寸之间也必须有精确的对应关系。光顺操作,曾经是一个熟练的放样员的专属领域,现在主要由计算机程序完成。
一旦光顺,最终的线型图纸就准备好了,型值表也编制好了,用于生产船板和肋骨。
根据结构区域如船体外板、甲板、双层底肋骨等绘制平面图的传统做法。在许多情况下是不方便的,因为现在船是由大型预制单元建造的。一个单元可能由外板、一些肋骨和部分甲板组成。图3.2给出了船体外板的展开图,显示了各个单元的位置。因此,平面图是相对于单元而绘制的,并且包含建造特定单元所需的所有信息。许多传统的图纸仍然是为了船级社的目的,未来的维护和参考,但没有丰富的制造信息,这是唯一需要的单位图纸。
规划和生产控制部门需要图纸信息来编制图表,以监控进度、编制图纸、编制材料交付、零件生产和装配以及最终单元生产和安装的图纸。


图3.2 按照各单元展开的外板展开图
图3.3 板套料

图纸批准

基本设计方案和基本结构细节都必须得到船级社的批准,当然,还要得到船东的批准。不同寻常的设计和建造方法的创新将会受到特别的关注,任何偏离标准的做法也是如此。进步不会受到船级社的阻碍,他们主要关心的是生产一个可靠和安全的结构。
船东通常从设计之初就已经清楚地表明了他的要求,他对图纸的批准通常是直截了当的。大多数大型船东公司都有技术人员,他们利用自己的实践经验来开发尽可能完美和实用的设计。

图纸问题

图纸批准后订购设备、机器、型钢和钢板等,图纸将会发布到造船厂的各个生产部门。船级社、船东及其在造船厂的代表也收到图纸的副本。
在制造过程中,由于遇到的问题、以前设计的反馈、船东要求的修改等,则可予修订图纸。生产部门必须有图纸召回、替换或修改的系统。这确保了一个系列中的任何后续船舶不会带有相同的故障,并且已经采取了纠正措施。

钢材订购

订购钢材以确保钢材可用性符合计划要求是至关重要的。因此,它必须在尽量早的机会开始,偶尔在图纸批准之前,可能发生交付问题。钢材订购是生产流程中的一项关键功能,需要制图办公室、规划部门、生产部门和钢材供应商的参与。库存的监测和控制也很重要,因为船舶的钢材是船舶最终成本的重要组成部分。造船厂持有的库存是相当大的资本投资。

放样工作

放样工作在模具放样中进行。模具放样是一个带有木肋板的大面积遮盖区域,船的细节以全尺寸或更小更方便的比例绘制。许多传统的放样工作现在已经由电脑完成,但一些专业领域仍然需要制作木制模板,建造实体模型等,
在传统的模具放样操作中,线图和结构图信息被转换成绘制在放样胎架上的全尺寸线条。根据这些线条,检查船舶型线的光顺性或光滑度,并生产出一个船体线图刻划台。刻划台是一种木板,在每一肋位画出其船体横剖面。一旦船的型线被检查和光顺,一个半块模型通常是由约1/50的比例制造。这个模型有船的精确线条,用来在船体外板上标出实际的板,给出所有的对接和接缝的位置。
放样员现在可以使用全尺寸的刻划台标记结合模型中的板位置来制作用于标记、切割和弯曲实际板的模板。最后为各种肋骨和板制作一个型值表,为生产中涉及的各种贸易提供制造信息。

十分之一比例放样

通过1/10的比例放样,模具放样变得更像一个有长桌子的绘图室。光顺是使用十分之一比例的图纸实现的。刻划台是按照十分之一的比例制作的,可能是在白漆胶合板上。然后,十分之一的比例图是由船上的单个钢板制成的。然后,这些图纸可以拍照,并缩小到全尺寸的百分之一,用于光学投影和板的标记。或者,十分之一比例的图纸可以由切割机机头直接描绘。


数字控制

数控系统是通过插入数字数据来操作和控制机器的系统。数字数据是完整描述要生产的零件的一系列数字。此外,某些代码的使用能使指令输入机器,使其自动运转。机器上的一个读数装置将这些数字转换成电脉冲,这些电脉冲成为机器各部分的控制信号,从而生产出成品零件。
机器的输入数据最初由图纸和型值信息产生。要生产的各种零件被编程,然后用数字术语编码或描述。然后产生包含数字数据的穿孔卡片、穿孔纸带或磁带。然后,卡片或磁带的信息被输入计算机的套料程序。然后,各种零件被“嵌套”或经济地安装到标准板尺寸中(图3.3)。生产出来的最终穿孔带或磁带,用于数控机床的操作。这个过程如图3.4中的简单流程图所示。

图3.3 输入数据控制机器的生产

造船厂布局

造船厂布局的安排是为了向船舶的最终单元建造、安装和舾装提供合理有序的材料和设备流程。不同的生产阶段被安排在工作区或“车间”,并尽可能在现代工厂中隐蔽进行。事件的顺序如图3.5所示。

初步船舶设计

详细图纸图纸 --> 订购的钢材 --> 交付的钢材

图纸的批准并下发

放样和型值表的制作

钢的下料和生产开始了

材料准备-喷丸和涂底漆

板材和型材的制造——标记、切割、加工和成型

生产的子组件、组合件

制造并交付至泊位的单元

单元安装、光顺和焊接

图3.5造船事件顺序

钢板和型钢通常储存在单独的堆料场,并送入各自的抛丸机和涂底漆机。钢板通过喷弹丸或砂粒进行清洁,然后涂上适当的预制底漆,达到一定的厚度,以便于焊接。因此,在随后的各种制造过程中,钢的主要部分受到保护而不被腐蚀。
板材和型材沿着各自的路径到达打标机或直接切割机,从而生产出合适尺寸的产品。可以使用火焰切割或机械切割。焊接的边缘加工也可以在这个阶段完成。现在,如有必要,各种成形操作都是使用卷板机、压力机、冷肋骨弯曲机等进行的。在造船的各个过程之前、之中和之后的材料转移利用了许多搬运设备,例如桥式起重机、真空提升起重机或磁力起重机、辊式输送机、叉车设备等。
各种钢板和型钢现在通过焊接连接在一起,形成子组件、组合件和单元。子组件是由几个钢组成的二维零件,它们与其他子组件一起连接形成一个单元。子组件可能重达5吨或更多,例如横梁、小舱壁和强肋骨(图3.6)。组合件是由板材和型材组成的更大的结构,通常是三维的,可能重达20吨。平板和舱壁就是例子,由各种带加强筋的外板组成,可能还有穿过加强筋的深腹板(图3.7)。平坦的或者可能弯曲的面板可以形成例如油轮的外板、甲板或侧板的一部分。单元是船上复杂的组合部分,可能是防撞舱壁前方的完整艏端,重量超过100吨(图3.8),其尺寸受到船厂设备运输能力的限制。

图3.6 子组件-强肋骨

各种子组件、组件或单元被移动到建筑泊位或储存区,直到需要在船上安装。在这一阶段,或者可能更早,管道和机器项目可以在所谓的预装配中安装到单元中。一旦安装在泊位上,这些单元就被切割成合适的尺寸,如有必要,通过移除多余的或“绿色”的材料。这些单元被光顺并且彼此点焊在一起,最后被焊接到位以形成船体。


图3.7组件

图3.8 单元

物料搬运
造船厂的布局应旨在通过工作站或区域的适当位置将材料处理减少到最低限度。大型设备的建造和运输能力将减少处理的物品数量,但需要更加小心和更加精密的设备。造船厂的布局和材料处理设备及其容量同样决定着船只的建造。
实际的造船厂布局如图3.9所示。可以清楚地看到材料在不同生产阶段的进展。现在将更详细地考察板和型材所经历的各种加工过程。

图3.9 船厂布置

材料准备

从钢厂收到的钢板和型材经过喷丸处理以去除氧化皮,涂上临时保护漆,最后通过轧制矫直以去除任何弯曲。

喷丸和涂底漆

典型的机器会先水洗,然后在除垢前加热干燥钢板。
然后用金属磨料同时对钢板的两面进行喷丸处理。
该板以高达5米/分钟的速度水平进给,大约300吨/小时的弹丸投射到其上。鼓风机和抽吸装置去除被清洁和回收的弹丸。干净的板立即涂上一层底漆,并在自动喷涂机中干燥(图3.10)。涂覆厚度约为1 mm的相容底漆,以避免板角焊缝出现问题。

图3.10 自动喷涂机
图3.11 卷板机

矫直

通过使用卷板机(图3.11)实现板材矫直或整平。这基本上由五个大滚筒组成,底部的两个被驱动,顶部的从动。顶部滚轮可在各端独立调节高度,底部滚轮具有可调节的中心。许多较小的支撑辊位于五个主辊周围。钢板被送进,上下轧辊以钢板厚度间隔开,随后被矫直。这台机器也能对板材弯曲和折边。


切割和塑形

各种机器和设备用于切割和成型构成子组件、组件和单元的钢零件。

轮廓切割机

该机器由一个用于纵向移动的坚固的门架组成,该门架由几个燃烧器移动托架穿过,其中一些是电动的(图3.12)。一个电动托架可以拉动一个或多个从属托架进行全等或镜像操作。如图3.12所示,燃烧器移动托架可配备单个燃烧器或多达三个头,除切割外,这些头还可倾斜和旋转用于边缘加工。在数字控制下,穿孔纸带输入可实现全自动操作。半自动操作可以通过使用1:1、1:2.5、1:5或1:10比例图纸的光电跟踪表来实现。使用这些机器可以切割复杂的形状,如双层底的底板,还可以在将外板切割成所需形状的同时进行板边制备。

图3.12 轮廓切割机

火焰刨床

一台典型的火焰刨可以有三个在支撑架上运行的龙门架。一个或两个燃烧器头穿过台架–图3.13(a)。使用三喷嘴头,板材的一个或多个边缘的切割和边缘加工可以同时进行。机器的操作基本上是自动的,尽管初始设置是通过手动调节。使用三龙门机床,可以将纵向板材边缘切割成合适的尺寸,也可以将横向边缘切割成合适的尺寸,如图3.13(b)所示。一旦纵向机架清空,横向切割机架将开始运行。火焰刨可以通过直线切割将板材分割或切割成所需的长度或宽度。使用复合或三喷嘴头能够同时切割和边缘加工板材。所有直线边缘加工,如,V,X,Y或K,在这台机器上都是可能的。


图3.13火焰刨床a)火焰刨床;(b)火焰刨的三龙门操作

机械刨床

钢板也可以像在机械刨床中一样,用滚剪刨平或切割成合适的尺寸。这些板由液压夹具固定。尽管实际的机械切割操作要快得多,但设置时间比火焰刨床稍长。现代机器使用铣头进行边缘加工,以产生精确的高标准光洁度,远远优于气割技术-图3.14(a)。这些机器也可以在较薄的钢板厚度上实现高速剪切。最复杂的边缘加工可以通过使用旋转头和各种刀具形状获得-图3.14(b)。

间隙或环形压力机

间隙或环压机是一种冷加工钢板的液压压力机。钢板的弯曲、矫直、凹陷和弯曲操作都可以通过使用床身和滑枕上的不同模块来实现(图3.15)。间隙式压榨机提供了更好的全面接触,比印版辊更通用。



图3.14机械刨边机a)组件;(b)机器切割边缘加工——(i)无前端的单斜面,适用于批量板材;(ii)最大15毫米(5/8英寸)剪切前端的单斜面或磨制前端;(iii)双斜面和前端;(iv) 使用“圆形”刀具的J 加工和前端;(v)双J加工;(vi) 结构型材折边上的面板


图3.15间隙压制操作a)边缘弯曲;(b)平板展平;(c)板材翻边或弯曲;(d)板材矫直;(e)板型锻

直板机

该机器已经参照板材矫直进行了描述。它也用于将外板轧制到所需的曲率。通过调整顶部辊的高度和底部辊的中心距离,可以进行大或小半径弯曲。当机器配有翻边杆和底块时,也可以进行舱壁折边。这些不同布置如图3.16所示。通过位于附近的控制台进行手动设置和操作来控制机器。成型的金属或木制车床用于检查完成的形状。

图3.16辊压机操作。(a)纯粹的列板辊压;(b)桅杆、吊杆等的半圆辊压;(c) 90度折边;舱壁折边

冲压和开槽压力机

许多板材和型材上需要的气孔和排水孔可以在异形燃烧器上或通过冲床切割。全自动压力机可用于沿板材或型材以预设间距冲压圆形和椭圆形孔,以及矩形和半圆形凹口。这台机器是液压驱动的。对机器上的基准辊进行设置。除自动模式外,手动操作也是可能的。

断头台

液压动力剪切机或断头台用于小批量工作。板被进给、定位并且通常用手握住。小件物品,如肘板和机舱肋板,可以用这种方式生产。

肋骨弯曲机

船的肋骨是在液压机器上通过冷弯成型的。三个最初成直线的夹具将肋骨的一部分固定到位。然后,主闸板向前或向后移动外部两个夹具,将肋骨弯曲成所需的形状(图3.17)。然后松开夹具,通过电动驱动装置将肋骨推进机器。然后,下一部分类似地弯曲。球扁钢和角钢可以一次弯曲两个,背靠背放置。这样,可以同时生产左舷和右舷肋骨。
机器可以用手控制,肋骨可以弯曲以匹配由木头或钢条制成的模板。现代机器现在配备了肋骨弯曲的数字控制,这使得全自动操作无需使用模板。


图3.17肋骨弯曲机操作a)艏外飘弯曲;(b)初始位置;(c)舭部转弯


材料处理设备

在各种机器之间以及在将板材和型材组装成单元的过程中,使用了大量的材料处理设备。
造船厂使用各种类型的起重机。高架电动行车(OETC)可在燃烧大厅和制造车间找到。这台起重机横跨一个龙门架,龙门架本身是机动的,沿着安装在大厅或车间墙壁高处的轨道移动。使用这种类型的起重机,可以将分类、装载和卸载操作结合起来,并最大限度地利用地面面积。提升通常通过磁梁、真空装置或抓斗来完成。
可以看到巨型起重机横跨大多数新造船厂的船坞。尽管初期成本较高,但这种类型的起重机使用灵活,覆盖地面的效率很高。在沿地面延伸的铁轨区域,一定程度的小心是必要的。移动式起重机用于内部材料移动,通常是小规模的。
特殊的机动重型拖车或运输工具用于在造船厂周围将单元和大型钢结构项目转移到泊位或建筑码头。叉车、拖车、滚筒输送线和各种其他设备也用于各种材料的移动。


面板线

大多数现代造船厂使用面板生产线来生产用扁钢加强的板。为生产这些面板安排了许多专业工作站。
板材首先被送入生产线,对齐、夹紧并手工点焊在一起。然后将板缝焊接在一侧,并将板翻转过来。然后进行板缝的另一侧焊接。一些面板生产线采用单面焊接技术,省去了翻板操作。现在,对面板进行火焰刨削,以确定尺寸,并标出要安装的腹板和加强筋。现在从侧面注射加强筋,一个接一个地定位、夹紧并焊接到面板上。如果需要进一步建造,加筋板然后被转移到制造区域,或者直接运送到船上进行安装。该过程如图3.18所示。

图3.18面板线

造船厂焊接设备

手工焊接船体所需的设备使用高安培数电流,以使操作者能够使用大规格焊条,同时仍能对所采用的各种焊接位置和所焊接的钢板厚度进行足够的电流控制。它还应该结构坚固,操作安全。
造船厂偏爱多操作员系统,其中一个三相变压器为多达六个操作员供电。每个操作员都有自己的稳压器和高达150 A的电源。稳压器由变压器上的接地配电箱供电,并提供一系列电流选择。稳压器应放置在离焊机相当近的地方,以减少功率损耗和改变电流设置所花费的时间。遥控变压器的电流可以由焊工通过焊钳电缆改变,现在一些造船厂安装了这种变压器。第4章描述了各种焊接工艺。


回复 支持 反对

使用道具 举报

 楼主| 发表于 2023-2-18 23:05 | 显示全部楼层 来自: 中国上海
4
Welding and Cutting Processes

In shipbuilding, welding is now the accepted method of joining metal. Welding is the fusing of two metals by heating to produce a joint which is as strong or stronger than the parent metal. All metals may be welded, but the degree of simplicity and the methods used vary considerably. All shipyard welding processes are of the fusion type, where the edges of the joint are melted and fuse with the molten weld metal. The heat source for fusion welding may be provided by gas torch, electric arc or electric resistance.

Gas welding

A gas flame produced by the burning of oxygen and acetylene is used in this process. A hand-held torch is used to direct the flame around the parent metal and filler rods provide the metal for the joint (Figure 4.1). Gas welding is little used, having been superseded by the faster process of electric arc welding. Outfit trades, such as plumbers, may employ gas welding or use the gas flame for brazing or silver soldering.


Electric arc welding

An electric arc is produced between two metals in an electric circuit when they are separated by a short distance. The basic circuit is shown in Figure 4.2. The metal to be welded forms one electrode in the circuit and the welding rod or wire forms the other. The electric arc produced creates a region of high temperature which melts and enables fusion of the metals to take place. Electric power is supplied via a.c. transformers which may supply one or more welding operations.

Figure 4.1 Gas welding with an oxy-acetylene torch

Figure 4.2 Electric arc welding circuit

In the actual welding operation the welding rod and plate are fust touched together and quickly drawn apart some 4-5 mm to produce the arc across the gap. The temperature produced is in the region of 4000 °C and current flow between the metals may be from 10 to 600 A. The current flow must be preset or adjusted, depending upon the metal type and thickness and the supply voltage. The voltage across the arc affects the amount of penetration and the profile the metal deposited. The current to a large extent determines the amount of weld metal deposited. A high quality weld is produced with several layers of weld metal, but it is less costly to use a single heavy deposited metal.
If excessive current is used weld spatter, i.e. tiny blobs of metal deposited around the weld, may occur.
For a satisfactory weld, atmospheric gases must be excluded and the control of arc must be easily achieved. This is done by shielding the arc during the welding process. A gas shield is produced by one of two basic methods, either by the burning of a flux or the provision of a gas shield directly.


Processes using flux

Manual welding

In the manual welding process a consumable electrode in welding rod is held in a holder and fed on to the parent metal by the operator. The welding rod is a flux-coated mild steel electrode. The metal of the electrode is normally rimming steel. This is a ductile material which does not contain silicon or aluminium, both of which tend to affect the electric arc. The rod coatings are made up of cellulose, mineral silicates, oxides, fluorides, basic carbonates and powdered metal alloys. The particular constituents used are held together with a binding material such as sodium silicate. The coating covers the length of the core wire, except where it fits into the holder.
Electrodes are classified according to their flux coatings as given in the International Standard ISO 2560:1973(E). The two basic types are the rutile-coated electrode and the hydrogen-controlled electrode. Rutile is an almost pure mineral form of titanium oxide and is the principal ingredient of rutile coated electrodes. It increases slag viscosity, decreases spatter and improves slag detachability. Rutile electrodes are general-purpose, giving a good finish and a sound weld. Hydrogen-controlled or basic electrodes deposit weld metal which is low in hydrogen content. They are used for the welding of highly stressed joints and the higher tensile steels. The coatings contain major proportions of carbonates and fluorides which are baked on to reduce the water content of the coating to a very low level.


Figure 4.3 Welding positions: (a) horizontal or downhand; (b) horizontal/ vertical; (c) vertical; (d) overhead; (e) inclined

Manual welding may be accomplished in any direction, the three basic modes being downhand, vertical and overhead, and some combinations of these modes are shown in Figure 4.3. The correct type of electrode must be used, together with considerable skill, in particular for the overhead and vertical welding positions. As far as possible, welding is arranged in the downhand mode.
The gravity welder is a device consisting of a tripod, one leg of which acts as a rail for a sliding electrode holder (Figure 4.4). Once positioned and the arc struck, the weight of the electrode and bolder cause it to slide down the rail and deposit weld metal along a joint. The angle of the sliding rail will determine the amount of metal deposited. At the bottom of the rail a trip mechanism moves the electrode to break the arc. One man is able to operate several of these devices simultaneously.

Figure 4.4 Gravity welder


Automatic welding

In the automatic machine welding process, travel along the metal takes place at a fixed speed with a flux-covered electrode fed on to the joint. The correct arc length and metal deposition is achieved by the machine, the specially spiralled flux coating providing the shield during welding. Only downhand welding of horizontal joints is possible with this machine.
The arc may be additionally sealed with carbon dioxide gas to permit higher currents for high speed welding. A twin-fillet version is also available for stiffener welding to flat plates or panels (Figure 4.5).
Another automatic machine welding process, submerged arc welding, uses a bare wire electrode and separately fed granulated flux. The flux melts to produce a gas shield for the arc and a molten covering. Large metal deposits at high speeds, without air entrainment, are therefore possible in this very efficient process. The process is shown diagrammatically in Figure 4.6(a). The unused flux may be recovered for re-use. This is a process for horizontal, i.e. downhand, operation only and may be operated normally welding both sides or as a one-sided welding process. in the normal process the downhand weld is made and the plate turned over or an overhead weld is made from below. Some veeing out of the joint may be necessary for the final run. In the one-sided process various forms of backing plate can be used, of which one example is shown in Figure 4.6(b). Any defects in the weld will then have to be repaired by veeing out and welding from the other side. This process is limited to indoor undercover use and is unsuitable for use on the berth.

Electroslag welding

The vertical welding of plate thicknesses in excess of 13 mm is efficiently achieved by this process. Initially an arc is struck but the process continues by electrical resistance heating through the slag. The weld pool is contained by cooled shoes placed either side of the plate which may be moved up the plate mechanically or manually in separate sections. Alternatively, shoes the height of the weld may be fixed in place either side. The bare wire electrode is usually fed from the top through a consumable guide and acts as the electrode of the circuit.
Run-on and run-off plates are required at the beginning and end of the weld and no stoppage must occur during the process. The arrangement is shown diagrammatically in Figure 4. 7.



Figure 4.5 Automatic flux-coated electrode welding using a twin-headed machine

Figure 4.6 Submerged arc welding: (a) submerged arc welding; (b) backing plate arrangement for one-sided welding

Figure 4.7 Electroslag welding


Electrogas welding

This process is particularly suited to shipbuilding since vertical plates of thicknesses in the range 13-40 mm are efficiently joined. Cooled shoes are again used but a flux-coated electrode is now employed. Fusion is achieved by an arc between the electrode and the metal, and a carbon dioxide gas shield is supplied through the upper region of the shoes. The arrangement is similar to Figure 4.7, for electroslag welding, with the carbon dioxide supplied through the top of the shoes.


Stud welding

A machine or gun as part of the electric circuit is used in stud welding. In one method the stud is fed into the clutch and a ceramic ferrule is placed over the end. The stud is placed against the metal surface and the operation of the gun trigger withdraws the stud to create an arc (Figure 4.8). After a period of arcing, the stud is driven into the molten metal pool and welding takes place. The        ferrule concentrates the arc, reduces the access of air and confines the molten metal area. Flux is contained in the end of the stud.       
Another method uses a fusible collar over the end of the stud which conducts electricity to create the arc and then collapses, forcing the stud into the molten metal pool and forming the weld. Welded studs are used for securing insulation to bulkheads and for other sheathings. Other types of stud, in the form of bolts, hooks and rings, are also available.


Figure 4.8 Stud welding: (a) stud and ferrule placed on plate; (b) arc drawn; (c) weld completed


Processes using gas

There are welding processes employing a bare electrode or welding wire with a gas shield. Automatic or semi-automatic operation is usual. With automatic operation, once set the process is controlled by the machine. In semi-automatic operation certain machine settings are made but the torch is hand held and the process is to some extent controlled by the operator.


Tungsten inert gas (TIG)

This is a process for thin sheet metal such as steel or aluminium. A water-cooled non-consumable tungsten electrode and the plate material have an arc created between them by a high frequency discharge across the gap. The inert gas shield is usually argon gas. The process is shown in Figure 4.9.

Figure 4.9 Tungsten inert gas process


Metal inert gas (MIG)

A consumable metal wire electrode is used in this process and is fed through the holder or torch from a feed unit (Figure 4.10). An inert gas is fed through the torch to shield the arc and the torch and plate are part of an electric circuit. The supply source is usually d.c. and the process may be fully or semi-automatic in operation.
In steel welding using this process, carbon dioxide may be the shielding gas and plating of any thickness may be welded. Controls within the wire feed unit enable a range of constant wire feeds related to the current to be selected. With carbon dioxide gas, the arc characteristic changes with the current from a short-circuiting (dip transfer) arc at low currents to a spray arc at high currents. Dip transfer allows all positions of welding, but the spray arc is downhand only. Dip transfer is ideally suited to thinner materials, since it produces less distortion effects. This process is being used increasingly in shipbuilding.


Figure 4.10 Metal inert gas process


Plasma metal inert gas

This is a further development of the metal inert gas process which incorporates a plasma arc around the MIG arc. The plasma is an ionised stream of gas which surrounds the MIG arc and concentrates its effect on to the metal. The plasma arc has its own set of controls for its electric circuit. It is initially ignited by the MIG arc and with both arcs individually controlled the process can be finely 'tuned' to the material requirements. Automatic and semi-automatic versions are available. The semi-automatic version uses a dual-flow nozzle arrangement, as drawn in Figure 4.11, with a single supply of gas, usually argon, as the shielding and the plasma gases. The torch used is no heavier than a conventional MIG torch and the process has the advantages of higher weld metal deposition rates and the use of a narrower vee preparation which may be as small as 30 degrees.


Thermit welding

This is a fusion process taking place as a result of the heat released in a chemical reaction between powdered aluminium and iron oxide ignited by barium peroxide. The parts to be welded are usually large sections, such as a stemframe, and they are positioned together in a sand or graphite mould. The molten steel and slag from the chemical reaction is first formed in a crucible and then run into the mould.

Figure 4.11 Plasma metal inert gas process

Figure 4.12 Butt weld preparation: (a) square butt joint; (b) single V butt joint; (c) double-V butt joint; (d) double-U butt joint
 
Figure 4.13 Fillet welds: (a) fillet weld, (b) lap weld; (c) fillet weld with full penetration preparation


Types of weld

A number of different welded joints are used, depending upon their situation, material thickness, required strength, etc. The depth of weld may require more than one pass or run of weld to build up to the workpiece thickness. Reversing the workpiece, gouging out and a final back-run will also be necessary unless a one-sided technique is employed.
The butt weld is the strongest joint when subjected to tension and is illustrated in Figure 4.12. The single-V type of preparation is used for the butt weld for plate thicknesses in excess of 6 mm up to a maximum of 20 mm. Below 6 mm, a square edge preparation may be employed and for very thick plates a double-V preparation is used. A U-weld preparation is also used which requires less weld metal and gives a better quality joint in return for a more expensive edge preparation.
Fillet welds are used for right-angled plate joints and lapped joints, as shown in Figure 4.13. Two particular terms are used in relation to fillet welds - the leg length L and the throat thickness T – as shown in Figure 4.13(a). The leg length is related to the thickness of the abutting plate and the throat thickness must be at least 70% of L. A full penetration type of fillet weld may be used where special strength is required. A full penetration joint is shown in Figure 4.13(c). The abutting plate is of V or J preparation to ensure full penetration when welding.
The fillet welds described may be arranged in a number of ways, depending on structural requirements. Fully continuous welds are used in important strength connections and for oiltight and watertight connections. Chain and intermittent welds are spaced sections of welding and are shown in Figure 4.14. Some savings in weight and distortion are possible for lightly stressed material which does not require watertight joints.
Tack welds are short runs of weld on any joint to be welded. They are used to initially align and hold the material prior to the finished joint. They are assembly welds and must be subject to a full welding procedure. They should not be less than 75 mm in length to ensure a sufficient heat input and should not be welded over.

Welding practice

Tile welding of the metal, because of the localised concentration of heat, gives rise to areas of plating which first expand and later contract on cooling. The effect of this, and the difference in deposited weld metal and parent metal properties, results in distortion of the workpiece. The appearance of distortion may be in one or more of the following forms - longitudinal shrinkage, transverse shrinkage, and angular distortion. Figure 4.15 illustrates these various effects.
The cause of distortion may be attributable to several possible factors acting individually or together. The concentrated heating of the welded area and its subsequent later contraction will affect the weld metal and the workpiece in different ways. As a consequence, stresses will be set up in the weld, the two joined workpieces and the overall structure.
The degree of restraint permitted to the welded joint will affect its distortion. Where welded joints are unrestrained their subsequent weld shrinkage will relieve any stresses set up. Restrained joints, by virtue of the rigidity of the structure or some applied form of damping, induce high stresses to the weld and cracking may occur if the correct welding sequences are not adopted.
The properties of the workpiece and the permissible stresses 'locked in' it due to manufacturing processes may be altered or affected by welding and lead to distortion.


Figure 4.14 Non-continuous fillet welds: (a) intermittent welding; (b) chain welding

Distortion prevention

Good design should ensure as few welded joints as possible in a structure, particularly when it is made up of thin section plate. Where they exist, welded joints should be accessible, preferably for downhand welding.
The edge preparation of joint can be arranged to reduce distortion, as shown in Figure 4.16. A single-V preparation joint with four runs of welding will distort as shown. A double-V preparation joint welded with four runs in the order shown will only exhibit slight shrinkage of the joined plates.

Figure 4.1.5 Distortion effects

Figure 4.16 Edge preparation to reduce distortion: (a) single-V preparation giving considerable distortion (1 first welding run, 2 second welding run, 3 third welding run, 4 final welding run); (b) double-V preparation giving only slight shrinkage


Restraint is the usual method of distortion prevention in shipbuilding. Where units are faired ready for welding they are tack welded to hold them in place during welding. The parts will then remain dimensionally correct and the rigidity of the structure will usually restrain any distortion. Strongbacks or clamping arrangements are also used on butt and fillet welds, as shown in Figure 4.17.
All welds ‘shrink’, so the use of the correct procedure in welding can do much to reduce distortion. The fewer runs involved in a welded joint, the less will be the distortion. Symmetrical welding either side of a joint with a double-V preparation will produce a distortion-free weld. Simultaneous welding by two operators is therefore a useful technique which should be practised whenever possible. Welding should always take place towards the free or unrestrained end of a joint. For long welding runs several techniques are used to minimize distortion. The back-step method is illustrated in Figure 4.18. Here the operator welds the joint in sections in the numerical order and direction shown. A variation of this is 'skip' welding, which is shown in Figure 4.19, and likewise progresses in the numerical order and direction shown. Distortion may then be controlled by balancing the welding as much as possible and allowing the weld shrinkage to occur freely. Welding sequences taking this into account should be well thought out before welding commences.

Figure 4.17 Damping arrangements

Figure 4.18 Back-step welding technique

Figure 4.19 Skip or wandering welding technique


Distortion correction

Despite the most stringent methods to eliminate it, distortion can still occur. Where the distortion in a joint is considered unacceptable the joint must be gouged, grooved or completely split, and then rewelded. Strongbacks may be placed across the joint to restrain distortion during rewelding.
Straightforward mechanical means may be used, such as hydraulic jacks or hammering on localised areas of distortion or buckling. Where such methods involve straining the welds, they should be examined for cracks after correction. Every effort should be made to avoid mechanically straightening structures for this reason.


Figure 4.20 Spot heating: (a) curved plate; (b) heated; (c) expansion; (d) levelled plate


The application of concentrated heat from a gas-burning torch may be used for correcting distortion in steels other than the higher tensile, quenched and tempered types. The process is shown in Figure 4.20. A small area is heated on the side where the contraction would bring about an improvement. The steel is heated to a 'red heat' and the torch slowly moved along a previously drawn line, at such a speed that the 'red heat' does not pass right through the material. The area heated wants to expand, but is resisted by the surrounding material. the recrystallisation absorbs the expansion and, on cooling, contraction occurs which brings about a favourable distortion, thus correcting the original distorted structure (Figure 4.21).


Weld faults

The weld

Faults may occur in welding as in any other process. These faults may arise from bad workmanship, incorrect processes, wrong materials used, etc. A good weld is illustrated in Figure 4.22(a). in such a weld a degree of fusion should have taken place at the sides of the weld. There should be no overlap or undercut at the toe of the weld. A slight reinforcement or build-up of material should be present at the top surface and there should be root penetration along the bottom surface.
A bad weld is shown in Figure 4.22(b). The absence of reinforcement and root penetration are the result of incorrect procedure or bad workmanship. Overlap is infused metal lying over the parent metal. Undercut is the wastage of parent metal, probably caused by too high a welding current. Porosity is caused by gases trapped in the weld. Slag inclusion is the result of inadequate cleaning between weld runs. Poor fusion or penetration between runs may be due to poor cleaning or incorrect voltage or current settings. The result of a bad weld is a weak or faulty joint. A bad weld can also be the starting point for a crack.

Figure 4.21 Distortion correction

Lamellar tearing

Lamellar tearing around welded joints has become a problem as plate thicknesses have increased and structures have become more rigid. Lamellar tearing is a brittle cracking in steel plate as a result of tensile stresses at right-angles to the plate. It is caused by the contraction of weld metal when cooling. Lamellar tearing is most likely to occur when thick plates, large weldments and high internal connection restraint are all present. The characteristic 'tear' occurs in the cross-plate of a T-configuration and may begin at the toe or root of a weld or at some point below the weld (Figure 4.23).
One method of reducing the problem of lamellar tearing is the use of 'clean' steels such as those produced by the vacuum degassed process. Other measures include the use of joint configurations which avoid right angle tensile stressing of the plate, or preheating the plate before welding.

Figure 4.22 Examples of welds: (a) a good weld; (b) a bad weld       

Figure 4.24 Examples of lamellar tearing

Weld testing

Several non-destructive techniques are used in the examination of welded joints. These include visual examination, dye penetrants, magnetic particles, radiography and ultrasonic method. Destructive testing of special test plates and their welded joints is required for certain classes of work but most shipbuilding weld testing is non-destructive.
The trained experienced inspector and surveyor can detect surface defects and flaws in welds by visual examination. He may also request more detailed examination of known problem areas or regions of high stress. His constant vigilance and attendance during the welding up of a ship ensures good work and satisfactory standard of welding.
Magnetic particle testing is a surface examination technique. A mixture of iron filings in thin white paint is spread over a welded joint. The joint is then magnetised by attaching a large permanent magnet to it. Discontinuities then show up as concentrations of iron filings, resulting from the distorted magnetic field.
Dye penetrants are spread over the surface of a joint and then wiped or washed off. The weld surface is then examined using an ultraviolet light. Any crack will contain the luminous dye and will be readily visible.
Radiographic inspection is a means of 'photographing' welded joints. A photographic plate is exposed to radiations from X-ray or gamma ray devices on the far side of the joint. Any inclusions or gas holes will then show up on the photographic plate.
Ultrasonic inspection uses pulses of ultrasonic energy which are reflected at any surface they meet. For the ultrasonic waves to initially enter the metal a coupling medium is necessary. Cellulose paste has been found to be effective and peels off easily after use. A cathode ray tube is used to 'read' the reflection patterns and very minor flaws may be detected with this method of testing. It is particularly effective for detecting plate laminations and the degree of root penetration in welds.

Classification society weld testing

The classification societies require various tests, some of them destructive, in order to approve weld materials and electrodes. Joints made between the materials and the electrodes are then subjected to various strength, metallurgical and other tests.


Cutting processes

The majority of metal cutting in shipyards utilises gas cutting techniques. Plasma arc and gouging cutting techniques are also being increasingly used.


Gas cutting

During gas cutting the metal is, in effect, 'cut' by oxidising and blowing away a narrow band of material. The metal is heated by the preheat section of the flame and then oxidised by a stream of high pressure oxygen which carries away the oxidised metal. A narrow gap with parallel ides remains along the line of the cut. Small amounts of alloying elements in the steel plate can be removed in the cutting process, but large amounts of elements such as chromium may prevent cutting. The introduction of an iron-rich powder into the cutting area overcomes this problem, particularly with stainless steel.
Acetylene or propane is usually used as the preheating gas, in conjunction with oxygen. A typical cutting torch is shown in Figure 4.24. Automated arrangements of cutting torches are used in various machines for edge preparation, flame planing, etc., as mentioned in Chapter 3. An edge preparation arrangement of torches is shown in Figure 4.25.


Figure 4.24 Oxy-acetylene cutting torch

Figure 4.25 Edge preparation: (a) triple-nozzle head; (b) plan view of nozzles showing order of operation


Plasma arc cutting

The cutting torch consists of a tungsten electrode located in a water-cooled nozzle which acts as one electrode in the circuit (Figure 4.26). The material to be cut is the other electrode and the circuit is completed by a stream of ionised gas which will conduct electricity. This 'plasma gas' is supplied around the tungsten electrode and constricts the arc formed between it and the metal plate.

Figure 4.26 Plasma arc cutting torch

A very high temperature region is created at the arc which melts the metal and cuts through it. The gas is initially ionised by a short electrical discharge between the electrode and the nozzle. Inert gases such as argon have been used but modern developments have enabled air or oxygen to be used. This is an automated cutting process which is much faster than other methods.

Gouging

Gouging steel plate by 'arc-air' or by a special cutter fitted to a gas torch is a way of removing metal for the 'back-runs' of a butt weld. Gas or arc welding processes may be modified for gouging purposes. Arc-air gouging consists of a solid copper-clad carbon graphite electrode in a special holder which has a compressed air pipe attached. A stream of compressed air is blown from a jet on to the workpiece to oxidise and remove the molten metal at the point of cutting. Another arrangement uses tubular electrodes to provide the high temperature arc. The air is blown down the inside of the electrode. The solid electrode arrangement is shown in Figure 4.27.

Figure 4.27 Arc-air gouging

焊接和切割过程

在造船中,焊接是现在公认的连接金属的方法。焊接是通过加热将两种金属熔合在一起,产生一个与母材一样坚固或比母材更坚固的接头。所有的金属都可以焊接,但是简单程度和使用的方法有很大的不同。所有造船厂的焊接工艺都是熔化型的,其中接头的边缘被熔化并与熔化的焊接金属熔合。熔焊的热源可由气焊炬、电弧或电阻提供。

气焊

氧气和乙炔燃烧产生的气体火焰用于这一过程。手持火炬用于引导母材周围的火焰,填充棒为接头提供金属(图4.1)。气焊很少使用,已被更快的电弧焊工艺所取代。装备行业,如管道工,可能会使用气焊或使用气体火焰进行铜焊或银焊。


电弧焊

当电路中的两块金属相距一小段距离时,就会在它们之间产生电弧。基本电路如图4.2所示。待焊接的金属形成电路中的一个电极,焊条或焊丝形成另一个电极。产生的电弧产生一个高温区域,该区域熔化并使金属发生熔合。电力通过交流变压器提供,交流变压器可以为一个或多个焊接操作供电。

图4.1使用氧乙炔炬进行气体焊接

图4.2电弧焊接电路

在实际的焊接操作中,焊条和钢板先接触在一起,然后迅速拉开大约4-5毫米,在间隙上产生电弧。产生的温度在4000°C左右,金属之间的电流可以从10到600 A。必须根据金属类型和厚度以及电源电压预设或调整电流。电弧上的电压影响熔深和金属沉积的轮廓。电流在很大程度上决定了焊接金属的沉积量。用几层焊接金属可以产生高质量的焊缝,但是使用单一的重熔敷金属成本更低。
如果使用过大的电流,可能会出现焊接飞溅,即焊缝周围沉积的微小金属滴。
为了获得满意的焊缝,必须排除大气气体,并且必须容易控制电弧。这是通过在焊接过程中屏蔽电弧来实现的。气体保护是通过两种基本方法中的一种产生的,或者是通过助焊剂的燃烧,或者是直接提供气体保护。


使用焊剂的过程

人工焊接

在手动焊接过程中,焊条中的自耗电极被夹持在一个夹具中,并由操作者输送到母材上。焊条是涂有焊剂的低碳钢焊条。焊条的金属通常是沸腾钢。这是一种不含硅或铝的韧性材料,硅和铝都会影响电弧。杆涂层由纤维素、矿物硅酸盐、氧化物、氟化物、碱性碳酸盐和粉末金属合金组成。所使用的特定成分通过诸如硅酸钠的粘合材料结合在一起。涂层覆盖了芯线的长度,除了芯线适合夹持器的地方。
焊条根据国际标准ISO 2560:1973(E)中给出的焊剂涂层进行入级。两种基本类型是金红石涂层焊条和氢控制焊条。金红石是几乎纯矿物形式的氧化钛,是金红石型焊条的主要成分。它增加炉渣粘度,减少飞溅,并改善炉渣可分离性。金红石型焊条用途广泛,具有良好的光洁度和焊接质量。氢控或碱性焊条熔敷氢含量低的焊接金属。它们用于焊接高应力接头和高强度钢。涂层中含有大量的碳酸盐和氟化物,通过烘烤可以将涂层中的水含量降低到非常低的水平。


图4.3焊接位置a)水平或平焊;(b) 水平/立焊;(c) 立焊;(d) 仰焊;(e)倾焊

手工焊接可以在任何方向完成,三种基本模式是平焊、立焊和仰焊,这些模式的一些组合如图4.3所示。必须使用正确类型的焊条,并具备相当的技能,特别是对于仰焊和垂直焊接位置。焊接尽可能安排在平焊模式。
重力焊机是一种由三脚架组成的设备,三脚架的一条腿充当滑动电焊钳的轨道(图4.4)。一旦定位并起弧,焊条和钎料的重量使其滑下轨道并沿着接缝沉积焊接金属。滑轨的角度将决定沉积的金属量。在轨道的底部,防倾机构移动电极来断开电弧。一个人能够同时操作几个这样的装置。

图4.4重力焊机


自动焊接

在自动机器焊接过程中,沿着金属的移动以固定的速度进行,焊剂覆盖的焊条被送进接头。正确的弧长和金属沉积是由机器实现的,特殊的螺旋焊剂涂层在焊接过程中提供保护。这台机器只能平焊水平接头。
电弧可以另外用二氧化碳气体密封,以允许更高的电流用于高速焊接。双角型也可用于平板或面板的加强板焊接(图4.5)。

另一种自动机器焊接工艺,埋弧焊,使用裸线电极和单独供给的粒状焊剂。焊剂熔化产生电弧的气体保护和熔化的覆盖层。因此,在这种非常高效的工艺中,可以高速沉积大量金属,而不会夹带空气。这个过程如图4.6(a)所示。未使用的焊剂可以回收再利用。这是一个仅用于水平(即平焊)操作的过程,可以正常操作为双面焊接或单面焊接过程。在正常过程中,进行平焊,将板翻转过来,或者从下面进行仰焊。最后一次运行时,可能需要从接头中抽出一部分。在单面工艺中,可以使用各种形式的垫板,其中一个例子如图4.6(b)所示。然后,焊缝中的任何缺陷都必须通过向外弯曲并从另一侧焊接来修复。该过程仅限于室内隐蔽使用,不适合在铺位上使用。

图4.5使用双头机器的自动焊剂涂层焊条焊接
图4.6埋弧焊a)埋弧焊;(b)单面焊接的垫板布置

电渣焊

厚度超过13 mm的板的垂直焊接可以通过这种方法有效地实现。最初,电弧被点燃,但是该过程通过电阻加热熔渣而继续。焊接熔池由放置在钢板任一侧的冷却板控制,冷却板可以在单独的部分中机器地或手动地沿钢板向上移动。或者,焊接高度可以固定在任何一侧。裸线电极通常从顶部通过一个可消耗的导向装置进给,并作为电路的电极。
焊接开始和结束时需要引弧板和引弧板,在焊接过程中不得出现中断。该布置在图4.7中示意性地示出。


图4.7电渣焊


气电焊接

这种工艺特别适合于造船,因为厚度在13-40毫米范围内的垂直板可以有效地连接。再次使用冷却鞋,但是现在使用涂有焊剂的焊条。熔化是通过电极和金属之间的电弧实现的,二氧化碳气体保护通过鞋的上部区域提供。布置类似于图4.7,用于电渣焊,二氧化碳通过焊鞋顶部供应。


螺柱焊接

作为电路一部分的机器或焊枪用于螺柱焊。在一种方法中,将螺柱送入离合器中,并将陶瓷套圈置于端部。螺柱靠着金属表面放置,枪扳机的操作收回螺柱以产生电弧(图4.8)。在电弧放电一段时间后,螺柱被推入熔融金属池中,进行焊接。羊角管集中了电弧,减少了空气的进入,并限制了熔融金属区域。焊剂包含在螺柱的端部。
另一种方法是在双头螺柱的端部使用一个可熔环,该环导电产生电弧,然后崩溃,迫使双头螺柱进入熔融金属池并形成焊缝。焊接螺柱用于将隔热材料固定到舱壁和其他外壳上。其他类型的螺栓,以螺栓,钩和环的形式,也是可用的。

图4.8螺柱焊接a)螺柱和套圈放置在板上;(b)画出的弧线;(c)焊接完成


使用气体的过程

有采用带有气体保护的裸露电极或焊丝的焊接工艺。自动或半自动操作是常见的。通过自动操作,一旦设定,过程由机器控制。在半自动操作中,进行某些机器设置,但是焊炬是手持的,并且该过程在某种程度上由操作者控制。


钨极惰性气体保护

这是一种用于薄金属板如钢或铝的工艺。水冷非自耗钨电极和板状材料之间通过间隙上的高频放电产生电弧。惰性气体保护通常是氩气。这个过程如图4.9所示。

图4.9钨惰性气体工艺


金属惰性气体(MIG)

在这一过程中使用自耗金属丝电极,从进给装置通过焊钳或焊炬进给(图4.10)。惰性气体通过焊炬供给以保护电弧,焊炬和板是电路的一部分。电源通常是直流的,操作过程可以是全自动或半自动的。
在使用这种工艺的钢焊接中,二氧化碳可以作为保护气体,并且可以焊接任何厚度的板材。焊线进给单元内的控制允许选择与电流相关的恒定焊线进给范围。对于二氧化碳气体,电弧特性随着电流从低电流下的短路(浸渍转移)电弧变化到高电流下的喷射电弧。浸渍转移允许焊接的所有位置,但是喷射电弧只能是平焊。浸渍转移非常适合较薄的材料,因为它产生较少的扭曲效果。这种工艺越来越多地用于造船。


图4.10金属惰性气体过程


等离子金属惰性气体

这是金属惰性气体工艺的进一步发展,该工艺在MIG电弧周围引入了等离子电弧。等离子体是一种电离气流,它包围着MIG电弧,并将其作用集中在金属上。等离子弧有自己的一套控制电路。它最初由MIG电弧点燃,两个电弧单独控制,该过程可以根据材料要求进行微调。有自动和半自动版本。半自动型使用双流喷嘴布置,如图4.11所示,使用单一气体供应,通常是氩气,作为保护气体和等离子气体。所使用的焊炬不比传统的MIG焊炬重,并且该工艺具有更高的焊接金属沉积速率和使用可以小到30度的更窄的v形准备的优点。


铝热焊接

这是一个熔化过程,是由过氧化钡点燃的铝粉和氧化铁之间的化学反应释放的热量造成的。要焊接的零件通常是大的截面,例如一个树干骨架,它们被一起放置在一个砂模或石墨模中。化学反应产生的钢水和熔渣首先在坩埚中形成,然后流入模具。

图4.11等离子金属惰性气体过程

图4.12对接焊缝准备a)方形对接接头;(b)单V形对接接头;(c)双V形对接接头;双U形对接接头
 
图4.13角焊缝a)角焊缝,(b)搭接焊缝;(c)带全熔透准备的角焊缝

焊接类型

根据情况、材料厚度、所需强度等,使用许多不同的焊接接头。焊接深度可能需要一次或多次焊接才能达到工件厚度。除非采用单边技术,否则还需要反转工件、刨削和最终回切。
当承受张力时,对接焊缝是最强的接头,如图4.12所示。单V型坡口准备用于厚度超过6毫米(最大值为20毫米)的对接焊缝。厚度低于6毫米时,可采用方形坡口准备,对于非常厚的板材,则采用双V型坡口准备。还使用了U型焊接准备,其需要更少的焊接金属并提供更好质量的接头,以换取更昂贵的边缘加工。
角焊缝用于直角板接头和搭接接头,如图4.13所示。如图4.13(a)所示,在角焊缝中使用了两个特殊术语:焊脚长度L和焊喉厚度T。焊脚长度与对接板的厚度有关,且焊喉厚度必须至少为L的70%。在需要特殊强度的地方,可以使用全熔透型角焊缝。全熔透焊缝如图4.13(c)所示。对接板为V型或J型,以确保焊接时完全焊透。
根据结构要求,所述角焊缝可以多种方式布置。全连续焊缝用于重要的强度连接以及油密和水密连接。链式焊缝和间歇焊缝是焊接的间隔部分,如图4.14所示。对于不需要防水接头的轻应力材料来说,在重量和变形方面的一些节省是可能的。

图4.14非连续角焊缝a)间歇焊接;(b)链式焊接

定位焊是任何待焊接接头上的短焊缝。它们用于在完成接合之前最初对齐和固定材料。它们是组装焊缝,必须经过完整的焊接程序。它们的长度不应小于75 mm,以确保足够的热量输入,并且不应焊接。

焊接实践

由于热量的局部集中,金属的焊接产生了板区域,这些区域在冷却时首先膨胀,然后收缩。这种效应以及熔敷焊接金属和母材性能的差异导致工件变形。变形的表现可能是以下一种或多种形式:纵向收缩、横向收缩和角度变形。图4.15说明了这些不同的影响。

图4.1.5变形效果

变形的原因可能归因于几个单独或共同起作用的可能因素。焊接区域的集中加热及其随后的收缩将以不同的方式影响焊接金属和工件。因此,在焊缝、两个接合的工件和整个结构中会产生应力。
焊接接头允许的约束程度会影响其变形。如果焊接接头不受限制,其随后的焊接收缩将释放任何产生的应力。由于结构的刚性或某种阻尼形式的应用,约束接头会对焊缝产生高应力,如果不采用正确的焊接顺序,可能会出现裂纹。
由于制造过程,工件的特性和允许应力“锁定”在工件中,焊接可能会改变或影响工件的特性和允许应力,并导致变形。


预防变形

良好的设计应确保结构中尽可能少的焊接接头,尤其是当结构由薄截面板组成时。如果存在焊接接头,应易于接近,最好用于平焊。
如图4.16所示,可以对接缝进行边缘加工以减少变形。如图所示,具有四个焊道的单V形准备接头将会变形。按所示顺序用四条焊道焊接的双V形预制接头只会显示出连接板的轻微收缩。

图4.16减少变形的边缘加工a)产生相当大变形的单V形准备(1次第一次焊接,2次第二次焊接,3次第三次焊接,4次最终焊接);(b)双V制剂仅产生轻微收缩

约束是造船中防止变形的常用方法。当装置经过整流处理准备焊接时,它们被点焊以在焊接过程中保持在适当的位置。零件将保持尺寸正确,结构的刚性通常会抑制任何变形。如图4.17所示,对接焊缝和角焊缝上也使用了强背面或夹紧装置。
所有的焊缝都会“收缩”,所以在焊接中使用正确的程序可以大大减少变形。焊接接头的焊道越少,变形就越小。用双V型坡口对称焊接接头的任一侧将产生无变形的焊缝。因此,由两个操作员同时进行焊接是一种有用的技术,只要有可能,就应该采用这种技术。焊接应始终朝着接头的自由端或自由端进行。对于长时间的焊接,有几种技术可以用来减少变形。后退法如图4.18所示。这里,操作员按照所示的数字顺序和方向分段焊接接头。这种方法的一种变体是“跳过”焊接,如图4.19所示,同样按照所示的数字顺序和方向进行。然后可以通过尽可能平衡焊接并允许焊接收缩自由发生来控制变形。考虑到这一点,焊接顺序应在焊接开始前仔细考虑。

图4.17夹紧布置

图4.18后退焊接技术

图4.19跳跃或游走焊接技术


变形校正

尽管有最严格的方法来消除它,变形仍然会发生。如果接头变形被认为是不可接受的,则必须对接头进行刨削、开槽或完全劈开,然后重新焊接。可以在整个接头上放置加强背,以抑制重焊过程中的变形。
可以使用简单的机器方法,如液压千斤顶或在变形或弯曲的局部区域锤击。如果此类方法涉及拉紧焊缝,则应在校正后检查是否有裂纹。为此,应尽一切努力避免机器矫直结构。


图4.20点加热a)曲板;(b)加热;(c)扩张;(d)水平板

除了高强度钢、淬火钢和回火钢之外,气体燃烧炬产生的集中热量可用于矫正钢的变形。这一过程如图4.20所示。在收缩会带来改善的一侧有一小块区域被加热。钢被加热到“红热”,火炬沿着预先画好的线慢慢移动,速度要保证“红热”不会直接穿过材料。被加热的区域想要扩大,但是受到周围物质的抵制。重结晶吸收膨胀,冷却时发生收缩,产生有利的变形,从而纠正原来变形的结构(图4.21)。

图4.21变形校正
图4.22焊缝示例a)良好的焊缝;(b)焊接不良

焊接缺陷

焊缝

像任何其他过程一样,焊接中也可能出现故障。这些故障可能是由于工艺不良、过程不正确、使用的材料错误等造成的。良好的焊接如图4.22(a)所示。在这样的焊缝中,一定程度的熔化应该发生在焊缝的侧面。焊趾处不应有重叠或咬边。顶面应存在轻微的钢筋或材料堆积,底面应存在根部渗透。
不良焊接如图4.22(b)所示。缺少钢筋和根部渗透是不正确程序或工艺不良的结果。重叠是位于母体金属上的注入金属。咬边是母材的损耗,可能是由于焊接电流过大造成的。气孔是由焊缝中滞留的气体造成的。夹渣是焊道之间清理不充分的结果。运行之间熔合或渗透不良可能是由于清洁不良或电压或电流设置不正确。焊接不良的结果是接头不牢固或有缺陷。焊接不良也可能是裂纹的起点。


层状撕裂

随着钢板厚度的增加和结构变得更加刚性,焊接接头周围的层状撕裂已经成为一个问题。层状撕裂是钢板中的脆性开裂,是垂直于钢板的拉伸应力的结果。这是由于焊接金属在冷却时收缩造成的。当厚板、大型焊接件和高内部连接约束都存在时,层状撕裂最有可能发生。典型的“撕裂”发生在T型结构的交叉板上,可能始于焊缝的根部或根部,或者始于焊缝下方的某个点(图4.23)。
减少层状撕裂问题的一种方法是使用“纯净”钢,如通过真空脱气工艺生产的钢。其他措施包括使用避免板的直角拉伸应力的接头配置,或在焊接前预热板。


图4.24层状撕裂的例子

焊接测试

几种无损检测技术用于焊接接头的检查。这些方法包括目视检查、染料渗透剂、磁粉、射线照相和超声波方法。某些类别的工作需要对特殊试板及其焊接接头进行破坏性试验,但大多数造船焊接试验是非破坏性的。
训练有素、经验丰富的检查员和测量员可以通过目视检查发现焊缝中的表面缺陷和瑕疵。他也可以要求对已知的问题区域或高压力区域进行更详细的检查。在船舶焊接过程中,他始终保持警惕和关注,确保了良好的工作和令人满意的焊接标准。
磁粉检测是一种表面检测技术。薄白漆中的铁屑混合物被涂在焊接接头上。然后,通过在关节上安装一块大的永久磁铁来磁化关节。然后,不连续性表现为铁屑的集中,这是由扭曲的磁场造成的。
将染料渗透剂涂在接缝表面,然后擦拭或洗掉。然后使用紫外光检查焊接表面。任何裂缝都含有发光染料,很容易被发现。
射线检测是一种对焊接接头进行“拍照”的方法。照相底片暴露在关节远端的X射线或伽马射线装置的辐射下。任何夹杂物或气孔都会在照相底片上显现出来。
超声波检测使用超声波能量脉冲,这种能量会在遇到的任何表面上反射。对于最初进入金属的超声波,耦合介质是必要的。已经发现纤维素糊是有效的,并且在使用后容易剥落。阴极射线管用于“读取”反射图案,这种测试方法可以检测出非常微小的缺陷。它对检测板叠层和焊缝根部渗透程度特别有效。

船级社焊接测试

船级社要求各种测试,其中一些是破坏性的,以批准焊接材料和焊条。然后,材料和电极之间的接头要经过各种强度、冶金和其他测试。


切割过程

造船厂的大部分金属切割都采用气割技术。等离子弧和气刨切割技术也越来越多地被使用。


气割

在气割过程中,金属实际上是通过氧化和吹走一条狭窄的材料带而被“切割”的。金属被火焰的预热部分加热,然后被带走氧化金属的高压氧气流氧化。沿着切割线留有平行边的窄间隙。钢板中的少量合金元素可以在切割过程中去除,但大量元素如铬可能会阻止切割。将富铁粉末引入切割区域克服了这个问题,特别是对于不锈钢。
乙炔或丙烷通常与氧气一起用作预热气体。典型的割炬如图4.24所示。切割炬的自动布置用于各种机器中,用于边缘加工、火焰刨削等,如第三章所述。图4.25显示了焊炬的边缘加工布置。


图4.24氧乙炔割炬

图4.25边缘加工a)三喷嘴头;(b)显示操作顺序的喷嘴平面图

等离子弧切割

割炬由位于水冷喷嘴中的钨电极组成,充当电路中的一个电极(图4.26)。被切割的材料是另一个电极,电路由导电的电离气流完成。这种“等离子气体”被供应到钨电极周围,并限制在钨电极和金属板之间形成的电弧。

图4.26等离子弧割炬

电弧会产生一个非常高的温度区域,熔化金属并切穿它。气体最初通过电极和喷嘴之间的短暂放电被电离。已经使用了惰性气体如氩气,但是现代发展已经能够使用空气或氧气。这是一个自动化的切割过程,比其他方法快得多。

刨削

通过“电弧空气”或安装在气焊炬上的特殊刀具刨削钢板是一种为对接焊缝的“打底”去除金属的方法。气焊或电弧焊工艺可修改用于气刨目的。电弧气刨由一个固定在特殊夹具中的实覆铜碳石墨电极组成,夹具上连接有压缩空气管。压缩空气流从喷嘴吹到工件上,氧化并去除切割点的熔融金属。另一种布置使用管状电极来提供高温电弧。空气被吹到电极内部。固体电极排列如图4.27所示。

图4.27电弧气刨
回复 支持 反对

使用道具 举报

 楼主| 发表于 2023-2-18 23:07 | 显示全部楼层 来自: 中国上海
5
Major Structural Items

SECTION A        KEEL AND BOTTOM CONSTRUCTION

The bottom shell construction consists of the central keel of the ship, with the flooring structure and side shell plating on either side. Almost all vessels built today, with the exception of tankers, are fitted with a double bottom This is an internal skin fitted about 1 m above the outer shell plating and supports by the flooring structure.

Keel

The keel runs along the centreline of the bottom plating of the ship and for the majority of merchant ships is of a flat plate construction. At right-angles to the flat plate keel, running along the ship's centreline from the fore peak to the aft peak bulkhead, is a watertight longitudinal division known as the centre girder or vertical keel. Where a double-bottom construction is employed, the centreline strake of tank top plating results in the formation of an I-section keel (Figure 5.1). This provides considerable, strength to the structure and resistance to bending. The flat plate keel or 'middle line strake of plating' is increased in thickness of strength purposes and for a corrosion allowance, because of the difficulty in maintaining paint protection systems in way of the docking blocks during the vessel's life.
Some double bottoms have a duct keel fitted along the centreline. This is an internal passage of watertight construction running some distance along the length of the ship, often from the forepeak to the forward machinery space bulkhead. Use is made of this passage to carry the pipework along the length of the ship to the various holds or tanks. An entrance is usually provided at the forward end of the machinery space via a watertight manhole. No duct keel is necessary in the machinery space or aft of it, since pipe work will run Above the engine room double bottom and along the shaft tunnel, where one is fitted.
The construction of the duct keel uses two longitudinal girders spaced not more than 2.0 m apart. This restriction is to ensure that the longitudinal girders rest on the docking blocks when the ship is in drydock. Stiffeners are fitted to shell and bottom plating at alternate frame spaces and are bracketed to the longitudinal girder(Figure 5.2). The keel plate and the tank top above the duct keel must have their scantlings increased to compensate for the reduced strength of the transverse floors.

Figure 5.1 Flat plate keel

Figure 5.2 Duct keel

Double bottom structure

Where a double bottom or inner shell is fitted it is watertight up to the bilges, thus providing complete watertight integrity should the outer shell be pierced in way of the double bottom. The minimum depth is determined by rule requirements for the size of vessel but the actual depth is sometimes increased in places to suit double-bottom tank capacities. The double bottom may have a sloping margin leading to the bilge radiused plating or a continuous double bottom extending to the side shell. The sloping margin construction requires the use of margin plates to connect up with the side framing and provides a collecting bay or well for bilge water (Figure 5.3). The continuous tank top or flat margin must have bilge water collecting points or drain 'hats' fitted into it (Figure 5.4). The flat margin is connected to the side framing by a flanged bracket. The flat margin type of construction is much used in modern construction.
The structure is made up of vertical floors which may be watertight, solid or of bracket construction. The floor Structure is continuous from the centre girder to the side shell and supports the inner bottom shell. Side girders are fitted in the longitudinal direction, their number depending on the width of the ship. These side girders are broken either side of the floors and are therefore termed intercostal girders.
Watertight or oiltight floors are fitted beneath the main bulkheads and are also used to subdivide the double-bottom space into tanks for various liquids. Solid plate floors of non-watertight construction, usually lightened by manholes, are positioned in other places as required to stiffen the structure. Between solid plate floors, bracket floors are fitted. Bracket floors consist of plate brackets attached to the centre girder and the side shell with bulb plate stiffeners running between. The stiffeners are supported by angle bar struts at intervals and any side girders which are present in the structure.
The arrangement of flooring will be determined by the type of framing system adopted, which may be either transverse or longitudinal.

Figure 5.3 Longitudinally framed double bottom: (a) bracket floor; (b) solid floor

Figure 5.4 Transversely framed double bottom: (a) bracket floor; (b) solid floor


Transversely framed double bottom

When transversely framed, the double-bottom structure consists of solid plate floors and bracket floors with transverse frames. The bracket floor is fitted between the widely spaced solid floors. It consists of transverse bulb angle sections stiffening the shell and inner bottom plating. Vertical support is provided by brackets at the side shell and centre girder, any side girders and intermediate struts. The number of intercostal side girders fitted is determined by classification society rules. Solid and bracket floors for a transversely-framed vessel are shown in Figure 5.4.


Longitudinally framed double bottom

This is the system favoured as a result of tests and it provides adequate resistance to distortion on ships of 120 m in length or greater. Offset bulb plates are used as longitudinal stiffeners on the shell and inner bottom plating, at intervals of about 1 m. Solid floors provide support at transverse bulkheads and at intervals not exceeding 3.8 m along the length of the ship. Brackets are fitted at the centre girder and side shell at intermediate frame spaces between solid floors. These brackets are flanged at the free edge and extend to the first longitudinal. Channel bar or angle bar struts are provided to give support at intervals of not more than 2.5 m where solid floors are widely spaced. Intercostal side girders are again fitted, their number depending upon classification society rules. Solid and bracket floors for a longitudinally framed vessel are shown in Figure 5.3.


Machinery space double bottom

The construction of the double bottom in the machinery space regardless of framing system has solid plate floors at every frame space under the main engine. Additional side girders are fitted outboard of the main engine seating, as required. The double-bottom height is usually increased to provide fuel oil, lubricating oil and fresh water tanks of suitable capacities. Shaft alignment also requires an increase in the double-bottom height or a raised seating, the former method usually being adopted. Continuity of strength is ensured and maintained by gradually sloping the tank top height and internal structure to the required position. Additional support and stiffening is necessary for the main engines, boilers, etc., to provide a vibration-resistant solid platform capable of supporting the concentrated loads. On slow-speed diesel-engined ships the tank top plating is increased to 40 mm thick or thereabouts in way of the engine bedplate. This is achieved by using a special insert plate which is the length of the engine including the thrust block in size (Figure 5.5). Additional heavy girders are also fitted under this plate and in other positions under heavy machinery as required. Plating and girder material in the machinery spaces is of increased scantlings in the order of 10%.        •

Figure 5.5 Machinery space double bottom

Double-bottom tanks

Access to the double-bottom tanks is usually by manholes cut in the tank top. These manholes are suitably jointed and bolted to be completely watertight when not in use. Docking plugs are fitted in all double-bottom tanks and are a means of completely draining these tanks for inspection in drydock (Figure 5.6). Air pipes are fitted to all double-bottom tanks to release the air when filling. Sounding pipes are also fitted to enable the tanks to be sounded and their capacity determined. All double-bottom tanks are tested on completion by the maximum service pressure head of water or an equivalent air test.

Figure 5.6 Docking plug and pad

Structure to resist pounding

Pounding or slamming results from the ship heaving or pitching, thus causing the forward region to 'slam' down on to the water. Additional structural strength must be provided from the forward perpendicular aft for 25-30% of the ship's length. The shell plating either side of the keel is increased in thickness, depending upon the ship's minimum draught. The frame spacing is reduced, full- and half-height intercostal side girders are fitted and solid floors are installed at every frame space. With longitudinal framing the longitudinal spacing is reduced, intercostal side girders are fitted and transverse floors are installed at alternate frames.

Single-bottom construction

In oil tankers particularly, and some smaller vessels, a single-bottom construction is employed. The oil tanker bottom structure is detailed in Chapter 8. The construction of the single bottom in smaller ships is similar to double-bottom construction but without the inner skin of plating. The upper edge of all plate floors must therefore be stiffened to improve their rigidity.

SECTION B        SHELL PLATING, FRAMING SYSTEMS AND DECKS

Shell plating

The side and bottom shell plating provides the watertight skin of the ship. The shell plating also makes the greatest contribution to the longitudinal strength of the ship's structure. As a result of its huge area the shell plating is composed of many strakes or plates arranged in a fore and aft direction and welded together. The horizontal welds are termed 'seams' and the vertical welds are termed 'butts'. Several strakes of plating are usually joined together as part of a unit. A shell expansion by units was shown in Figure 3.2. The thickness of shell plating is largely dependent upon ship length and frame spacing. The final structure must be capable of withstanding the many dynamic and static loads upon the hull, as discussed in Chapter 2. Some tapering off of shell plate thickness towards the ends of the ship is usual, since the bending moments are reduced in this region.
The strake of side plating nearest to the deck is known as the 'sheerstrake'. The sheerstrake is increased in thickness or a high tensile steel is used. This is because this section of plating is furthest from the neutral axis and subject to the greatest bending stress, as discussed in Chapter 2. The region where the sheerstrake meets the deck plating is known as the gunwale. Two particular arrangements in this region are used and are shown in Figure 5.7. With the rounded gunwale arrangement no welding is permitted on the sheerstrake because of the high stressing which could result in cracks emanating from the ‘toes’ of fillet welds. Such welds reduce the resistance of components to cracking. Where such structure is butt welded the welding must blend into the parent plate. Towards the ends of the ship, as the cross-section reduces, the various strakes of plating will taper in width. Where these plate widths become small, a stealer plate or strake is fitted (Figure 5.8).


Figure 5.7 Gunwale arrangements


Figure 5.8 Stealer strake arrangement

All openings in shell plating must have rounded edges to avoid stress concentrations and usually some form of compensation to avoid a discontinuity of strength.


Framing systems

Figure 5.9 Framing systems: (a) transverse framing; (b) longitudinal framing; (c) combine framing

The bottom shell and side plating are framed, i.e. stiffened along their length, against the compressing forces of the sea. Two different types of framing are in use, or a combination of the two may he employed. These are known, respectively, as transverse, longitudinal and combined framing and are shown in Figure 5.9. Cargo arrangements may influence the choice of framing systems, but, generally, considerations of longitudinal strength are the deciding factor.


Transverse framing

Transverse framing of the shell plating consists of vertical stiffeners, either of bulb plate or deep-flanged web frames, which are attached by brackets to the deck beams and the flooring structure. The scantlings of the frame are to some extent dependent upon their depth and also on the nature of their end connections. Particular locations, such as at the ends of hatches, require frames of increased scantling. Very deep web frames are often fitted in the machinery space.
Frame spacing is generally not more than 1000 mm but is always reduced in the pounding region and at the fore and aft ends in the peak tank regions.


Longitudinal framing

Longitudinal framing of the side shell employs horizontal offset bulb plates with increased scantlings towards the lower side shell. Transverse webs are used to support the longitudinal frames, their spacing being dependent upon the type of ship and the section modulus of the longitudinal. This construction is described and illustrated in Chapter 8 with reference to oil tanker construction.


Bilge keel

With a flat keel construction there is little resistance to rolling of the ship. A bilge keel is fitted along the bilge radius either side of the ship to damp any tendency the ship has to roll (Figure 5.10). Some improvement in longitudinal strength at the bilge radius is also provided. The bilge keel must be arranged to penetrate the boundary layer of water along the hull but not too deep to have large forces acting on it.
The bilge keel is fitted at right-angles to the bilge radiused plating but does not extend beyond the extreme breadth line. It runs the extent of the midship section of the ship and is positioned, after model tests, to ensure the minimum resistance to forward motion of the ship. Construction is of steel plate with a stiffened free edge or a section such as a bulb plate. A means of fastening to the hull is employed which will break off the bilge keel without damage to the hull in the event of fouling or collision. The ends are fastened to a doubling plate on the shell, since the bilge plating is in a highly stressed region of the ship.


Ice navigation strengthening

lee class notations 1*, 1, 2 or 3 are assigned to ships which have additional strengthening as required by classification society rules. Various means of additional stiffening by increased frame scantlings, reduced frame spacing and increased plate thickness are required. The extent and nature of the stiffening reduces from 1*, which is the highest classification, to 3, which is the lowest. Some modifications to the stem and stem regions may also be required.

Figure 5.10 Bilge keel: (a) plan view showing arrangement at ends; (b) section through bilge keel


Decks

The deck of a ship is the horizontal platform which completes the enclosure of the hull. It must provide a solid working platform capable of supporting any loads resting upon it, and also a watertight top cover to the hull structure. The deck with its various forms of stiffening and its plating provides a considerable contribution to the strength of the ship. Where the deck is pierced by hatches, special coamings or surrounds to the openings must be provided. These large openings require special compensation to offset their effect on the structural strength of the ship.

Deck plating

The deck plating is made up of longitudinal strakes of plating across its width. The plates or strakes nearest to the deck edges are termed 'stringer plates'. They are of thicker material than the remaining deck plating since they form the important join between the side shell and deck plating. Towards the ends of the ship the deck plating, like the shell plating, is reduced in thickness.
The large openings in the deck for hatchways, engine casings, pump room entrances, etc., require compensation to maintain the section modulus of the material. The deck plating abreast of such openings is therefore increased in thickness. The plating between the hatches of a cargo ship is thinner than the rest of the deck plating and contributes little to longitudinal strength.
The plating of the weather decks is cambered towards the ship's side to assist drainage of any water falling on the deck. This camber is usually of the order of one-fiftieth of the breadth of the ship at midships.

Deck stiffening

The deck plating is supported from below in a manner determined by the framing system of the ship. With longitudinal framing, a series of closely spaced longitudinals are used in addition to deep web transverses. With transverse framing, transverse deck beams are used at every frame space. Where hatches are fitted to a ship, continuous longitudinal girders are fitted over the length of the ship running alongside the batches.

Deck beams and transverses

Deck beams are fitted across the width of the ship and are joined to the side frames by brackets known as 'beam knees'. Continuous longitudinal girders are fitted on the ship which run alongside the hatchways and the beams are bracketed to these girders. In this way the unsupported span is reduced. Deck beams are usually offset bulb plates. For the length of the open hatch space the beams are broken and bracketed to the longitudinal girder or hatch side coaming. The beams are likewise broken and bracketed to the longitudinal girders in way of the engine casing. A beam broken in this manner is known as a 'half-beam'.
Deck transverses support the longitudinally framed deck. These are deep plate webs with a facing flat or a flanged edge. They are bracketed to the side frames by beam knees. Small tripping brackets are fitted between alternate longitudinals and the transverse (Figure 5.11).


Deck girders

Deck girders exist in a number of forms, depending upon their location. A flanged girder with tripping brackets will often be used as part of a hatch coaming. Such a flanged girder is referred to as unsymmetrical and must have tripping brackets fitted at alternate frame spaces. The symmetrical girder is often used, particularly as a centreline girder. Brackets join the girder to the deck beams and are fitted at every fourth frame space. At hatch comers these girders must be additionally supported either by pillars or transverse girders. The symmetrical and unsymmetrical types of girders are shown in Figure 5.12.
The combination of longitudinal girders with transverse beams is much in use in modern ships. The deck longitudinal girders extend as far as possible along the full length of the ship on the outside of the hatches. This continuous longitudinal material permits a reduction in deck plate thickness, in terms of classification society requirements.
The deck between the hatches must be supported by longitudinal or transverse beams. Where side girders join transverse beams, particularly beneath hatch openings, gusset plates are fitted (Figures 5.13 and 5.14).

Figure 5.11 Deck beam

Figure 5.12 Girder arrangement: (a) symmetrical: (b) unsymmetrical


Local loading

On the deck, where concentrated loads are situated or likely, additional stiffening must be provided. Machinery such as winches, windlasses, etc., will also require seatings which are discussed in detail in Chapter 6. Also, any beams fitted in way of deep tanks, bunker tanks, etc., must have increased scantlings and perhaps reduced spans to be at least equal in strength to the boundary bulk heads.

Figure 5.13 Hatch corner gusset plate. viewed from below

Figure 5.14 Gusset plate used in machinery space construction

Figure 5.15 Insert plate fitted at hatch comer


Discontinuities

A discontinuity, as discussed here, refers to any break or change in section, thickness or amount of plating material. Great care must be taken to compensate for any discontinuities in shell or deck plating resulting from doors, hatchways, etc. Where the loss of longitudinal material results, this compensation is of particular importance. Where changes in the amount of plating material occur, such as at bulwarks, the change should be gradual and well radiused.
Well-radiused comers must be used and sometimes the fitting of doubling plates or thicker insert plates, at the comers of all openings. Any sharp comer can produce a notch which, after stressing, could result in a crack. Figure 5.15 shows an insert plate fitted at the comer of a hatch opening.


Hatch coamings

The edges of all hatch openings are framed by hatch coamings. On the weather deck the coamings must be at a minimum height of 600 mm according to the load line regulations. This is to reduce the risk of water entry to the holds. Internal coamings, e.g. those within the superstructure or holds, have no height specified and in tween-deck holds particularly are often made flush with the deck for uninterrupted cargo stowage. The weather deck coaming must be a minimum of 9 mm thick, and where the height is in excess of 600 mm it must be stiffened by a horizontal stiffener and vertical brackets must be fitted not more than 3 m apart. An edge stiffener must also be provided which may be a preformed section where wooden hatch covers are fitted (see Figure 7.1. later) or a half-round steel bar as in Figure 5.16.
The side coaming plates, as an extension of the longitudinal girder, are of greater thickness than the end coaming plates and are extended beyond the hatch opening in the form or brackets (Figure 5.16). These brackets also serve to support the platforms used for the hatch operating equipment. Smaller vertical brackets are fitted around the remainder of the coaming structure to stiffen it (Figure 5.17).

Figure 5.16 Hatch coaming: (a) elevation of hatch coaming (steel hatch covers); (b) plan view of hatch coaming (steel hatch covers)

5.17 Coaming bracket


SECTION C BULKHEADS AND PILLARS

Bulkheads

The vertical divisions arranged in the ship's structure are known as bulkheads. Three basic types are found, namely watertight, non-watertight and oiltight or tank bulkheads. Oiltight or tank bulkheads are watertight in their construction but are subjected to more rigorous testing than a simply watertight bulkhead.
The transverse watertight bulkheads subdivide the ship into a number of water-tight compartments and their number is dictated by classification society regulations. Oiltight bulkheads form the boundaries of tanks used for the carriage of liquid cargoes or fuels. Non-watertight bulkheads are any other bulkhead such as engine casings, accommodation partitions or stores compartments.


Watertight bulkheads

In addition to subdividing the ship, transverse bulkheads also provide considerable structural strength as support for the decks and to resist deformation caused by broadside waves (racking). The spacing of watertight bulkheads, which is known as the watertight subdivision of the ship, is governed by rules dependent upon ship type, size, etc. All ships must have:
(1) A collision or fore peak bulkhead which is to be positioned not less than 0.05 X length of the ship, nor more than 0.08 X length of the ship, from the forward end of the load waterline.
(2) An after peak bulkhead which encloses the sterntube(s) and rudder trunk in a watertight compartment.
(3) A bulkhead at each end of the machinery space; the after bulkhead may, for an aft engine room, be the after peak bulkhead.

Additional bulkheads are to be fitted according to the vessel's length, e.g. a ship between 145 and 165m long must have 8 bulkheads with machinery midships and 7 bulkheads with machinery aft.
Fitting less than the standard number of bulkheads is permitted in approved circumstances where additional structural compensation is provided. Water-tight bulkheads must extend to the freeboard deck but may rise to the uppermost continuous deck. The aft peak bulkhead may extend only to the next deck above the load waterline, where the construction aft of this deck is fully watertight to the shell.
The purpose of watertight subdivision and the spacing of the bulkheads is to provide an arrangement such that if one compartment is flooded between bulkheads the ship's waterline will not rise above the margin line. The margin line is a line drawn parallel to and 76 mm below the upper surface of the bulkhead deck at the ship's side. The subdivision of passenger ships is regulated by statutory requirements which are in excess of classification society rules for cargo ships, but the objects of confining flooding and avoiding sinking are the same.


Construction of watertight bulkheads

Watertight bulkheads, because of their large area, are formed of several strakes of plating. They are welded to the shell, deck and tank top. The plating strakes are horizontal and the stiffening is vertical. Since water pressure in a tank increases with depth and the watertight bulkhead must withstand such loading, the bulkhead must have increasingly greater strength towards the base. This is achieved by increasing the thickness of the horizontal strakes of plating towards the bottom. The collision bulkhead must have plating some 12% thicker than other watertight bulkheads. Also, plating in the aft peak bulkhead around the sterntube must be doubled or increased in thickness to reduce vibration. The bulkhead is stiffened by vertical bulb plates or toe-welded angle bar stiffeners spaced about 760 mm apart. This spacing is reduced to 610 mm for collision and oiltight bulkheads. The ends of the stiffeners are bracketed to the tanktop and the deck beams. In tween decks, where the loading is less, the stiffeners may have no end connections. A watertight bulkhead arrangement is shown in Figure 5.18.


Corrugated watertight bulkheads

The use of corrugations or swedges in a plate instead of welded stiffeners produces as strong a structure with a reduction in weight. The troughs are vertical on transverse bulkheads but on longitudinal bulkheads they must be horizontal in order to add to the longitudinal strength of the ship.

Figure 5.19 Corrugated watertight bulkhead: (a) section through corrugation; (b) elevation of bulkhead; (c) plan view of corrugations

The corrugations or swedges are made in the plating strakes prior to fabrication of the complete bulkhead. As a consequence, the strakes run vertically and the plating must be of uniform thickness and adequate to support the greater loads at the bottom of the bulkhead. This greater thickness of plate offsets to some extent the saving in weight through not adding stiffeners to the bulkhead. The edges of the corrugated bulkhead which join to the shell plating may have a stiffened flat plate fitted to increase transverse strength and simplify fitting the bulkhead to the shell. On high bulkheads with vertical corrugations, diaphragm plates are fitted across the troughs. This prevents any possible collapse of the corrugations. A corrugated bulkhead arrangement is shown in Figure 5.19.
A watertight floor is fitted in the double bottom directly below every main transverse bulkhead. Where a watertight bulkhead is penetrated, e.g. by pipework, a watertight closure around the penetration must be ensured by a collar fully welded to the pipe and the bulkhead.


Testing of watertight bulkheads

The main fore and aft peak bulkheads must be tested by filling with water to the load waterline. Subdividing watertight bulkheads are tested by hosing down. Oiltight and tank bulkheads must be tested by a head of water not less than 2.45 m above the highest point of the tank.


Non-watertight bulkheads

Any bulkheads other than those used as main subdivisions and tank boundaries may be non-watertight. Examples of these are engine room casing bulkheads, accommodation partitions, store room divisions, etc. Wash bulkheads fitted in deep tanks or in the fore end of a ship are also examples of non-watertight bulkheads. Where a non-watertight bulkhead performs the supporting function similar to a pillar, its stiffeners must be adequate for the load carried. In all other situations the non-watertight bulkhead is stiffened by bulb plates or simply flat plates welded edge on. Corrugated and swedged bulkheads can also be used for non-watertight bulkheads.


Pillars

Pillars provide a means of transferring loads between decks and fastening together the structure in a vertical direction. The pillars which transfer loads, as in the cargo holds or beneath items of machinery, are largely in compression and require little or no bracketing to the surrounding structure. Pillars which tie structure together and are subjected to tensile forces are adequately bracketed at the head or top and the heel or bottom.
Hold pillars are usually large in section and few in number to reduce interference with cargo stowage to a minimum. Pillars are provided to reduce the need for heavy webs to support the hatch girders or end beams. The use of pillars also enables a reduction in size of the hatch girders and beams, since their unsupported span is reduced. Where pillars are fitted between a number of vertical decks they should be in line below one another to efficiently transfer the loads.
Hold pillar sections are usually hollow fabricated shape manufactured from steel plate. Typical sections are round, square and sometimes octagonal. Machinery space pillars are usually fabricated from sections and, while smaller in dimensions than hold pillars, a greater number are fitted (Figure 5.20). Additional structural material must be provided at the head and heel of pillars to evenly distribute the load. At the head a plate is used, often with tripping brackets to surrounding structure. At the heel an insert plate or doubling plate is used, with or without brackets depending upon the type of loading (Figure 5.21).
Solid pillars may be fitted in accommodation spaces or under points of concentrated loading. Solid round bar up to about 100 mm diameter is fitted, again with head and heel plates to spread the load.


Figure 5.20 Machinery space pillar arrangements: (a) sectional elevation looking aft; (b) elevation looking outboard

Figure 5.21 Tubular pillar arrangements: (a) pillar head connection; (b) pillar heel connection




SECTION D         FORE END CONSTRUCTION

The forward end of a ship refers to the structure forward of the collision bulkhead. The forward end is designed to provide a smooth entry to the water and a streamlined flow along the ship. As a result, resistance to motion is reduced to a minimum. The stern is the most forward part of the ship and runs down to the keel. It is constructed in two pans - a bar stem from the keel to the load waterline and a plate stem up to the deck. The plate stem usually rakes well forward providing pleasing lines to the ship, an increased deck area and a readily collapsible region in the event of a collision. The side shell plating is flared out to further increase the deck area. This arrangement also serves to deflect sea water and spray away from the ship in heavy weather. The forward deck area or forecastle houses the windlasses and winches required for anchor and mooring duties. The anchor chain is housed in a chain locker beneath the forecastle. A bulbous bow may be fitted, which is a protrusion below the waterline designed to reduce the ship's resistance to motion.



Stem

The stem is the terminating point of the forward shell plating. It is made up of a stem bar from the keel to the load waterline and a stiffened plate structure up to the forecastle deck (Figure 5.22). The stem bar is a solid round bar which is welded to the inside of the keel plate at the lower end. At its upper end the bar joins the stem plate. The shell plating is welded to either side of the stem bar.
The stem plate construction of curved plates is stiffened at intervals by breasthooks which are small flange plates fitted horizontally (Figure 5.23). A continuous bulb or flat bar stiffener may be fitted where the stem plate radius is considerable. Heavier than usual shell plating may be fitted at the stem plate region.

Figure 5.22 Fore end construction

Figure 5.23 Section through plate stem showing breasthook


Panting structure

Panting is an in-and-out movement of the shell plating resulting from the variations of water pressure as waves pass along the hull and when the vessel pitches. Special structural arrangements are necessary in the forward region of the ship to strengthen the ship's plating against this action. The structure must be strengthened for 15-20% of the ship's length from forward to the stem. This stiffening is made up of horizontal side stringers, known as ‘panting stringers’, fitted at about 2 m intervals below the lowest deck. Panting beams are fitted across the ship at alternate frame spaces and are bracketed to the panting stringer. The intermediate frames are connected to the panting stringer by brackets (Figure 5.24 and 5.25). A partial wash bulkhead or a series of pillars is fitted on the centreline to further support the structure. Perforated flats may be fitted instead of beams but these must be not more than 2.5 m apart. Perforations of at least 10% of the plate area are required in order to reduce water pressure on the flats.

Bulbous bow
The bulbous bow is fitted in an attempt to reduce the ship's resistance. Arrangements vary from a casting plated into the forward end to a fully radiused plated structure, or in some cases a cylindrical shape plated into the forward end. The effectiveness of the arrangement is the subject of much discussion but improved buoyancy forward is provided which will reduce the pitching of the ship.
The construction shown in Figure 5.26 consists of a vertical plate web which stiffens the free edge of the breasthooks fitted right forward in the bulb. Deep frames with panting beams are fitted at every frame space with a wash bulkhead on the centreline. The panting stringers consist of perforated plates running the full width and length of the bulb. Another vertical plate web joins the bulb to the fore end structure. A small stem casting connects the top of the bulb to the plate stem above the load waterline. The numerous manholes cut into the structure permit access to all parts of the bulb. The anchor and cable arrangements must ensure that the bulb is not fouled during any part of the operation.

Figure 5.26 Bulbous bow construction

Anchors and cables

The forecastle deck houses the windlass or windlasses which raise and lower the anchor and cable. Various items of mooring equipment, such as bollards, fairleads, etc., are also arranged around the deck edge. The anchors are housed against the forward side shell, sometimes in specially recessed pockets. The anchor cable passes through the shell via the hawse pipe on to the forecastle deck. It travels over the cable stopper and on to the windlass cable lifter drum. From the cable lifter it drops vertically down into the chain locker below.


Hawse pipe

The hawse pipe is fitted to enable a smooth run of the anchor cable to the windlass and to maintain the watertight integrity of the forecastle (Figure 5.27). It should be of ample size to pass the cable without snagging when raising or lowering the anchor. Construction is usually of thick plating which is attached to a doubling plate at the forecastle deck and a reinforced strake of plating at the side shell. A rubbing or chafing ring is also fitted at the outside shell. A sliding plate cover is shaped to fit over the cable and close the opening when the ship is at sea.



Cable stopper

The chain, cable or bow stopper is fitted on the forecastle deck in line with the run of the anchor cable. It is used to hold the anchor cable in place while the ship is riding at anchor or the anchor is fully housed. In this way the windlass is freed and isolated from any shocks or vibration from the cable. The chain stopper is not designed to stop the moving cable, but only hold it in place. One type is shown in Figure 5.28 and consists of a fabricate structure of heavy plate with a roller which the cable passes over. A hinged bar is designed to fall between two vertical links and hold the cable in place. The chain stopper is welded or bolted on to a heavy insert plate in the deck and is additionally stiffened by brackets.


Windlass

The windlass is the lifting device for the anchor cables or chains and is also         used for mooring and winching duties. Various drums or barrels can be 'clutched in’ to perform the different duties. For raising the anchor, the cable lifting drum is engaged.
This is a barrel with specially shaped 'snugs’, which the cable links fit into and pass round before dropping into the chain locker via the spurling pipe. The anchor cable is allowed to lower under its own weight with the lifting drum declutched, while the brake band around it is used to control the speed of descent.


Figure 5.27 Hawse pipe



Chain locker

The chain locker is normally fitted forward of the collision bulkhead. It is of dimensions adequate to house all the anchor cable and still leave a considerable empty space above. Two lockers or a centrally divided single locker will be fitted for the port and starboard anchor cables. The chain locker should be as low as practicable to reduce the height of the centre of gravity of the considerable mass of the cables. A perforated false floor or grating is fitted at the bottom to provide a drainage well and keep the cable out of mud and water.
Figure 5.29 shows an arrangement of a chain locker. It consists of a plate structure with vertical stiffeners around the outside. Plate webs which form part of the ship's internal structure are also utilised for stiffening. A raised perforated false floor is fitted and supported by solid floors. The well thus formed is connected to the bilge system and should be emptied every time the anchor is raised. The forecastle deck forms the top of the locker with the spurling pipe at the centre. The spurling pipe is manufactured of heavy plate with a solid round bar as a chaffing ring on the lower edge. Brackets radiate from the spurling pipe to the chain locker sides to strengthen the forecastle deck and the spurling pipe. A U-section plate welded to the side with footholes cut in provides access to the bottom of the chain locker from a watertight door at the upper deck. Provision is also made for securing the final link of the anchor cable. The chain locker illustrated is one of a pair fitted port and starboard beneath their respective windlasses.


Figure 5.29 Chain locker

Clench cable assembly

The final link of the anchor cable is secured to the ship's structure by a clench pin. On most modern ships this pin is positioned on the outside of the chain locker and can be released easily and quickly. A situation may arise where the safety of the ship does not allow time to raise the anchor. By releasing the clench pin all the cable can quickly pass out of the chain locker, leaving the ship free to proceed out of danger. An arrangement is shown in Figure 5.30, where an insert heavy plate pocket is fitted into the chain locker side with a vertical pin holding the final link of anchor cable. A hand-wheel assembly on deck is used to raise the pin and release the link.




Figure 5.30 Cable clench arrangement

Thrusters

A thruster is usually considered to be a device which assists in docking, manoeuvring, or positioning of a vessel which is moving at a low speed. Some form of propeller-type device is used to move water either freely or in a duct. The propeller may be fixed or controllable pitch and the complete unit may be retractable or exposed, fixed in position or able to rotate (azimuth).
Probably the most common unit fitted on merchant vessels is the tunnel thruster using either a fixed pitch or a controllable pitch propeller. The fixed pitch unit would require a reversible drive. A controllable pitch type thruster is shown in Figure 5.31. A non-rotating servo motor located in the gear housing is used to change the pitch of the propeller blades. The force on the servomotor piston is transmitted by a piston rod inside the propeller shaft to the crosshead and crank mechanism in the hub. Water flow can thus be provided in either direction simply by changing the blade pitch angle. Any non-reversing prime mover can therefore be used, e.g. a single speed electric motor. The prime mover need not be stopped during manoeuvring operations since the blades can be placed at zero pitch when no thrust is desired. The drive is obtained through a flexible drive shaft, couplings and bevel gears. Special seals prevent any sea water leakage into the unit.
The complete assembly includes part of the athwartships tunnel through which water is directed to provide the thrust. Grids must be fitted at either end of the tunnel and this can reduce the thrust to some extent. The actual tunnel location is usually decided by model tests to ensure the minimum resistance when not in use. A tunnel construction arrangement is shown in Figure 5.32.
Gill jet thrusters utilise a vertical axis propeller in a T-shaped tunnel. Water is drawn in from both sides and leaves through the bottom of the hull. Rotatable gill fins direct the water in one of a number of fixed positions around a circle. The hydrojet thruster has a similar arrangement but draws water in from below and discharges it at the sides with vanes directing the thrust. Steering vanes in the diverging liquid path can also be used to maximise the thrust to one side or the other. Ducted jet thrusters operate somewhat similarly to a tunnel thruster except that the duct is usually curved. This duct may be located either on the ship’s side or the bottom shell and usually requires large openings.
An azimuth or rotating thruster usually consists of a dueled propeller which can rotate through 360°. The propeller may be fixed or controllable pitch. This unit is particularly suited for dynamic positioning and some propulsion duties. When fitted to ships, an azimuth thruster is usually retractable.


1. Tunnel section
2. Motor mounting stool
3. lnput drive shaft
4. Input drive shaft cartridge
5. Propeller shaft seal
6. Propeller blade
7. Blade palm seal
8. Hub body
9. Crank pin ring
10. Crosshead bearing housing
11. Taper roller thrust bearing
12. Crosshead
13. Propeller shaft
14. Propeller shaft thrust bearing
15. SpiraI bevel wheel
16. Pinon rod
17. Servo motor piston
18. Servo motor cylinder head
19. Feed back linkage
20. Servo motor cylinder
21. Servo motor end collar
22. Spiral bevel pinion
23. Drive shaft taper roller bearing
24. Gear housing

Figure 5.31 Tunnel thruster unit

Figure 5.32 Bow thruster tunnel

SECTION E AFT END CONSTRUCTION

The aft end of a ship terminates the structure and is designed to provide a smooth water flow into and away from the propeller. The propeller and rudder are also positioned and supported at the after end and require certain structural arrangements in order to operate satisfactorily. The after end construction involves an amount of overhanging structure to accept the steering gear below deck and mooring equipment higher up on the weather deck. This arrangement leads to large slamming forces in this after region, and an adequately stiffened structure is therefore required.
Two major types of stem construction have been used to date - the cruiser stern and the transom stern. The cruiser stern is rarely used in modern construction but it is still to be seen in a large proportion of the ships at sea. The transom stern, with its straight-line form, lends itself well to current manufacturing techniques. It also provides a greater deck area aft and as currently much used for a variety of ship types.


Cruiser stern
The construction of the cruiser stern (Figure 5.33) ensures adequate resistance to any pounding stresses which may occur. Solid plate floors are fitted at every frame space and a heavy centreline girder is fitted below each of the decks in the stern. A centreline web as a continuation of the centreline girder is fitted at the after end shell plating and runs down to the centreline girder in the flooring region. Special frames are radiused around the after end and are known as ‘cant frames', since they are set at an angle to the centreline of the ship. These cant frames join cant beams which support the deck at the radiused after end. Horizontal stringers may also be fitted to stiffen up the structure by connecting it to the transverse frames further forward.

Figure 5.33 Cruiser stern


Transom stern

Deep solid-plate floors are also a feature of the transom stem construction, together with a centreline girder (Figure 5.34). The flat plate of the transom stem construction, however, allows use of vertical stiffeners around the shell plating. The vertical stiffeners are bracketed to the floor and to the deck beams which run transversely across the stem. A deep horizontal stringer can provide additional stiffening to the shell plating if required. A deep centre girder runs beneath each of the deck at the stern and is bracketed to the deep web at the centreline of the after shell plating. This web is likewise bracketed to the various floors in the stern and finally to the solid-plate floor construction below.


Figure 5.34 Transom stern


Rudder trunk

The rudder trunk is an open section which is left in the stern for the entry of the rudder stock into the steering flat (Figure 5.34). A horizontal platform is some times fitted midway up the trunk to fit a watertight gland. The trunking above is then constructed to be watertight and access to the upper section and the gland is provided by a manhole.


Sternframe

The shell plating at the after end is terminated by the sternframe (Figure 5.34). This is usually a casting, but fabrications and forgings are sometimes used. In single-screw ships the sternframe has a boss on the centreline for the tailshaft to pass through and an adequate aperture is provided for the propeller to operate in. If sufficient clearance at the blade tips were not allowed then serious vibrations would be set up in the after end of the ship. The lower part of the sternframe may provide a support for the rudder post or an overhanging section may provide gudgeons for the rudder pintles. Figure 5.34, 5.41 and 5.42 show different arrangements. Various sections of the sternframe, particularly above the arch, provide connecting points to the individual floors of the after end construction. The transom post and vibration post are two particular connections (Figure 5.34). Sound connections at these points ensure that propeller-induced vibrations are kept to a minimum. Twin-screw ships have a sternframe which is only required to support the rudder pintles and is thus much reduced in size. Larger sternframe, particularly those of cast construction, are manufactured in two parts with provision made for bolting together and, after careful alignment, welding at the suitably prepared joint.


Figure 5.35 Cast spectacle frame


A-brackets and bossings

Twin-screw vessels with their shafts set away from the centreline require support for the shaft overhang as it leaves the shell. Bossings are often used to increase the vessel's width and allow the shafts to remain within the hull while still retaining a streamlined flow of water to the propellers. The shafting is protected and internal inspection is possible with this arrangement. These bossings are symmetrical about the ship's centreline and give rise to the term 'spectacle frame' because of their appearance from aft of the vessel (Figure 5.35). Some modern constructions make use of A-brackets set out from the hull to support the shafts (Figure 5.36). The final A-bracket in addition to acting as a bearing, must support the weight of the propeller.
Both bossings and A-frames are led into the stern and solidly built into the structure with additional local stiffening where required.

Figure 5.36 A-Bracket


Stern tubes

The propeller shaft enters the ship through the stern tube which acts as the final bearing and a watertight seal to the sea. Traditional practice saw the use of lignum vitae and certain synthetic materials as bearing surfaces within the stern tube and these were lubricated by sea water. The increased loadings, as a result of slow speed shafts and heavier propellers on more modern ships, has led to the widespread use of oil-lubricated whitemetal bearings. With this arrangement wear down in service is much reduced but there is a need for more accurate alignment and for seals at each end of the stern tube. An oil-lubricated stern tube arrangement is shown in Figure 5.37. Additional details are given in Marine Auxiliary Machinery by D. W. Smith (6th edition, Butterworths Marine Engineering Series, 1983).


Propellers

A propeller consists of a boss which has several helicoidal form blades. When rotated it 'screws' or thrusts its way through the water by giving momentum to the column of water passing through it. The thrust is transmitted along the shafting to the thrust block and finally to the ship's structure. The thrust block must therefore have a rigid seating or framework which is integrated into the ship's structure to absorb the thrust. The propeller will usually be either of the fixed pitch or controllable pitch type. ln addition some special designs and arrange men is are in use which offer particular advantages.

Fixed pitch propeller

Although described as fixed pitch, a solid single-piece cast propeller has a pitch which varies with increasing radius from the boss. The pitch at any particular point on a blade is however fixed and an average value for the complete propeller is used in all calculations. A fixed pitch propeller is shown in Figure 5.38, where most of the terms used in describing the geometrical features are also given. It should be noted that the face is the surface farthest from the stem and is the 'working' surface. A cone is fitted to the boss to provide a smooth flow of water away from the propeller. A propeller which rotates clockwise, when viewed from aft, is considered to be right-handed. Most single-screw ships have right-handed propellers. A twin-screw ship will usually have a right-handed starboard propeller and a left-handed port propeller.

Figure 5.38 Fixed pitch propeller

Cavitation is the forming and bursting of vapour filled cavities or bubbles and occurs as a result of certain pressure variations on the back of a propeller blade. The results of this phenomenon are a loss of thrust, erosion of the blade surface, vibrations in the afterbody of the ship and noise. It is usually limited to high speed, heavily loaded propellers and is not a problem under normal operating conditions with a well-designed propeller.
The propeller, when turning in the ship's wake, is a. potential source of vibration excitation. To some extent this can be minimised by having the leading edges skewed back. Skew back is an advantage when the propeller is working in a varying wake as not all the blade is affected at the same time. Variations in the thrust and torque are therefore smoothed out. Since the vibrations are blade excited, then the number of blades is significant and determines the vibration frequency. Where severe vibration problems exist it may ultimately be necessary to change the propeller for one with a different number of blades.

Propeller mounting

The propeller is fitted onto a taper on the tailshaft and a key may be inserted between the two; alternatively a keyless arrangement may be used. A large nut is fastened and locked in place on the end of the tailshaft. A cone is then bolted over the end of the tailshaft to provide a smooth flow of water from the propeller.
One method of keyless propeller fitting is the oil injection system. The propeller bore is machined with a series of axial and circumferential grooves. High pressure oil is injected between the tapered section of the tailshaft and the propeller. This reduces the friction between the two parts and the propeller is pushed up the shaft taper by a hydraulic jacking ring. Once the propeller is positioned, the oil pressure is released and the oil runs back leaving the shaft and propeller securely fastened together.
The Pilgrim Nut is a patented device which provides a predetermined frictional grip between the propeller and its shaft. With this arrangement the engine torque may be transmitted without loading the key (where fitted). The Pilgrim Nut is, in effect, a threaded hydraulic jack which is screwed onto the tailshaft, see Figure 5.39. A steel ring receives thrust from a hydraulically pressurised nitrile rubber tyre. This thrust is applied to the propeller to force it onto the tapered tailshaft. Propeller removal is achieved by reversing the Pilgrim Nut and using a withdrawal plate which is fastened to the propeller boss by studs. When the tyre is pressurised the propeller is drawn off the taper. Assembly and withdrawal are shown in Figure 5.38.

Figure 5.39 Pilgrim nut operation.

ControlIable pitch propellers

A controllable-pitch propeller is made up of a boss with separate blades mounted into it. An internal mechanism enables the blades to be moved simultaneously through an arc to change the pitch angle and therefore the pitch. A typical arrangement is shown in Figure 5.40.
When a pitch demand signal is received, a spool valve is operated which controls the supply of low pressure oil to the auxiliary servo-motor. This moves the sliding thrust block assembly to position the valve rod which extends into the propeller hub. The valve rod admits high pressure oil into one side or the other of the main servo-motor cylinder. The cylinder movement is transferred by a crankpin and ring to the propeller blades. The propeller blades rotate together until the feed-back signal balances the demand signal and the low pressure oil to the auxiliary servo-motor is cut off. To enable emergency control of propeller pitch in the event of loss of power, the spool valves can be operated by hand. The oil pumps are shaft driven.

The control mechanism, which is usually hydraulic, passes through the tail shaft and operation is from the bridge. Varying the pitch will vary the thrust provided and since a zero pitch position exists the engine shaft may turn continuously. The blades may rotate to provide astern thrust and therefore the engine does not require to be reserved.

Special types

A number of specialised arrangements or types of propellers exist and have particular advantages or applications. The Voith-Schneider propeller, the Tip Vortex Free propeller and the use of a duct or nozzle are described here.
The Voith-Schneider propeller is a vertically-rotating device. The blades are vertically positioned around a disc and can be rotated by cams in order to change the blade angle at a particular point in each revolution. This results in a thrust whose magnitude and direction is determined by the cams. This, therefore, in some respects similar to a controllable-pitch propeller in that the disc is driven and the blades can be positioned independently of the main drive. This unit can effectively thrust in any direction and will respond rapidly to the pitch control mechanism. The complete assembly is unfortunately complex, noisy in operation and considerable maintenance is necessary. It is often used for main propulsion in ferries and vessels requiring considerable manoeuvrability. It may also be used as a thruster or propulsion device for drill ships or floating cranes which require accurate positioning.
The use of a duct or nozzle around the propeller can result in an improvement of the propeller performance. Furthermore the aerofoil shape of the duct can produce a forward thrust which will offset any drag it creates. The duct also protects the propeller from damage and reduces noise. It is usually fitted on ships with heavily loaded propellers, e.g. tugs, and has been used on larger vessels. One particular patented design of duct is known as the Kort Nozzle.
The Tip Vortex Free (TVF) propeller is a recent special design which results in much improved propeller efficiency. The blade tips are fitted with pieces at right angles to the plane of rotation. The initial impression is that the blade edges have been bent over towards the face. i.e. away from the ship. The attachments at the blade tips serve to generate thrust across the whole propeller blade and thus improve the propeller efficiency. A nozzle surrounds the propeller and a tunnel structure under the stern on either side is used to direct the incoming flow of water.


Rudders

The rudder is used to steer the ship. The turning action is largely dependent on the area of the rudder, which is usually of the order of one-sixtieth to one-seventieth of the length X depth of the ship. The ratio of the depth to width of a rudder is known as the aspect ratio and is usually in the region of 2.
Streamlined rudder of a double-plate construction are fitted to all modern ships and are further described by the arrangement about their axis. A rudder with all of its area aft of the turning axis is known as 'unbalanced' (Figure 5.41). A rudder with a small part of its area forward of the turning axis is known as 'semi-balanced' (Figure 5.42). When in more than 25% of the rudder area is forward of the turning axis. There is no torque on the rudder stock at certain angles and such an arrangement is therefore known as a 'balanced rudder' (Figure 5.34).
The construction of modern rudders is of steel plate sides welded to an internal webbed framework. Integral with the internal framework may be heavy forgings which form the gudgeons or bearing housings of the rudder. The upper face of the rudder is formed into a usually horizontal flat palm which acts as the coupling point for the rudder stock. A lifting hole is provided in the rudder to enable a vertical in-line lift of the rudder when it is being fitted or removed. A special lifting bar with eye plates is used to lift the rudder. On the unbalanced and semi-balanced rudders shown in Figures 5.41 and 5.42 can be seen a fashion or eddy plate at the forward edge. This is welded in place after the rudder is fitted to provide a streamlined water flow into the rudder. After manufacture, every rudder is air tested to a pressure equivalent to a head of 2.45m above the top of the rudder to ensure its watertight integrity. The internal surfaces are usually coated with bitumen or some similar coating to protect the metal should be plating leak. A drain hole is provided at the bottom of the rudder to check or water entry when the ship is examined in drydock.

Rudder pintles and bearings

The rudder, depending on its type and arrangement, will turn on either pintles or bearings.
The balanced rudder in Figure 5.34 has rudder axle fitted at its turning axis. Upper and lower bearings are fitted in the rudder, as shown in Figure 5.43. The bearing consists of a stainless steel bush in the rudder and a stainless steel liner on the axle. The stainless steel bush is spirally grooved to permit lubrication. Other materials arc in use, such as gunmetal for the liner and lignum vitae or tufnol for the bush. The upper and lower pair of tapered bearing rings are fitted between the rudder and the stern frame. These are fitted with a small clearance but may support the weight of the rudder should the carrier fail.
The semi-balanced rudder shown in Figure 5.42 turns on pintles. Arrangements vary but the pintle consists of a bearing length of constant diameter and a tapered length which is drawn into a similarly tapered hole on the rudder or tern frame gudgeon. The pintle is drawn in by a large nut pulling on the breaded portion of the pintle. The pintle nut is securely locked in place after tightening. A locking pintle has a shoulder of increased diameter at its lower end which prevents excessive lift of the rudder. A bearing or heel pintle has a bearing surface at its lower edge which rests on a hard steel disc. This bearing pintle is only required to support the weight of the rudder in the event of the rudder carrier failing. Both types of pintle are shown in Figure 5.41. Liners of brass or sometimes stainless steel are fitted to the pintle hearing surface. The bearing material is held in a cage in the gudeon and is usually tufnol or some hard-wearing synthetic material. Lubrication is provided by sea water which is free to circulate around the bearing surfaces of both pintles.

Figure 5.41 Unbalanced rudder


Rudder stock and carrier

The stock passes through a gland and a rudder carrier before entering the steering compartment. The gland and carrier may be combined or separate items of equipment.

Figure 5.42 Semi-balanced rudder

Figure 5.43 Axle-bearing arrangement: (a) upper bearing arrangement; (b) lower bearing arrangement

Figure 5.44 Rudder carrier

The rudder carrier consists of two halves which provide an upper and a lower bearing surface (Figure 5.44). The upper part of the rudder carrier is keyed to the stock so that they turn together. The major part of the rudder's weight is transferred to the rudder carrier by either a shoulder, as part of the stock forging, or a collar filled between the tiller and the carrier. The rudder weight is thus transferred to the lower bearing surface of the carrier which is grease lubricated. A flat or conical bearing surface may be used depending on the particular design. The lower half of the carrier is bolted into a heavy insert plate in the deck of the steering flat and is chocked against fore and aft and athwartships movement.
A separate watertight gland is often fitted where the stock enters the rudder trunk. This arrangement provides access to a greater length of the rudder stock, removes the need for a watertight construction of the carrier bearing and reduces the unsupported length of the stock (Figure 5.45). A combined type of watertight gland and rudder carrier is shown in Figure 5.46. It is essential for ease of operation of the rudder that the pintles and rudder stock turning axes are in the same vertical line. Great care must be taken during installation to ensure this correct alignment.

Figure 5.45 Watertight gland for rudder stock

Figure 5.46 Combined rudder carrier and gland


SECTION F        SUPERSTRUCTURES AND ACCOMMODATION

The superstructure is that part of the ship's structure built above the uppermost complete deck and is the full width of the ship. Deckhouses are smaller structures not extending the full width and one or more storeys high. They may be built on to the superstructure or at the base of masts, etc. The construction of superstructures and deckhouses uses frames, plating, girders and brackets in a similar manner to the hull but of smaller scantlings. However. superstructures extending 15% of the ship's length are considered to contribute to the longitudinal strength of the ship. As such. they must have equivalent scantlings and strength to the main hull.
The most forward section of the superstructure is known as the 'forecastle'. Any section of the superstructure around the midships region of the ship is referred to as a 'bridge structure'. The deck area aft is known as the 'poop' and any superstructure located aft is likewise known. A raised quarter deck is a weather deck extending for some portion of the ship's length from aft and is positioned above the upper deck.
Most modern ships have most of the superstructure and accommodation situated aft above the machinery space. The superstructure and deckhouses usually total four or five storeys. The major part in this space, except for that lost to the machinery casing, is used for crew accommodation.



Forecastle

All ships must be fitted with a forecastle or an arrangement to provide a minimum bow height, as defined in classification society rules. It is usual to fit forecastles, and where this is done they must extend from the stem a distance 0.07 L aft (Where L is the freeboard length). The side plating of the forecastle, being a continuation of the shell plating, is thicker than the end plating. Adequate arrangements for stiffening of the forecastle plating must be provided.

Bridge Structure
Where a bridge structure exceeds 15% of the ship’s length, the side plating thickness must be increased by 25% above that of other superstructures. A heavily plated bridge front is required with the after end plating somewhat lighter. Stiffener scantlings will likewise be increased at the forward end and reduced at after end. Web frames or partial bulkheads must be fitted to support structure above, particularly at the corners of deckhouses above. House tops or decks in way of davits must be strengthened and supported from below.


Poop structure

The poop front must be adequately plated and stiffened as for the bridge front. The internal stiffening will include webs and partial bulkheads as required, particularly where deckhouses are located above. The after end of the poop, being exposed, requires a more substantial construction than that of the aft ends of other structures.


Raised quarter deck

The raised quarter deck results in a greater depth of ship over its length. Increased scantlings must therefore be provided for the frames, shell, deck plating and beams. Structures may be built on to the raised quarter deck as already described.


Discontinuities

The ends of superstructures represent major discontinuities in the structure of the ship. Longer structures such as bridges and forecastles require considerable strengthening at the ends. Classification society rules require the upper deck sheerstrake thickness to be increased by 20%, except where the structure does not extend to the side shell. Deck plating at superstructure ends is also increased in thickness. Side plating forming part of The superstructure is well radiused at the ends towards the side shell (Figure 5.47).


Watertight opening and doors

Where doors are fitted into structures above the freeboard deck they must be of adequate strength and able to maintain the watertight integrity of the structure. The openings have radiused corners to reduce the stress effects of the discontinuity. A substantial framing is also fitted or additional stiffening to retain the strength of the structure. Doors fitted to the openings are of steel suitably stiffened, with a rubber gasket fitted to effect watertightness. The doors have securing clips or 'dogs' which can be operated from either side. The dogs fasten on wedges which pull the frame edge into the gasket, sealing the door shut. Details of the door construction and closing arrangements are shown in Figures 5.48-5.50.

Figure 5.47 Discontinuities: (a) forecastle deck plating break: (b) poop deck plating break

Figure 5.48 Door clamps: (a) gastight door clamp;(b) weathertight door clamp

Figure 5.49 Door hinges: (a) weathertight hinge;(b) gastight hinge

Figure 5.50 Steel doors

Accommodation

The superstructure will comprise several storeys of cabins, public rooms, offices, navigation areas and machinery rooms. A typical arrangement of cabins and rooms is shown in Figure 5.51. Stiffened steel bulkheads are used to support the structure above and provide subdivision for fire containment (see Chapter 10). Intermediate partitions are used to create individual cabins. Plastic laminates either side of a fire-resisting material core are used for the partitions. They are set into U-section light-plate channels at the deck and the ceilings. as shown in Figure 5.52(a) and (b). Ceiling panels are fitted on to wood grounds or battens between the partitions. Typical floor coverings comprise a bituminous coating with vinyl tiles fitted to provide an easily cleaned hardwearing surface.

Figure 5.51 Accommodation arrangement

Figure 5.52(a) Partition construction - head and foot details

Figure 5.52(b) Partition construction - deckhead beams

Figure 5.53 Crew cabin

Coaming strips are fitted at the edges to complete the arrangement. The cabins are provided with various arrangements of built-in furniture and fittings for crew comfort, as shown in Figure 5.53.

主要结构项目

A节        龙骨和底部结构
船底外板结构由船的中央龙骨、肋板结构和舷侧外板组成。除了油轮之外,几乎所有今天建造的船都装有双层底。这是一种安装在外板以上约1米处的内底板,由肋板结构支撑。

龙骨
龙骨沿着船底板的中心线延伸,并且对于大多数商船来说是平板结构。与平板龙骨成直角,沿着船的中心线从艏尖舱延伸到艉尖舱舱壁,是一个水密纵向隔板,称为中底纵桁或垂直龙骨。如果采用双层船底结构,舱顶板的中线列板会形成工字型龙骨(图5.1)。这为结构提供了相当大的强度和抗曲性。出于强度目的并考虑腐蚀裕量,平板龙骨或“中线列板”会增加一定的厚度,因为在船舶寿命期间很难维护靠近船墩的油漆保护。
一些双层底沿中心线安装有管道龙骨。这是水密结构的内部通道,沿船舶长度延伸一段距离,通常从艏尖舱到机舱前舱壁。利用这条通道将管道沿着船的长度运送到各种货舱或液舱。通常通过水密人孔在机舱的前端提供入口。机舱或机舱后部不需要管道龙骨,因为管道工程将在机舱双层底上方和沿着安装有管道的轴隧延伸。
管道龙骨的结构采用两根纵桁,间距不超过2.0 m。这种限制是为了确保当船在干船坞中时,纵桁靠在靠船墩上。在船体外板和船底板上每隔一个肋位交替安装加强筋,并用肘板支撑在纵桁上(图5.2)。龙骨板和管道龙骨上方的液舱顶部必须加大尺寸,以补偿横向底板强度的降低。
中底纵桁        双层底顶板的中心线列板
实肋板

纵向加强筋 扁钢
龙骨板
图5.1平板龙骨


图5.2管道龙骨

双层底结构
在安装双层底或内底板的地方,它是水密的,直至舭部,因此,如果外板在双层底处被刺穿,则双层底提供完全的水密完整性。最小深度由船舶尺寸的规则要求决定,但实际深度有时会增加,以适应双层底舱的容量。双层底可具有通向舭部圆角板的倾斜边缘或延伸至侧外板的连续双层底。倾斜边缘结构要求使用边缘板与舷侧肋骨连接,并提供一个收集舱底水的湾或井(图5.3)。在连续液舱顶部或平坦边缘必须安装舱底水收集点或排水“帽”(图5.4)。平边缘通过折边肘板连接到舷侧肋骨上。平边缘式结构在现代建筑中被广泛使用。
该结构由垂直肋板组成,这些肋板可以是水密的、实的或框架结构的。肋板结构从中底纵桁到侧外板是连续的,并支撑内底板。边底纵桁沿纵向安装,其数量取决于船的宽度。这些边底纵桁在肋板的两侧断开,因此被称为肋间纵桁。
水密或油密肋板安装在主舱壁下方,也用于将双层底空间细分为各种液体的舱。非水密结构的实肋板,通常由检修孔减轻重量,根据需要布置在其他地方以加固结构。在实肋板之间,安装框架肋板。框架肋板由连接到中底纵桁和舷侧外板的平板肘板组成,在它们之间布置球扁钢加强筋。加强筋由间隔的角钢支柱和结构中存在的任何边纵桁支撑。
肋板的布置将由所采用的骨架系统类型决定,可以是横向的,也可以是纵向的。

图5.3纵向骨架双层底a) 框架肋板;(b)实肋板

图5.4横骨架双层底a) 框架肋板;(b)实肋板

横向骨架双层底
横向骨架的双层底结构由实肋板和带横向框架的肘板肋板组成。框架肋板安装在间距很大的实肋板之间。它由加强外板和内底板的横向球角钢组成。垂直支撑由在舷侧外板处的肘板和中底纵桁、任何边底纵桁和中间支柱提供。安装的肋间边底纵桁的数量由船级社规范决定。图5.4显示了横向骨架船的实肋板和框架肋板。

纵向骨架双层底
这是试验结果中最受欢迎的系统,它对长度为120米或更长的船舶提供了足够的抗变形能力。球扁钢用作船体外板和内底板上的纵向加强板,间距约为1米。实肋板在横向舱壁处提供支撑,沿船舶长度的间距不超过3.8米。位于实肋板之间的中间肋位,肘板安装在中底纵桁和舷侧外板处。这些肘板在自由边缘处带有折边,并延伸至第一根纵骨。在实肋板间距较大的地方,提供槽钢或角钢支柱,以在不超过2.5米的间隔内提供支撑。再次安装肋间边底纵桁,其数量取决于船级社规范。图5.3显示了纵向骨架船的实肋板和框架肋板。

机舱双层底
无论骨架系统如何,机舱内的双层底结构在主机下方的每个肋位都有实平板肋板。根据需要,在主机座外侧安装额外的边底纵桁。通常增加双层底的高度,以提供合适容量的燃油、润滑油和淡水舱。轴对准也需要增加双底高度或升高底座,通常采用前一种方法。通过将舱顶部高度和内部结构逐渐倾斜至所需位置,确保并保持强度的连续性。主机、锅炉等需要额外的支撑和加强,以提供能够支撑集中载荷的抗振实平台。在低速柴油机船上,主机底板处的舱顶板厚度增加到40毫米左右。这是通过使用一个特殊的插板来实现的,插板的长度等于主机的长度,包括推力块的尺寸(图5.5)。根据需要,额外的重型桁材也安装在这块板下方和重型机器下方的其他位置。机舱内的板和桁材的尺寸增加了10%。
重平扁钢加强筋        排水布置        连续的中底纵桁 边底纵桁 重板底座 边底纵桁 扁钢

柴油舱        隔离空舱        润滑油排泄舱        隔离空舱        柴油舱
图5.5机舱双层底

双层底舱
进入双层底舱通常通过舱顶部的人孔。这些检修孔经过适当连接和螺栓固定,在不使用时完全防水。放水塞安装在所有双层底舱中,是彻底排空这些舱以便在干船坞中进行检查的一种方式(图5.6)。所有双层底舱都装有空气管,以便在加注时释放空气。还安装了测深管,以便能够对舱进行测深并确定其容量。所有双层底液舱在完工时都通过最大工作水压头或等效的气密试验进行测试。

图5.6放水塞和基座

抗砰击结构
撞击或砰击是由船的起伏或颠簸引起的,因此导致前部区域“砰”地落到水中。从艏柱往船尾长度为船长的25-30%必须提供额外的结构强度。根据船舶的最小吃水深度,龙骨两侧的外板厚度增加。肋骨间距减小,安装全高和半高肋间边底纵桁,并在每个肋骨间距安装实肋板。采用纵向骨架时,纵向间距减小,安装肋间边底纵桁,横向肋板安装在交替的骨架上。

单底结构
特别是在油轮和一些较小的船中,采用单底结构。油轮底部结构详见第8章。在较小的船上,单层船底的结构类似于双层船底结构,但没有内底板。因此,所有平板肋板的上边缘都必须加强,以提高其刚度。

B节外板、骨架系统和甲板

船外板
船舷板和船底板构成了船的防水外壳。船外板也对船体结构的纵向强度做出了最大的贡献。由于其巨大的面积,外板由许多沿前后方向排列并焊接在一起的列板或板组成。水平焊缝称为“接缝”,垂直焊缝称为“对接”。几块板通常连在一起作为一个单元的一部分。图3.2示出了按单元展开的外板。船外板的厚度很大程度上取决于船长和肋骨间距。最终结构必须能够承受船体上的许多动态和静态载荷,如第2章所述。船外板厚度向船端逐渐变薄是正常的,因为该区域的弯矩减小了。
最靠近甲板的舷侧板被称为“舷顶列板”。增加舷顶列板的厚度或使用高强度钢。这是因为板的这一部分离中性轴最远,承受最大的弯曲应力,如第二章所讨论的。船舷上缘与甲板接触的区域称为舷缘。在这个区域使用了两种特殊的布置,如图5.7所示。采用圆形舷缘布置时,不允许在舷侧板上进行焊接,因为高应力会导致从角焊缝的“趾部”发出裂纹。这种焊接降低了部件的抗裂性。如果这种结构是对焊的,焊接必须融合到母板中。在船的两端,随着横截面的减小,各种舷顶列板的宽度会逐渐变窄。在这些板的宽度变小的地方,安装一个盗板(两块板合并成一块板)或列板(图5.8)。

图5.7舷缘布置

图5.8盗列板布置

外板中的所有开口必须具有圆形边缘,以避免应力集中,并且通常具有某种形式的补偿,以避免强度不连续。


图5.9骨架系统a)横向骨架;(b)纵向骨架;(c)组合骨架
骨架系统
船底板和舷侧板是带肋骨的,即沿其长度方向加强,以抵抗海水的压力。使用两种不同类型的骨架,或者两者结合使用。这些分别称为横向、纵向和组合骨架,如图5.9所示。货物布置可能会影响骨架系统的选择,但一般来说,纵向强度是决定性因素。

横向骨架
船外板的横向骨架由垂直加强筋组成,包括球扁钢或深折边强肋骨,通过肘板连接到甲板横梁和肋板结构上。肋骨的尺寸在某种程度上取决于它们的深度,也取决于它们端部连接的性质。特殊位置,如舱口末端,需要加大尺寸的肋骨。非常深的强肋骨通常安装在机舱中。
肋骨间距通常不超过1000 mm,但在砰击区域和艏艉尖舱区域总是减小。

纵向骨架
舷侧外板的纵向骨架采用水平球扁钢,朝向较低的舷侧外板增加尺寸。横向腹板用于支撑纵向骨架,其间距取决于船型和纵向骨架的截面模量。这种结构在第8章中参照油轮结构进行了描述和说明。

舭龙骨
采用平板龙骨结构,对于抵抗船的横摇产生的阻力很小。在船的两侧沿着舭部圆角处安装舭龙骨,以抑制船的任何横摇趋势(图5.10)。在舭部圆角处的纵向强度也有所提高。舭龙骨必须布置成沿船体穿透水的边界层,但不要太深,以免有大的力作用在其上。
舭龙骨与舭部圆角板成直角安装,但不延伸超出最大宽度线。它在船的中部延伸,并在模型试验后定位,以确保船向前运动的阻力最小。其结构是自由边缘带有加强的钢板或型材,如球扁钢。采用了一种紧固到船体上的方式,该方式将在污染或碰撞的情况下断开舭龙骨而不损坏船体。由于舭部板位于船的高应力区域,所以舭龙骨的末端固定在船体外板的复板上。

冰区加强
劳氏船级社符号1*、1、2或3被分配给具有船级社规范所要求的额外加强的船舶。需要通过增加肋骨尺寸、减少肋骨间距和增加板厚来增加刚度。硬化的程度和性质从最高级别的1*依次降低到最低级别的3。可能还需要对尾柱和尾部区域进行一些修改。

图5.10舭龙骨a)显示端部布置的平面图;(b)穿过舭龙骨的截面

甲板
船的甲板是水平的平台,它完成了对船体的包围。它必须提供一个坚固的工作平台,能够支撑其上的任何负载,还必须为船体结构提供一个水密顶盖。具有各种形式的加强和板的甲板为船的强度提供了相当大的贡献。在甲板被舱口穿透的地方,必须为开口提供特殊的围板或环绕物。这些大开口需要特殊的补偿来抵消它们对船只结构强度的影响。

甲板板
甲板板由横跨其宽度的纵向板条组成。最靠近甲板边缘的板或列板被称为“纵材板”。它们的材料比剩余的甲板厚,因为它们形成了舷侧外板和甲板之间的重要连接。向船的两端,甲板板,像外板一样,厚度减少。
甲板上用于舱口、机舱棚、泵室入口等的大开口。需要补偿以保持材料的截面模量。因此,与这些开口并排的甲板厚度增加。货船舱口之间的板比甲板板的其余部分薄,对纵向强度贡献很小。
露天甲板的板面向船舷呈弧形,有助于排出落到甲板上的任何水。这种梁拱通常是船中部宽度的五十分之一。

甲板加固
甲板以由船的骨架系统确定的方式由下方结构支撑。对于纵向骨架,除了深腹板横骨之外,还使用了一系列紧密间隔的纵骨。对于横向骨架,在每个肋位布置横向甲板梁用。当在船上安装有舱口时,连续纵桁安装在船的整个长度上,沿着舱口布放。

甲板横梁和横骨
甲板梁安装在船的整个宽度上,并通过称为“梁弯头”的肘板连接到舷侧肋骨上。连续的纵桁安装在船上,沿着舱口延伸,横梁用肘板固定在纵桁上。这样就减少了无支撑的跨度。甲板梁通常是球扁钢。对于敞开的舱口空间的长度,横梁被断开并用肘板固定在纵桁或舱口侧围板上。在机舱棚处,横梁同样被断开,并用肘板固定在纵桁上。以这种方式断开的横梁被称为“半横梁”。
甲板横骨支撑纵向骨架甲板。这些是带面板或折边的厚腹板。它们通过梁弯头被支撑在舷侧肋骨上。小防倾肘板安装在交替的纵骨和横骨之间(图5.11)。

甲板纵桁
根据位置不同,甲板纵桁有多种形式。带有防倾肘板的折边纵桁通常用作舱口围板的一部分。这种折边纵桁被称为非对称纵桁,必须在交替的肋位安装防倾肘板。经常使用对称纵桁,特别是作为中纵桁。肘板将纵桁连接到甲板横梁上,每隔四个肋位安装一个肘板。在舱口拐角处,这些纵桁必须由支柱或横梁额外支撑。对称纵桁和非对称纵桁如图5.12所示。
纵桁和横梁的组合在现代船上被广泛使用。甲板纵桁在舱口外侧沿着船的全长尽可能远地延伸。根据船级社的要求,这种连续的纵向材料可以减少甲板厚度。
舱口间的甲板必须由纵骨或横梁支撑。在边纵桁连接横梁的地方,特别是舱口下方,安装(菱形)角撑板(图5.13和5.14)。

图5.11甲板横梁

图5.12甲板纵桁布置a)对称b)非对称

图5.13舱口角撑板。从下面看

图5.14机舱建筑中使用的角撑板板

图5.15安装在舱口角的插板

局部载荷
在甲板上,集中载荷所在或可能所在的地方,必须提供额外的加强。绞盘、起锚机等机器也需要底座,这将在第6章中详细讨论。此外,安装在深舱、燃料舱等中的任何横梁,必须增加构件尺寸,并可能还要减少跨度,以至少与边界舱壁的强度相等,

不连续处
如这里所讨论的,不连续处指的是板材的截面、厚度或数量的任何中断或变化。必须非常小心地补偿由门、舱口等引起的外板或甲板上的任何不连续处。在导致纵向材料损失的情况下,这种补偿尤为重要。在板材数量发生变化的地方,例如在舷墙处,这种变化应该是逐渐的,并且是圆角的。
必须使用圆角,有时在所有开口的拐角处安装复板或更厚的插板。任何尖角都会产生缺口,在受力后,缺口会导致裂纹。图5.15显示了安装在舱口拐角处的插板。

舱口围板
所有舱口开口的边缘都由舱口围板围起来。根据载重线规定,露天甲板上的围板最低高度必须为600毫米。这是为了减少水进入货舱的风险。内部围板,例如上层建筑或货舱内的围板,没有规定高度,尤其是中层甲板货舱通常与甲板齐平,以便不间断地装载货物。露天甲板围板的最小厚度必须为9 mm,当高度超过600 mm时,必须用水平加强板加固,垂直肘板的安装间距不得超过3 m。还必须提供一个边缘加强板,它可以是安装木制舱口盖的预制型材(见后面图7.1)或如图5.16所示的半圆钢筋。
作为纵桁的延伸部分,围板侧面的厚度大于围板端部的厚度,并用肘板延伸到的舱口开口之外(图5.16)。这些肘板也用于支撑舱口操作设备的平台。较小的垂直肘板安装在围板结构的其余部分,以加强它(图5.17)。


图5.16舱口围板a)舱口围板的立面图(钢舱口盖);(b)舱口围板(钢舱口盖)的平面图

5.17围板肘板

C节        舱壁和支柱

舱壁
布置在船舶结构中的垂直隔板称为舱壁。有三种基本类型,即水密舱壁、非水密舱壁和油密或液舱舱壁。油密舱壁或液舱舱壁在结构上是水密的,但比简单的水密舱壁经受更严格的测试。
横向水密舱壁将船舶细分为多个水密舱室,其数量由船级社规范规定。油密舱壁形成了用于运输液体货物或燃料的舱的边界。非水密舱壁是任何其他舱壁,如机舱棚、起居舱室或贮藏室。

水密舱壁
除了细分船舶,横向舱壁还提供了相当大的结构强度,作为甲板的支撑,并抵抗由舷侧波浪(倾侧)引起的变形。水密舱壁的间距,即船舶的水密分舱,由取决于船舶类型、大小等的规则所控制。所有船只必须具备:
(1)防撞舱壁或艏尖舱舱壁,其位置距离载重水线前端不小于船舶长度的0.05倍,亦不大于船舶长度的0.08倍。
(2)艉尖舱舱壁,将艉管及舵围阱围封在一个水密舱室内。
(3)机舱两端的舱壁;对于尾机舱,其后舱壁可以是艉尖舱壁。
根据船舶的长度安装额外的舱壁,例如,145至165米长的船舶,如果机舱在船中部必须有8个舱壁,如果机舱在船尾部必须有7个舱壁。
在提供额外结构补偿下,在批准情况下,允许安装少于标准数量的舱壁。水密舱壁必须延伸至干舷甲板,但可以上升至最高的连续甲板。艉尖舱舱壁可以只延伸到载重水线以上的下一层甲板,如果该层甲板之后结构直到船体外板完全水密。
水密分舱和舱壁间距的目的是提供一种布置,使在舱壁之间的一个舱室进水时,船舶的水线不会升至限界线之上。限界线是平行于舱壁甲板船舷处的上表面并在其下76毫米处划的线。客船的分舱受法定要求的管理,这些要求高于货船的船级社规范,但限制进水和避免沉没的目的是相同的。

图5.18 平水密舱壁(S.板缝)

水密舱壁的建造
水密舱壁由于面积大,是由几块列板制成的。它们焊接在外壳、甲板和舱顶上。板列是水平的,加强是垂直的。由于水舱中的水压随着深度的增加而增加,并且水密舱壁必须承受这样的载荷,舱壁朝向底部必须具有越来越大的强度。这是通过向底部增加水平板的厚度来实现的。防撞舱壁的板厚必须比其他水密舱壁厚12%。此外,艉管周围的尾尖舱壁板必须加倍或增加厚度以减少振动。舱壁由间距约为760 mm的垂直球扁钢或趾部焊接角钢加强筋加强。对于防撞舱壁和油密舱壁,该间距减小到610毫米。加强筋的末端用肘板固定在舱顶和甲板梁上。在载荷较小的中层甲板,加强筋可能没有端部连接。水密舱壁布置如图5.18所示。

槽形水密舱壁
在板中使用槽形或波形而不是焊接的加强筋,可以产生同样强度的结构,同时重量减轻。横向舱壁上的槽是垂直的,但纵向舱壁上的槽必须是水平的,以增加船舶的纵向强度。

图5.19槽形状水密舱壁a)穿过槽形的截面;(b)舱壁的立面图;(c)槽形的平面图

在制造完整的舱壁之前,在列板中制作槽形或波形。因此,列板垂直延伸,板必须厚度均匀,足以支撑舱壁底部的更大载荷。这种较大的板厚在一定程度上抵消了由于没有在舱壁上增加加强筋而节省的重量。连接到外板的槽形舱壁的边缘可以安装加强平板,以增加横向强度并简化舱壁与壳的装配。在带有垂直槽形的高舱壁上,横隔板横跨槽安装。这防止了槽形的任何可能的塌陷。图5.19显示了槽形隔板的布置。
水密底板安装在每个主横向舱壁正下方的双层底内。如果水密舱壁被穿透,例如被管道工程穿透,则必须通过完全焊接到管道和舱壁上的套环确保穿透周围的水密封闭。

水密舱壁的测试
主首尾尖舱舱壁必须以注水至载重水线的方式测试。分舱水密舱壁通过冲洗进行测试。油密舱壁和液舱舱壁必须以高出液舱最高点不少于2.45米的水头进行测试。

非水密舱壁
除用作主要分间和液舱界面的舱壁外,任何舱壁均可是非水密的。例如机舱棚舱壁、起居舱隔板、储藏室隔板等,安装在深舱或船首的制荡舱壁也是非水密舱壁的例子。如果非水密舱壁执行类似于支柱的支撑功能,则其加强筋必须足以承受所承载的负荷。在所有其他情况下,非水密舱壁通过球扁钢或仅用扁钢焊接在上面来加强。槽形和波形舱壁也可用于非水密舱壁。

支柱
支柱提供了一种在甲板之间转移载荷并在垂直方向上将结构紧固在一起的方法。在货舱或机器下面传递载荷的支柱大部分是受压的,很少或不需要周围结构的支撑。将结构连接在一起并承受拉力的柱子在顶部和根部有足够的肘板。
货舱支柱通常截面较大,数量较少,以将对货物装载的干扰减少到最低程度。提供支柱是为了减少对支撑舱口纵桁或端梁的重型腹板的需求。支柱的使用还能够减小舱口梁和横梁的尺寸,因为它们的无支撑跨度减小了。当支柱安装在多个垂直甲板之间时,它们应该一个在另一个下面排成一行,以有效地转移载荷。
保持支柱部分通常是由钢板制成中空预制形状。典型的截面是圆形、方形,有时是八边形。机舱支柱通常由型材制成,虽然尺寸比货舱支柱小,但安装的数量更多(图5.20)。必须在支柱的顶部和底部提供额外的结构材料,以均匀分布载荷。在头部使用一块板,通常带有连接周围结构的防倾肘板。在鞋跟处,使用了一个插板或复板,根据载荷类型有或没有肘板(图5.21)。
实支柱可安装在起居舱或集中装载点下方。安装直径约为100 mm的实圆棒,同样使用头板和踵板来分散负载。

图5.20机舱支柱布置a)向后看的剖面图;(b)向外看的立面图

图5.21管状支柱布置a)支柱头部连接;(b)柱脚连接

D节        艏端结构
船舶的艏端是指防撞舱壁之前的结构。艏端的设计是为了提供一个平稳的入水和一个沿着船的流线型水流。结果,运动的阻力减少到最小。艏柱是船的最前部,一直延伸到龙骨。它由两部分组成——一部分是从龙骨到载重水线的杆状艏柱,一部分是从载重水线到甲板的板状艏柱。板状艏柱通常向前倾斜,为船只提供舒适的线型,增加甲板面积,并在发生碰撞时提供易于溃缩的区域。船侧板向外展开,以进一步增加甲板面积。这种布置也用于在恶劣天气下偏转海水和让浪花远离船只。前甲板区或艏楼装有起锚和系泊所需的起锚机和绞车。锚链存放在艏楼下面的锚链舱中。可以安装球鼻艏,球鼻艏是吃水线以下的突出物,用于减少船的运动阻力。

艏柱
艏柱是艏外板的终点。它由一个从龙骨到载重水线的杆和一个到艏楼甲板的加强板结构组成(图5.22)。杆状艏柱是一根实圆钢,焊接在下端龙骨板的内侧。在它的上端,杆与板状艏柱连接。外板焊接在艏柱的两侧。
曲线板的艏柱板结构通过水平安装的小折边板(图5.23)的艏肘板间隔加固。在艏柱半径相当大的地方,可以安装连续的球形或扁平的加强筋。在艏柱板区域可以安装比普通外板更重的外板。

图5.22艏端结构

图5.23显示艏肘板的艏柱板剖面图

图5.24 首端横向剖面显示抗颤振(拍击)结构

图5.25        抗颤振纵材和横梁

颤振结构
(拍击)颤振是船外板的一种进出运动,这种运动是由于波浪沿船体通过以及船舶颠簸时水压的变化而产生的。在船的艏部区域需要特殊的结构布置来加强船的板以抵抗这种作用。从船头到船尾,船体结构必须加固15-20%的长度。这种加强由水平边纵材组成,称为“抗振纵材”,在最低甲板下间隔约2米安装。抗振横梁安装在船上交替的肋位,并用肘板连接在抗振纵材上。中间的肋骨通过肘板连接到抗振纵材上(图5.24和5.25)。在中心线上安装一个局部制荡舱壁或一系列支柱,以进一步支撑结构。可以安装穿孔扁钢代替横梁,但它们之间的距离不得超过2.5米。为了降低扁钢上的水压,至少需要10%的板面积的穿孔。

球鼻艏
安装球鼻艏是为了减少船的阻力。布置从艏端的铸件板变化到完全成圆角的板结构,或者在一些情况下圆柱形板一直延申到艏端。这种布置的有效性是许多讨论的主题,但是提供了改进的向前浮力,这将减少船的纵摇。
图5.26所示的结构由一个垂直腹板组成,它加强了安装在球鼻正前方的艏肘板的自由边。带抗振横梁的深肋骨安装在每个肋位,中心线上有一个制荡舱壁。抗振纵材由贯穿球鼻整个宽度和长度的穿孔板组成。另一个垂直腹板将球鼻连接到艏端结构。一个小的艏柱铸件将球鼻的顶部连接到装载水线以上的艏柱上。结构上的许多检修孔允许进入球鼻的所有部分。锚和缆绳的布置必须确保球鼻在操作的任何部分都不会被污染。

图5.26球鼻艏结构

锚和缆绳
艏楼甲板装有一个或多个起锚机,用于升起和降下锚和缆绳。各种系泊设备,如系船柱、导缆器等,也布置在甲板边缘周围。锚靠着艏舷侧外板,有时在特殊的凹穴中。锚缆通过锚链管穿过船体外板到达艏楼甲板。它越过缆索止动器,到达起锚机缆索升降机卷筒上。从缆索升降机,它垂直下降到下面的锚链舱。

锚链管
锚链管的安装是为了使锚链能够平稳地延伸到起锚机,并保持艏楼的水密完整性(图5.27)。它应该有足够大的尺寸,以便在提升或降低锚时能够让缆索穿过并不被绊住。结构通常是厚钢板,连接到艏楼甲板的复板和舷侧外板的加强列板上。外壳上还装有一个摩擦环。滑动板盖的形状适于套在缆绳上方,当船在海上时关闭开口。

图5.27锚链管

止链器
锚链、缆索或艏止动器安装在艏楼甲板上,与锚缆走向一致。它用于在船舶抛锚或锚已完全收起时将锚缆固定到位。通过这种方式,起锚机不受来自缆索的任何冲击或振动的影响。止链器的设计目的不是停止移动的缆索,而是将其固定在适当的位置。一种类型如图5.28所示,由带有滚轮的厚钢板预制结构组成,缆索从滚轮上通过。一个铰接杆被设计成落在两个垂直连杆之间,并将电缆保持在适当的位置。止链器被焊接或用螺栓固定在甲板上的重型插板上,并通过肘板进一步加固。

图5.28 锚链止动器

起锚机
起锚机是锚缆或锚链的提升装置,也用于系泊和绞盘工作。不同的卷筒或滚桶可以“抓住”来执行不同的任务。为了提升锚,缆绳提升卷筒被啮合。
这是一个带有特殊形状的“鼻塞”的桶,锚链节适合进入并绕过它,然后通过喷射管落入锚链舱。在提升卷筒分离的情况下,允许锚缆在其自身重量的作用下下降,而其周围的制动带用于控制下降速度。

锚链舱
锚链舱通常安装在防撞舱壁的前方。它的尺寸足以容纳所有的锚索,并在上面留有相当大的空间。将为左舷和右舷锚缆安装两个舱柜或单个中央隔开的舱柜。锚链舱应尽可能低,以降低大量锚链的重心高度。底部装有穿孔的假地板或格栅,以提供排水井,并使锚链远离泥浆和水。
图5.29显示了锚链舱的布置。它由一个板状结构组成,环绕外侧有垂直加强筋。构成船舶内部结构一部分的腹板也用于加固。凸起的穿孔假地板由实肋板安装和支撑。这样形成的井与舱底水系统相连,每次起锚时都应清空。艏楼甲板形成了锚链舱的顶部,中间是喷射管。喷射管由厚钢板制成,下缘有一个实圆棒作为密封环。从喷射管向锚链舱侧面用辐射状肘板加强,以加强艏楼甲板和喷射管。带有切入的脚撑U形板焊接到锚链舱侧面,提供了从上层甲板的水密门进入锚链舱底部的通道。此外,还采取措施保护锚索的最终链环。图示的锚链舱是一对安装在各自锚机下的左舷和右舷的锚链舱。

图5.29锚链舱

锚链锁紧组件
锚缆的最后一环通过一个紧固销固定在船体结构上。在大多数现代船舶上,这种销位于锚链舱的外侧,可以轻松快速地释放。可能会出现这样的情况,船只的安全不允许有时间起锚。通过松开锁紧销,所有的缆索可以快速地从锚链舱中穿出,让船自由地脱离危险。图5.30显示了一种装置,其中将一个插入式重钢板袋安装到锚链舱侧,用一个垂直销固定住锚索的最后一个链环。甲板上的手轮组件用于提升销和释放锚链环。

图5.30锚链锁紧装置

侧推器
侧推器通常被认为是一种帮助低速航行的船舶停靠、操纵或定位的装置。某种形式的螺旋桨式装置用于使水自由流动或在管道中流动。螺旋桨可以是固定的或可控的螺距,并且整个装置可以是可伸缩的或暴露的,固定在适当的位置或能够旋转(方位角)。
商船上最常见的装置可能是隧道推进器,它使用固定螺距或可调螺距螺旋桨。固定螺距单元需要可逆驱动。图5.31显示了一个可调螺距型推进器。位于齿轮箱中的非旋转伺服电机用于改变螺旋桨叶片的螺距。伺服电机活塞上的力通过传动轴内的活塞杆传递到轮毂内的十字头和曲柄机构。因此,简单地通过改变叶片螺旋角,可以在任一方向上提供水流。因此,可以使用任何不可逆的原动机,例如单速电动机。在操纵操作期间,原动机不需要停止,因为当不需要推力时,叶片可以处于零螺距。通过柔性传动轴、联轴器和锥齿轮获得驱动。特殊密封防止任何海水泄漏到装置中。
整个组件包括横向隧道的一部分,水通过该隧道被引导以提供推力。网格必须安装在隧道的两端,这可以在一定程度上减少推力。实际的隧道位置通常由模型试验决定,以确保不使用时阻力最小。隧道结构布置如图5.32所示。
鳃式喷气推进器利用T型隧道中的垂直轴推进器。水从两边吸入,从船身底部排出。可旋转的鳃鳍将水引导到一个圆周上的一个固定位置。水力喷射推进器也有类似的布置,但它是从下面吸水,然后从侧面排出,用叶片引导推力。发散液体路径中的导向叶片也可用于最大化对一侧或另一侧的推力。除了导管通常是弯曲的之外,导管喷射推进器的操作有点类似于隧道推进器。该导管可位于船舷或船底,通常需要大开口。
方位推进器或旋转推进器通常由一个可以旋转360度的双螺旋桨组成。螺旋桨可以是固定螺距或可调螺距。该装置特别适用于动力定位和一些推进任务。当安装在船上时,方位推进器通常是可伸缩的。

1.隧道断面
2.电机安装凳
3.输入驱动轴
4.输入驱动轴套筒
5.传动轴密封件
6.螺旋桨叶片
7.叶片手掌密封
8.轮毂体
9.曲柄销环
10.十字头轴承箱
11.圆锥滚子推力轴承
12. 十字头
13.传动轴
14.螺旋桨轴推力轴承
15.螺旋伞齿轮
16.活塞杆
17.伺服电机活塞
18.伺服电机气缸盖
19.反馈联动装置
20.伺服电机气缸
21.伺服电机端环
22.螺旋锥齿轮
23.驱动轴圆锥滚子轴承
24.齿轮箱
图5.31隧道推进器装置

图5.32船首推进器隧道

E节        尾端结构
船的尾端终止了该结构,并且被设计成提供流入和流出螺旋桨的平稳水流。螺旋桨和方向舵也被定位和支撑在后端,并且需要一定的结构布置以便令人满意地操作。尾端结构包括大量的悬垂结构,以接受甲板下的操舵装置和露天甲板上较高的系泊设备。这种布置会在尾部区域产生较大的颤振力,因此需要一个足够坚固的结构。
迄今为止,有两种主要的艉部结构被采用——巡洋舰型艉部和方尾型艉部。巡洋舰船尾很少在现代建筑中使用,但它仍然可以在大部分海上船只中看到。具有直线形状的方尾非常适合当前的制造技术。它还提供了更大的船尾甲板面积,目前广泛用于各种船型。

巡洋舰尾
巡洋舰尾的结构(图5.33)确保对任何可能出现的冲击应力有足够的抵抗力。每一个肋位都安装了实肋板,船尾的每一层甲板下面都安装了一个加厚的中纵桁。作为中纵桁延续的中腹板安装在艉端外板处,并向下延伸至肋板区域的中底纵桁。特殊的肋骨在尾部周围形成圆角,被称为“倾斜肋骨”,因为它们与船的中心线成一个角度。这些倾斜肋骨连接倾斜横梁,倾斜横梁在圆角后端支撑甲板。也可以安装水平纵材,通过将它连接到更靠前的横向骨架来加强结构。


图5.33 巡洋舰尾

方尾船尾
深实肋板也是艉封板结构的一个特点,还有一个中纵桁(图5.34)。然而,艉封板结构的平板允许在外板周围使用垂直加强板。垂直加强筋用肘板固定在肋板和横梁上,横梁横向穿过船尾。如果需要,深中纵桁可以为外板提供额外的加强。一根深中纵桁在船尾的每层甲板下延伸,并在船艉外板的中心线处支撑在深腹板上。这个腹板同样被支撑在船尾的各个肋板上,最后支撑在下面的实肋板结构上。

图5.34方尾艉封板

舵杆围阱
舵杆围阱是留在船尾的开口部分,用于舵杆进入操舵平台(图5.34)。一个水平平台有时安装在舵杆围阱的中间,以安装一个水密的压盖。然后将上方的围阱建造成水密的,并通过人孔进入上部和压盖。

艉架
尾端的外板终止于艉架(图5.34)。这通常是铸件,但有时也使用预制件和锻件。在单螺旋桨船上,艉架的中心线上有一个凸台,以便尾轴穿过,并有足够大的孔供螺旋桨在其中工作。如果不能在叶尖留有足够的间隙,那么船的尾部会产生严重的振动。艉架的下部可以为舵杆提供支撑,或者悬伸部分可以为舵枢轴提供枢轴。图5.34、5.41和5.42显示了不同的布局。艉架的不同部分,特别是在拱上,提供了与尾端结构的各个肋板的连接点。艉封板柱和振动柱是两种特殊的连接(图5.34)。这些点的良好连接确保螺旋桨引起的振动保持在最低水平。双螺旋桨船只需要一个支撑舵轴的艉架,因此尺寸大大减小。较大的艉架,尤其是铸造结构的艉架,由两部分制造,并提供螺栓连接,在仔细对准后,在适当准备的接头处焊接。

图5.35铸造眼镜架

A字架和轴毂
轴偏离中心线的双螺杆船在轴伸出船体外板时需要支撑轴的突出部分。轴毂通常用于增加船只的宽度,并允许轴保持在船体中,同时仍然保持流向螺旋桨的流线型水流。通过这种布置,轴系受到保护,并且可以进行内部检查。这些轴毂关于船的中心线对称,并且由于它们从船的尾部看起来像“眼镜架”,所以产生了术语“眼镜架”(图5.35)。一些现代建筑利用从船体伸出的A字架来支撑轴(图5.36)。最后一个A字架除了作为轴承外,还必须支撑螺旋桨的重量。
轴毂和A字架都被引入船尾,并牢固地嵌入结构中,在需要的地方进行额外的局部加固。

图5.36 A字架


图5.37 油润滑的尾轴管

尾轴管
螺旋桨轴通过尾轴管进入船内,尾轴管作为最终轴承和防水密封。传统的做法是使用侧柏木和某些合成材料作为尾轴管内的支承面,并通过海水进行润滑。由于更现代的船舶上的低速轴和更重的螺旋桨,负载增加,导致油润滑白口金属轴承的广泛使用。通过这种布置,使用中的磨损大大减少,但是需要更精确的对准和在尾轴管的每一端的密封。图5.37显示了油润滑艉管的布置。D. W. Smith的《船用辅助机器》(第6版,Butterworths海洋工程丛书,1983年)中给出了更多细节。

螺旋桨
螺旋桨由一个毂组成,毂上有几个螺旋形的叶片。当旋转时,它通过给穿过它的水柱以动量来“螺旋”或推动它穿过水。推力沿着轴系传递到推力块,最终传递到船体结构。因此,推力块必须有一个刚性底座或骨架,集成到船舶结构中以吸收推力。螺旋桨通常是固定螺距或可调螺距类型。此外,还采用了一些特殊的设计和安排,这些设计和安排提供了特殊的优势。

固定螺距螺旋桨
尽管被描述为固定螺距,实单件铸造螺旋桨的螺距随着从轮毂开始的半径的增加而变化。然而,叶片上任何特定点的螺距是固定的,并且在所有计算中使用整个螺旋桨的平均值。固定螺距螺旋桨如图5.38所示,其中也给出了描述几何特性的大部分术语。应该注意的是,端面是离阀杆最远的表面,是“工作”面。一个圆锥安装在轮毂上,使水流平稳地离开螺旋桨。从船尾看,顺时针旋转的螺旋桨被认为是右旋的。大多数单螺旋船都有右旋螺旋桨。双螺旋桨船通常有一个右手的右舷螺旋桨和一个左手的左舷螺旋桨。

图5.38固定螺距螺旋桨

气穴(空泡)现象是指充满蒸汽的空腔或气泡的形成和破裂,它是螺旋桨叶片背面特定压力变化的结果。这种现象的结果是推力损失、叶片表面腐蚀、船尾部振动和噪音。它通常限于高速、重载的螺旋桨,在设计良好的螺旋桨的正常工作条件下不成问题。
当螺旋桨在船的尾流中转动时,它是潜在的振动激励源。在某种程度上,这可以通过使前缘向后倾斜来最小化。当螺旋桨在变化的尾流中工作时,斜背是一个优势,因为不是所有的叶片都同时受到影响。推力和扭矩的变化因此被消除。由于振动是由叶片激发的,因此叶片的数量很重要,并决定了振动频率。如果存在严重的振动问题,最终可能需要更换一个不同叶片数的螺旋桨。

螺旋桨安装
螺旋桨安装在尾轴的锥体上,可以在两者之间插入一个键;或者,可以使用无键装置。一个大螺母紧固并锁定在尾轴的末端。然后在尾轴的末端用螺栓固定一个锥形物,以提供来自螺旋桨的平稳水流。
无键螺旋桨安装的一种方法是喷油系统。螺旋桨孔加工有一系列轴向和周向凹槽。高压油注入尾轴的锥形部分和螺旋桨之间。这减少了两个部件之间的摩擦,并且螺旋桨通过液压顶圈被推至轴锥上方。一旦螺旋桨定位,油压被释放,油回流,使轴和螺旋桨牢固地固定在一起。
游走螺母是一种专利装置,可在螺旋桨及其轴之间提供预定的摩擦夹紧力。通过这种布置,主机扭矩可以在不加载键(如果安装的话)的情况下传递。游走螺母实际上是一个螺纹液压千斤顶,拧在尾轴上,见图5.39。一个钢圈接受来自液压加压丁腈橡胶轮胎的推力。这个推力作用在螺旋桨上,迫使它进入锥形尾轴。通过反转游走螺母并使用通过螺柱固定在螺旋桨毂上的取出板,可以拆卸螺旋桨。当轮胎受压时,螺旋桨被拉离锥体。组装和拆卸如图5.38所示。

回复 支持 反对

使用道具 举报

 楼主| 发表于 2023-2-18 23:08 | 显示全部楼层 来自: 中国上海
Pilgrim nut
•        The pilgrim nut provides a predetermined grip between the propeller and its shaft.
•        The propeller boss is fitted with a S.G cast iron internally tapered sleeve, which is secured (fixed firmly in position) into the boss. This sleeve is bedded to the shaft cone before mounting in the boss so that better fit is achieved which, combined with the pilgrim nut push up, ensure a good friction grip. No key is required.
•        The pilgrim nut is a threaded hydraulic jack, which screwed on to the tailshaft. A steel ring receives thrust from a hydraulically pressurised nitrile rubber tyre. This thrust is applied to the propeller to force it onto the taper sleeve.
•        Propeller removal is achieved by reversing the pilgrim nut and using a withdrawal plate, which is fastened to the propeller boss by studs. When the tyre is pressurised the propeller is drawn off the taper.
游走螺母
游走螺母在螺旋桨和它的轴之间提供预定的夹紧力。
螺旋桨桨毂配有一个S.G .铸铁内锥形套筒,该套筒固定在桨毂上。在安装到轮毂中之前,该套筒被嵌入到轴锥体中,以便实现更好的配合,这与pilgrim螺母上推相结合,确保良好的摩擦夹紧。不需要钥匙。
游走螺母是一个螺纹液压千斤顶,拧在尾轴上。一个钢圈接受来自液压加压丁腈橡胶轮胎的推力。这个推力作用在螺旋桨上,迫使它压在锥形套筒上。
通过反转游走螺母并使用由螺柱固定在螺旋桨毂上的取出板,可以拆卸螺旋桨。当轮胎受压时,螺旋桨被拉离锥体。


图5.39游走螺母操作

可调螺距螺旋桨
可调螺距螺旋桨由一个轮毂组成,轮毂内装有独立的叶片。一个内部机制使叶片能够同时移动通过一个弧形来改变桨距角,从而改变桨距。典型的布置如图5.40所示。
当接收到螺距指令信号时,滑阀工作,控制辅助伺服电机的低压油供应。这将移动滑动推力块组件,以定位延伸到螺旋桨毂中的阀杆。阀杆允许高压油进入主伺服电机缸的一侧或另一侧。汽缸的运动通过曲柄销和环传递给螺旋桨叶片。螺旋桨叶片一起旋转,直到反馈信号与需求信号平衡,辅助伺服电机的低压油被切断。为了在失去动力的情况下能够紧急控制螺旋桨螺距,滑阀可以手动操作。油泵由轴驱动。
控制机构通常是液压的,通过尾轴,从驾驶台操作。改变螺距将改变提供的推力,并且由于零螺距位置的存在,主机轴可以连续转动。叶片可以旋转以提供倒车推力,因此主机不需要保留。


图5.40 可调螺距桨

特殊类型
存在许多专门的螺旋桨布置或类型,并且具有特殊的优点或应用。在这里描述了福伊特-施耐德螺旋桨、无翼尖涡螺旋桨以及导管或喷嘴的使用。
福伊特-施耐德螺旋桨是一种垂直旋转装置。叶片围绕圆盘垂直放置,可以通过凸轮旋转,以便在每次旋转的特定点改变叶片角度。这导致推力的大小和方向由凸轮决定。因此,这在某些方面类似于可调螺距螺旋桨,因为圆盘被驱动,叶片可以独立于主驱动器定位。该装置可以有效地向任何方向推进,并对螺距控制机构做出快速反应。不幸的是,整个组件很复杂,运行时噪音很大,并且需要大量的维护。它通常用于需要相当机动性的渡船和船只的主推进。它也可以用作需要精确定位的钻井船或浮吊的推进器或推进装置。
在螺旋桨周围使用导管或喷嘴可以提高螺旋桨的性能。此外,导管的翼型形状可以产生向前的推力,该推力将抵消它产生的任何阻力。导管还保护螺旋桨免受损坏并降低噪音。它通常安装在带有重载螺旋桨的船只上,例如拖船,并且已经用于较大的船只上。一种特殊的导管专利设计被称为Kort导管。
无桨尖涡(TVF)螺旋桨是一种最新的特殊设计,它大大提高了螺旋桨的效率。叶尖装有与旋转平面成直角的部件。最初的印象是刀刃已经弯向面部,即远离船只。叶尖处的附件用于在整个螺旋桨叶片上产生推力,从而提高螺旋桨效率。一个喷嘴围绕着螺旋桨,一个隧道结构位于螺旋桨下方,用来引导水流。

方向舵
舵是用来驾驶船只的。转向动作很大程度上取决于舵的面积,舵的面积通常是船的长度X深度的六十分之一到七十分之一。舵的深度与宽度之比被称为长宽比,通常为2。
双板结构的流线型舵安装在所有现代船舶上,并通过围绕其轴线的布置进一步描述。一个方向舵的所有面积都在转动轴后面,这就是所谓的"不平衡"(图5.41)。方向舵有一小部分面积在转动轴前面,这种方向舵称为“半平衡的”(图5.42)。当超过25%的方向舵面积在转动轴线的前方时。在某些角度,舵杆上没有力矩,因此这种布置称为“平衡舵”(图5.34)。
现代方向舵的结构是侧面钢板焊接到内部网状骨架上。与内部骨架成一体的可以是形成舵的轴头或轴承座的大锻件。舵的上表面形成通常水平的扁平掌状,作为舵杆的连接点。方向舵上有一个提升孔,以便在安装或拆卸方向舵时,能够垂直提升方向舵。带有眼板的特殊提升杆用于提升方向舵。在图5.41和5.42所示的不平衡和半平衡方向舵上,可以看到前缘有一个时尚或涡流板。这是在方向舵安装后焊接到位,以提供一个流向方向舵的流线型水流。制造完成后,每个舵都经过水压测试,压力相当于高出舵顶2.45米,以确保其水密完整性。内表面通常涂有沥青或一些类似的涂料,以保护金属假如外板泄漏。舵的底部有一个排水孔,以便在干船坞检查船舶时防止进水。

方向舵枢轴和轴承
方向舵,根据它的类型和布置,可以在枢轴或轴承上转动。
图5.34中的平衡方向舵有一个安装在其转动轴上的方向舵轴。上下轴承安装在方向舵上,如图5.43所示。轴承由方向舵上的不锈钢衬套和轮轴上的不锈钢衬套组成。不锈钢衬套上开有螺旋槽,便于润滑。其他材料也在使用中,如炮铜用于衬里,而黄杨木或tufnol用于衬套。上下一对锥形轴承环安装在方向舵和杆架之间。这些安装有一个小的间隙,但可以支持方向舵的重量,如果舵承失效。
图5.42所示的半平衡方向舵在枢轴上转动。布置有所不同,但枢轴由恒定直径的轴承长度和锥形长度组成,该锥形长度被拉入方向舵或船尾骨架轴颈上的类似锥形孔中。通过拉动枢轴的包屑部分的大螺母,枢轴被拉入。拧紧后,轴针螺母牢固锁定到位。锁定销在其下端具有直径增大的肩部,以防止方向舵过度提升。轴承或踵轴针在其下边缘有一个支承面,支承在一个硬钢盘上。该轴承销仅在舵承失效时需要支撑方向舵的重量。两种类型的枢轴如图5.41所示。黄铜或有时不锈钢衬垫安装在枢轴轴承表面。轴承材料装在舵枢的一个笼子里,通常是tufnol或一些耐磨的合成材料。润滑由海水提供,海水在两个枢轴的轴承表面自由循环。

图5.41不平衡舵

图5.42半平衡舵

舵杆和舵承
在进入舵机房之前,舵杆通过一个压盖和一个舵承。压盖和舵承可以是组合在一起的设备,也可以是单独的设备。

图5.43轴轴承布置a)上部轴承布置;(b)下轴承布置

图5.44舵承

舵承由两部分组成,分别提供上下两个支承面(图5.44)。舵承的上部用键固定在肘板上,这样它们可以一起转动。舵的大部分重量通过一个肩部(作为船首锻件的一部分)或一个填充在舵杆和舵承之间的轴环转移到舵承上。因此,方向舵的重量被转移到用油脂润滑的肘板的下支承面上。根据特定的设计,可以使用平的或圆锥形的支承面。肘板的下半部分用螺栓固定在操舵平台甲板上的一个沉重的插板上,并用楔子楔住以防前后和横向移动。
通常在舵杆进入舵杆处安装一个独立的水密压盖。这种布置提供了更长的舵杆长度,消除了对承载轴承水密结构的需要,并减少了舵杆的无支撑长度(图5.45)。图5.46显示了水密压盖和舵承的组合类型。为了便于操作舵,枢轴和舵杆转动轴线必须在同一垂直线上。安装过程中必须非常小心,以确保这种正确对齐。

图5.45舵杆水密压盖

图5.46组合舵承和压盖

F节 上层建筑和起居舱室
上层建筑是建造在最上层完整甲板之上的船舶结构的一部分,是船舶的全宽。甲板室是较小的结构,没有延伸到整个宽度,有一层或多层高。它们可以建在上层建筑上,也可以建在桅杆的底部,等等,上层建筑和甲板室的建造使用与船体相似的肋骨、板、纵桁和肘板,但尺寸较小。然而,延伸船舶长度15%的上层建筑被认为有助于船舶的纵向强度。这样的话,它们必须具有与主船体相等的尺寸和强度。
上层建筑的最前面部分被称为“艏楼”。船舶中部区域周围的任何上层建筑部分都被称为“桥楼结构”。船尾的甲板区域被称为“艉楼”,位于船尾的任何上层建筑也同样称为“艉楼”。升起的后甲板是露天甲板,从船尾延伸到船的一部分长度,并且位于上甲板之上。
大多数现代船舶的大部分上层建筑和起居舱室都位于船尾的机舱上方。上层建筑和甲板室通常总共有四层或五层。这个空间的主要部分,除了被机舱棚占用的部分外,用于船员住舱。

艏楼
所有船舶必须配备一个艏楼或一个以提供一个最低的船首高度的布置,如船级社规范中所定义的。通常安装艏楼,在安装艏楼时,艏楼必须从艏柱向后延伸0.07 L的距离(其中L为干舷船长)。艏楼的侧板是外板的延续,比端部的板更厚。必须提供加强艏楼板的适当布置。

桥楼结构
如果桥楼结构超过船舶长度的15%,侧板厚度必须比其他上层结构增加25%。要求桥楼前端的板加厚,后端的板可以薄一些。加强筋尺寸同样在前端增加,在后端减少。强肋骨或部分舱壁必须用以支撑上方的结构,尤其是在上方甲板室的拐角处。屋顶或吊柱处的甲板必须从下面加固和支撑。

艉楼结构
艉楼前部必须像桥楼前部一样充分增加板厚和加固。内部加强将包括所需的腹板和部分舱壁,尤其是在上方有甲板室的地方。艉楼暴露在外的后端需要比其他结构的后端采用更坚固的结构。

升高的后甲板
升高的后甲板使船在船长范围内有更大的深度。因此,必须增加肋骨、外板、甲板和横梁的尺寸。如前所述,可以在升高的后甲板上建造结构。

不连续处
上层建筑的末端代表了船舶结构的主要不连续处。像桥楼和艏楼这样较长的结构需要在端部进行大量加固。船级社规范要求上甲板外板厚度增加20%,除非该结构没有延伸到舷侧外板。上层建筑端部的甲板也增加了厚度。构成上层建筑一部分的侧板在朝向舷侧外板的末端处形成良好的圆角(图5.47)。

图5.47不连续性a)首楼甲板板间断;(b)尾楼甲板板间断

水密开口和门
凡在干舷甲板之上的结构上安装门,门必须有足够的强度,并能维持结构的水密完整性。开口具有圆角以减小不连续处的应力影响。还安装了坚固的框架或额外的加强件,以保持结构的强度。安装在开口上的门由适当加强的钢制成,装有橡胶垫圈以实现水密性。门有固定夹或“卡爪”,可以从任何一侧操作。卡爪固定在楔子上,楔子将门框边缘拉入垫圈,将门密封。图5.48-5.50显示了门结构和关闭布置的细节。

图5.48门夹a)气密门夹;(b)风雨密门夹

图5.49门铰链a) 风雨密铰链;(b)气密铰链

图5.50钢门

舱室
上层建筑将包括几层住舱、公共房间、办公室、导航区和机舱。舱室和房间的典型布置如图5.51所示。加强钢舱壁用于支撑上面的结构,并为防火区提供分舱(见第10章)。中间隔板被用来建造独立的舱室。隔板用防火材料芯并在两侧贴塑料层压板制成。它们安装在甲板和天花板上的U形截面轻质板通道中。如图5.52(a)和(b)所示。天花板安装在隔板之间的木地板或板条上。典型的地板覆盖物包括沥青涂层和乙烯瓷砖,以提供易于清洁的耐磨表面。围板条安装在边缘以完成布置。如图5.53所示,住舱配有各种布置的内置家具和配件,以使船员感到舒适。


图5.51舱室布置

图5.52(a)隔板结构-头部和底部详图

图5.52(b)隔板结构-甲板横梁

图5.53船员住舱



6
Minor Structural Items

Minor structural items are now considered which, while not contributing greatly to the strength of the vessel, can nevertheless be considerable in size and have requirements for strength in themselves.

Funnel
In reality the funnel is a surround and support for the various uptakes which ensure the dispersion of exhaust gases into the atmosphere and away from the ship. The shape of the funnel is sometimes determined by the shipowner's requirements but largely by smoke-clearing arrangements and the need for streamlining to reduce resistance. The owner's housemark or trademark is often carried on the outside of the funnel structure.
The funnel is constructed of steel plating stiffened internally by angle bars or flat plates fitted end on (Figure 6.1). Brackets are fitted at the stiffener connections to the deck and the plating of the funnel is fully welded to the deck. A base plate may be fitted between the funnel plating and the deck. Internal flats are fitted to the funnel and are made watertight with scupper drains to collect any rainwater. The number of flats fitted is dependent upon the height of the funnel. The various main engine and auxiliary uptakes are fitted within the funnel casing, usually on sliding feet to permit expansion. Some uptakes are arranged to stand proud of the funnel casing.
In the funnel shown in Figure 6.1 ventilation louvres are fitted on the after end below the upper rainflat. These louvres disperse the exhausts from the various ventilators led up the funnel. Fire flaps are fitted in the airtight flat beneath these ventilators and are used to shut off the air outlet from the engine room in the event of a fire. A hinged watertight door is fitted in the funnel leading out on to the deck upon which the funnel stands. Holes or grilles are cut into the forward face of the funnel towards the top, and the whistle is fitted on a small seat just aft of the opening.
Ladders and platforms are also provided inside the funnel for access purposes. Lugs are fitted around the outside top shell plating to permit painting of the funnel.

Engine casing

The accommodation or upper deck spaces are separated from the engine room or machinery spaces by the engine casing. Access doors are provided at suitable points between the engine casing and the accommodation. The volume enclosed by the casing is made as small as possible but of sufficient dimensions to allow maintenance and machinery removal from the engine room. The casing leads up to the upper decks, finishing below the funnel. Fresh air is drawn in through jalousies or louvres in small fan rooms off the casing and passes down trunking into the engine room. The hot air rises up the engine room into the casing and out of the funnel at the top.
The construction of a typical engine casing is shown in Figure 6.2. The casing is a lightly plated structure with closely spaced vertical stiffeners. These bulb plate or angle bar stiffeners are fitted on the machinery room side of the casing to ensure continuity. Swedged or corrugated bulkheads could also be used for the casing sides. Stringers and brackets are fitted at various heights, where no flats exist, to further strengthen the structure.
The casing sides are also used to support seats for certain auxiliaries and as securing points for pipe clips or hangars. The casing is supported on a deep girder running around the engine room. This deep girder is in turn supported by the pillars, transverses and bulkheads of the engine room structure (see Figure 6.2).
The casing top is of stiffened plate construction with deep girders and brackets around the openings for the uptakes. Heavy brackets connect the transverse beams to the vertical stiffeners. This arrangement ensures adequate support for the funnel which sits on the casing top.

Shaft tunnel
Where a ship's machinery space is not right aft an enclosed area or tunnel is provided to lead the shafting to the after peak bulkhead. The tunnel must be of watertight construction to provide integrity should the shaft seal cease to operate correctly. The forward end of the tunnel is fitted with a sliding watertight door to seal off the tunnel if necessary. The tunnel is made of sufficient proportions to enable access for maintenance to the shafting, and an escape route is provided from the after end.       
Two types of construction are used, either a curved top or roof, or a flat roof. The curved roof is stronger and can therefore be made of lighter plate than the flat-roof type. The flat-topped const ruction does, however, lend itself to more straightforward construction and provides a flat platform in the hold above. The plating stiffened by bulb plates usually fitted in line with the frames. A continuous ring of stiffener bar is fitted with the curved-roof type of tunnel. The flat-roof type has brackets connecting the roof stiffeners to the vertical stiffeners. Examples of each are shown in Figure 6.3.

Figure 6.3 Shaft tunnels: (a) curved-roof type; (b) flat-roof type

The structure must be capable of withstanding the water pressure should the tunnel become open to the sea. The scantlings must therefore be equivalent to those of a watertight bulkhead. The width of the tunnel is decided by access and maintenance considerations and will be reduced to the minimum necessary. A raised floor is usually fitted and pipework is run along beneath it. The shaft bearings which are positioned at intervals along the tunnel are carried on stools or seats. These stools are welded to the tank top and the tunnel structure to form a rigid platform. The tunnel is opened out into a larger area at the after end to provide an adequate working space for withdrawal of the tailshaft. The spare tailshaft is usually mounted on the shell in this open area or recess.
Shaft tunnels must be hose tested on completion to ensure their watertightness.

Bulwarks

Bulwarks are barriers fitted to the deck edge to protect passengers and crew and avoid the loss of items overboard should the ship roll excessively. Bulwarks are considered solid or open - the solid type being constructed principally of plate, the open type being railings. Figure 6.4(a).
The bulwark makes no contribution to longitudinal strength and as such, in the solid form, is of relatively thin plate supported by stays from the deck. The stays are set back from the deck edge and must not be welded to the sheerstrake. This avoids the high stresses, particularly at the midships section, being transmitted to the bulwarks and possible cracking occurring.


Figure 6.4 Bulwarks: (a) open bulwark or railing; (b) arrangement of 'floating' bulwark

Where the solid bulwark meets the deck, freeing ports must fitted to allow the rapid drainage of any water shipped, which could seriously affect the stability of the ship. Sometimes a 'floating' type of construction is used to provide a continuous freeing port area. Figure 6.4(b). The depth of the freeing port must be restricted to 230 mm.
Open bulwarks consist of rails and stanchions supported by stays which again are set back from the deck edge. The lower rail spacing must be a maximum of 230 mm, whereas the rails above may have a maximum spacing of 380 mm.
Bulwarks of both types are usually 1 m in height. Bulwark plating, particularly in the forecastle region, is increased in thickness where it is penetrated by mooring fittings.


Deep tanks

Deep tanks are fitted in some ships for the carriage of bunker oil, ballast water or liquid cargoes such as tallow. The entrance to the deep tank from the deck is often via a large oiltight hatch; this enables the loading of bulk or general cargoes if required. A deep tank is smaller than a cargo hold and of a much stronger construction. Hold bulkheads may distort under the head of water if flooded, say in a collision. However, deep tank bulkheads which may be subjected to a constant head of oil or water must not deflect at all. The deep tank construction therefore employs strong webs, stringer plates and girders, fitted as closely spaced horizontal and vertical frames. Wash bulkheads may be fitted in larger deep tanks to reduce surging of the liquid carried. Deep tanks used for bunker tanks must have wash bulkheads if they extend the width of the ship, to reduce free surface effects of the liquid.

Figure 6.5 Deep tank: (a) plan view; (b) elevation looking outboard

Figure 6.6 Pump seating

The construction of a deep tank used for bunker oil is shown in Figure 6.5. The tank is one of two and extends for half the width of the ship. The strakes of plating which form the oiltight bulkheads of the tank increase in thickness towards the bottom of the tank where the loading is greatest. The after oiltight bulkhead is stiffened by closely spaced vertical bulb plates. The forward oiltight bulkhead is stiffened externally by a series of diaphragm plates. The diaphragm plates form a cofferdam between the bunker tank and the oiltight bulkhead of the cargo hold forward.
Three horizontal stringers are fitted across the tank, a transverse wash bulkhead and a longitudinal wash bulkhead. The stringers are bracketed to the stiffeners at the tank sides and to the wash bulkheads which they join. The whole structure is therefore stiffened by a series of deep 'ring' girders in both a horizontal and vertical direction. A very strong structure is thus formed with considerable restrictions to liquid movement within the tank.
Corrugated or swedged bulkheads may be fitted to deep tanks, particularly those intended for liquid cargoes which require the tank to be cleaned. Conventional stiffening could be positioned on the outside of small deep tanks to similarly facilitate cleaning. Heating coils may be fitted in tanks intended for cargoes such as tallow. Deep tanks must be tested on completion by a head of water equivalent to their maximum service condition or not less than 2.44 m above the crown of the tank.

Figure 6.7 Shell-mounted seating

Machinery seats

Main engines, auxiliary machinery and associated items of equipment are fastened down on a rigid framework known as a seating or seat. These seats are of plate, angle and bulb construction and act as a rigid platform for the equipment. They are welded directly to the deck or structure beneath, usually in line with the stiffening. The seat is designed to spread the concentrated load over the supporting structure of the ship. It may be extended to the adjacent structure or additional stiffening may be supplied in way of the seat. Steel chocks are often fitted between the seat and the machinery item to enable a certain amount of fitting to take place and ensure a solid 'bed'. The item can then be bolted down to the seat without penetrating the double bottom or deck below.
Seats in the machinery space also serve as platforms to raise the pumps, coolers, etc., to the floorplate level for easier access and maintenance. A typical pump seating as used in an engine room is shown in Figure 6.6. It is constructed of steel plate in a box-type arrangement for rigidity. A shell-mounted seating is shown in Figure 6.7.

Sea tubes and inlet boxes

Most valves having a direct inlet or outlet to the sea are mounted on a sea tube which is fitted into the shell. A sea tube is a thick-walled steel tube with a flange on the inboard side which is machined flat to form a watertight joint with the valve. The tube is let into the lower side or bottom shell and fully welded inside and out, Figure 6.8(a).       
A number of sea tubes may be fitted into inlet boxes which are usually fitted in the forward corners of the engine room below the waterline. A box-like structure is fitted to the shell and opens to the sea through one or more holes with grids fitted. Several sea tubes can be let into this box, or valves can be mounted on to flanges welded directly        to the inlet box. Figure 6.8(b).
The sea tubes or inlet boxes also serve to strengthen the shell plating around the discontinuity resulting from the hole in the shell.

Figure 6.8 Sea water inlet arrangements: (a) sea tube; (b) sea inlet box

次要结构项目

现在考虑次要的结构项目,这些项目虽然对船的强度没有很大的贡献,但在尺寸上是相当大的,并且对自身的强度有要求。

烟囱
实际上,烟囱是各种排气管的环绕和支撑结构,确保废气扩散到大气中,远离船只。烟囱的形状有时是由船东的要求决定的,但很大程度上是由排烟装置和流线型以减少阻力的需要决定的。船东的商标通常位于烟囱结构的外部。
烟囱由钢板构成,通过安装在内部的角钢或扁钢加固(图6.1)。肘板安装在甲板的加强筋连接处,烟囱板完全焊接在甲板上。可以在烟囱板和甲板之间安装底板。在烟囱内部安装扁钢,并通过排水孔进行防水处理,以收集雨水。安装的扁钢数量取决于烟囱的高度。各种主机和辅助烟道安装在烟囱棚内,通常安装在滑脚上以允许膨胀。一些吸水管被布置成竖立在烟囱棚上。
在图6.1所示的烟囱中,通风百叶窗安装在上部雨平台下方的后端。这些百叶窗分散了从各种通风设备排出的废气。防火挡板安装在这些通风器下方的气密舱内,用于在发生火灾时关闭机舱的排气口。烟囱上装有一扇铰链式水密门,通向烟囱所在的甲板。烟囱的前端被切割成朝向顶部的孔或格栅,哨子被安装在开口后面的一个小底座上。
烟囱内还提供了梯子和平台,以方便进入。凸耳安装在顶部外板的外侧,以便对烟囱进行喷漆。


图6.1 烟囱

机舱棚
通过机舱棚将起居舱或上层甲板空间与主机室或机舱隔开。在机舱棚和舱室之间的适当位置提供检修门。由棚封闭的体积尽可能小,但具有足够的尺寸,以允许维护和从主机舱移除机器。棚通向上层甲板,在烟囱下方结束。新鲜空气通过机舱棚外的小风扇室内的百叶窗吸入,并通过风道进入主机室。热空气从机舱上升到机舱棚中,然后从顶部的烟囱中排出。
典型的主机机舱棚结构如图6.2所示。机舱棚是带有密集垂直加强板的轻型板结构。这些球扁钢或角钢加强筋安装在机舱棚的机舱侧,以确保连续性。波形隔板或槽形隔板也可用于机舱棚侧面。在没有扁钢的地方,在不同的高度安装纵材和肘板,以进一步加强结构。
机舱棚侧面也用于支撑某些辅助设备的底座,并作为管夹或机库的固定点。机舱棚支撑在围绕机舱的深梁上。这种深梁依次由机舱结构的支柱、横梁和舱壁支撑(见图6.2)。
机舱棚顶部为加筋板结构,在通风口周围有深梁和肘板。重型肘板将横梁连接到垂直加强筋上。这种布置确保了位于机舱棚顶部的烟囱有足够的支撑。


图6.2 机舱棚

轴隧
凡船舶的机舱不在船尾,则须设置围封区域或隧道,以将轴系引至艉尖舱舱壁。隧道必须为水密结构,以在轴封停止正常运行时提供完整性。隧道的艏端装有滑动式水密门,以便在必要时封闭隧道。隧道由足够的比例构成,以便能够进入轴系进行维护,并从尾部提供一条逃生路线。       
有两种建筑形式,一种是曲顶,另一种是平顶。与平顶相比,曲顶更坚固,因此可以由更轻的板材制成。然而,平顶结构确实有助于更直接的建造,并在上面的货舱中提供了一个平台。板由球扁钢加强,通常和肋骨对齐。一个连续的环形扁钢加强筋与曲顶式隧道相配合。平顶型的顶部加强筋和垂直加强筋之间用肘板连接。图6.3显示了每种方法的示例。


图6.3轴隧a)曲顶型;(b)平顶型

如果隧道打开通向大海,该结构必须能够承受水压。因此,构件尺寸必须等同于水密舱壁的尺寸。隧道的宽度由通道和维护因素决定,并将减少到必要的最小值。通常安装升高的地板,管道在地板下铺设。沿隧道间隔放置的轴承安装在凳子或底座上。这些凳子焊接在舱顶和隧道结构上,形成一个刚性平台。隧道在尾端通向一个更大的区域,为抽出尾轴提供足够的工作空间。备用尾轴通常安装在船体的这个开放区域或凹槽中。
轴隧竣工时必须进行软管测试,以确保其水密性。

舷墙
舷墙是安装在甲板边缘的屏障,用于保护乘客和船员,避免船只过度摇晃时物品从船上掉落。舷墙分成实体型或敞开型-实体型主要是由板建成,敞开型是栏杆。图6.4(a)。
舷墙对纵向强度没有贡献,因此,实体型是由甲板上的撑条支撑的相对较薄的板。撑条从甲板边缘向后设置,不得焊接到舷顶列板上。这避免了高应力被传递到舷墙和可能发生的开裂,特别是在船中部,


图6.4舷墙a)敞开的舷墙或栏杆;(b)“悬浮”舷墙的布置

在实体型舷墙与甲板相接的地方,必须安装排水孔,以便迅速排出任何装运的水,这可能会严重影响船舶的稳性。有时使用“悬浮”型结构来提供连续的排水孔区域。图6.4(b)。排水孔的深度必须限制在230毫米。
敞开型舷墙由栏杆和支柱组成,支柱由撑条支撑,撑条也从甲板边缘向后设置。下部导轨的最大间距必须为230 mm,而上部导轨的最大间距可为380 mm
两种类型的舷墙通常高1米。舷墙板,特别是在艏楼区域,在被系泊配件穿透的地方要增加厚度。

深舱
一些船上装有深舱,用于运输燃油、压舱水或诸如动物脂之类的液体货物。从甲板到深舱的入口通常是通过一个大的油密舱口;如果需要,这样可以装载散装或普通货物。深舱比货舱小,结构坚固得多。如果进水,比如发生碰撞,货舱舱壁可能会在水头下变形。然而,可能承受恒定的油或水头的深舱舱壁决不能偏转。因此,深舱结构采用坚固的腹板、纵材板和纵桁,作为紧密间隔的水平和垂直骨架。制荡舱壁可安装在较大的深舱中,以减少所载液体的波动。如果用于燃料舱的深舱延伸至整个船宽度,则它们必须具有制荡舱壁,以减少液体的自由表面效应。


图6.5深舱a)平面图;(b)向外看的立面图

图6.6泵座

图6.5显示了用于燃油的深舱的结构。舱是两个中的一个,延伸到船的一半宽度。构成液舱油密舱壁的船体板,其厚度朝向舱底部增加,该处的负荷最大。后油密舱壁由紧密间隔的垂直球扁钢加强。前油密舱壁由一系列隔板从外部加固。隔板在燃油舱和货舱前部的油密舱壁之间形成一个隔离舱。
三个水平纵材横跨舱安装,一个横向制荡舱壁和一个纵向制荡舱壁。纵材用肘板固定在液舱侧面的加强板和它们所连接的制荡舱壁上。因此,整个结构由一系列水平和垂直方向的深“环”形桁材加固。因此形成了非常坚固的结构,对舱内的液体运动有相当大的限制。
槽形或楔形舱壁可以安装在深舱上,特别是那些用于液体货物的舱壁,这种舱壁需要清洗。传统的加强可以位于小型深舱的外侧,以类似地便于清洁。加热线圈可以安装在用于装运动物脂等货物的船中。深舱必须在完工时通过相当于其最大使用条件或不低于舱顶以上2.44米的水头进行测试。


图6.7安装在外板上的底座

机器底座

主机、辅机和相关设备被固定在一个叫做底座的刚性骨架上。这些底座为扁钢、角钢和球扁钢结构,充当设备的刚性平台。它们被直接焊接到甲板或下面的结构上,通常与加强筋对齐。底座的设计是为了将集中载荷分散到船的支撑结构上。它可以延伸到相邻的结构,或者可以在底座上提供额外的加强。钢楔块通常安装在底座和机器设备之间,以保证一定的安装量,并确保坚固的“底座”。然后,可以用螺栓将物品固定在底座上,而不会穿透双层底或下面的甲板。
机舱中的底座也可用作提升泵、冷却器等的平台,与肋板齐平,以便于接近和维护。图6.6显示了机舱中使用的典型泵座。它由钢板制成,呈箱形排列,以增强刚性。图6.7显示了一个安装在外板上的底座。

海水管和入口箱
大多数直接通向大海的入口或出口安装在海水管上,海水管安装在外板内。海水管是一种厚壁钢管,其内侧有一个折边(法兰),该法兰被加工成平面,与阀门形成防水连接。管子放入下侧或底外板,内外完全焊接,如图6.8(a)所示。       
多个海水管可安装在入口箱内,而入口箱通常安装在水线以下的机舱前部角落。一个箱形结构安装在船体上,通过一个或多个装有格栅的孔通向大海。几个海水管可以放入这个入口箱,或者阀门可以安装在直接焊接到入口箱的法兰上。图6.8(b)。
海水管或入口箱也用于加强由船体外板上的孔引起的不连续性。


图6.8海水入口布置: (a)海水管;(b)海水入口箱 
回复 支持 反对

使用道具 举报

 楼主| 发表于 2023-2-18 23:09 | 显示全部楼层 来自: 中国上海
7
Outfit

Hatch covers

Hatch covers are used to make the cargo hatch watertight, to protect the cargo and to stiffen up the structure of the hatch opening. Two basic types are in general use - the wooden hatch cover fitted across hatch beams and the patent steel covers of various designs. The hatch covers fit on top of the hatch coamings, which have been described in Chapter 5. The weather deck coamings are at a height set by the load line rules (see Chapter 10). The tween deck coamings are set flush or almost flush with the deck to reduce interference with cargo stowage in this area.

Figure 7.1 Wooden hatch cover


Wooden hatch covers

A combination of transverse beams and longitudinal hatch boards make up the wooden hatch cover arrangement (Figure 7.1). I-section girders, the width of the hatch, are fitted at intervals along the length of the hatch and are known as hatchway beams, shifting beams or webs. The ends of the beams fit either into slots or carriers in the coaming side or lock into position on a trackway if they are of the sliding type. The beam ends are additionally stiffened by a doubling plate. The beams which take the ends of the hatchboards have a vertical flat fitted to hold the boards in place.
The hatchboards are fitted longitudinally over the hatch beams and are protected at their ends by a metal band. The boards are at least 60 mm thick and more for a span greater than 1.5 m. The roller beam arrangement of hatchboards is the same, the roller beam simply speeding up the opening and closing of the hatch. At least two tarpaulins must be fitted over the hatchboards and suitably fastened down around the hatch coaming. Battens, cleats and wedges are used to 'dog' down the tarpaulins. Steel locking bars or some suitable additional locking devices are required to secure each of the hatch cover sections after battening down the tarpaulins.


Steel hatch covers

Patented steel hatch covers of a variety of designs are available from several manufacturers. Most designs employ a number of self-supporting steel covers which completely enclose the hatch opening and closing arrangements utilise a 'single pull' via a winch wire or hydraulic or electric power. The covers run on wheels on a trackway along the hatch coaming top. The separate sections are either hinged together or joined by chains to one another. The covers finally stow at some point clear of the hatch opening.
A MacGregor steel hatch cover arrangement is shown in Figure 7.2. The hatch covers can be closed or opened by hydraulic power or a winch-operated single wire pull. A trackway is formed for the hatch rollers by a platform top on the coaming. A vertical plate is positioned each side of the coaming at        the stowing end of the hatch on the coaming trackway. The upper rollers on the batch cover ride up on this plate and the cover then tips into the vertical position. The covers are thus compactly stowed clear of the hatch opening. The hatch covers run on eccentric rollers which act as wheels in the raised position and are clear of the coaming in the lowered position to enable the covers to be fastened down.
The covers of fabricated steel plate with stiffeners or webs to strengthen the structure.        The ends of the covers overlap in the closed position. Grooves fitted with compressible packing surround the outside edges of the covers. When the covers are fastened down by cleats on to a raised edge on the coaming, a watertight seal is formed and no tarpaulin is required. The athwartship joints between the covers have a similar sealing arrangement. The cleating arrangement shown in Figure 7.2 is automatic. The cover wheels drop into slots in the coaming plate prior to cleating and are raised hydraulically after uncleating. Sliding bars are fitted along the side and end coamings under the top rail. Hooks are positioned at the cleating points and can pivot through a slot in the coaming rail. Double-acting hydraulic cylinders move the bars to raise or lower the hooks.


Figure 7.2 MacGregor steel hatch cover

Figure 7.3 Automatic peripheral cleating

Figure 7.4 Small watertight hatch cover: (a) section through hatch; (b) plan view of hatch cover


In the raised position the hooks engage cleat lugs which pull the hatch cover sections down on to the sealing strip. For transverse cleating a torsion bar arrangement is used. Lever arms on the end of the torsion bar. This presses cleating lugs on to pressure pad on the end of the adjacent hatch section. A peripheral cleat arrangement is shown in Figure 7.3.


Minor hatch covers

A number of small access openings, tank entrances, etc., are fitted with minor hatch covers of steel construction.
A typical small hatch cover is shown in Figure 7.4. The coaming edge is forced into a rubber gasket by a number of fastening clips or 'dogs' around the cover, a watertight seal being thus formed. The handles are arranged for internal or external operation on accesses. A counterbalance weight is sometimes fitted to ease the opening of the cover.

Mooring equipment and arrangements

The winches and windlasses positioned on the forecastle and poop decks and sometimes the upper deck perform the mooring and warping duties required by the ship when arriving and departing its various ports of call. Various fittings are provided on the deck and around the deck edge to assist in the mooring operation and provide a clear run or lead for the mooring and warping wires. Examples of these fittings are bollards and the various types of fairlead which are found on board ship.
The windlass as mentioned in Section D of Chapter 5, has warping ends which are used when mooring the ship. One or more warping winches are fitted on the poop deck aft for similar duties. Solid seatings, as mentioned in chapter 6, transmit the loads to the deck and also stiffen the deck. Larger vessels have mooring winches fitted on the upper deck also. Bollards or mooring bitts are used to moor the ship once it is alongside and are welded or bolted to the deck or to a box-like structure which is welded to the deck, Figure 7.5(a). Adequate structural support must always be provided in way of bollards and all mooring fittings, usually by additional stiffening to the deck beneath.
Fairlead are used to guide the hawsers or mooring wires to the bollards or mooring winches. Fairleads are attached to the deck, a raised seat or the deck and the bulwarks. Several different types are to be seen, such as the multi-angled fairlead, the pedestal fairlead, the roller fairlead and the panama fairlead, A multi-angled fairlead consists of two horizontal and two vertical rollers with the wire passing through the hole between the rollers, Figure 7.5(b). A pedestal fairlead consists of a single horizontal or vertical roller mounted on a raised pedestal or seat, Figure 7.5(c). A roller fairlead is one or more vertical rollers on a steel ba.se which may fasten directly to the deck or to the deck and bulwarks, Figure 7.5(d). The panama fairlead is an almost elliptical opening formed in a casting which is fitted into a suitably stiffened aperture in the bulwark, Figure 7.5(e).
The multi-angled fairlead is fitted at the deck edge and reduces the number of guide rollers or other fairleads required to give a clear lead of wire to the winch. The pedestal fairlead guides the wire across the deck to the winch clear of any obstructions. The roller fairlead is used at the deck edge to lead in the mooring and warping wires. A panama fairlead is fitted in the foremost position in the forecastle bulwark on the centreline of all ships which pass through the Panama Canal. Panama fairleads are also used in other positions around the deck edge as required.
For the various mooring and warping arrangements possible on a ship an 'arrangement of leads' drawing is provided. This shows the runs of the various wires through and over the various fairleads and winch warping drums on the decks of the ship. Such an arrangement for the fore end of a ship is shown in Figure 7.6.

Figure 7.5 (a) Fabricated bollard; {b) multi-angle fairlead; (c) pedestal fairlead;
(d) two-roller fairlead; (e) panama fairlead

Masts, derricks and deck cranes

Masts

The ship's mast acts as a lookout platform and a mounting point for navigation equipment such as lights, radar, aerials, etc. Access to the upper platform is by ladder which, depending upon the mast size, may be fitted externally or internally.
A foremast, as fitted to an oil tanker, is shown in Figure 7.7. Construction is of light plate stiffened by internal webs. A D-type cross-section is often used for its streamlined, reduced-resistance form. The upper platform is additionally supported by brackets to the outer plating of the mast. The mast is fully welded to the deckhouse on the forecastle deck and to the upper deck. A solid round bar is used to stiffen each of the free edges of plating and before erection the mast is coated internally with a bitumen solution.

Sampson posts

Some masts on general cargo ships also double as support posts for the derricks used for cargo handling. Sampson posts are also used more specifically for supporting derricks. Tied arrangements of Sampson posts, or bipod masts as they are sometimes called, are also used. The scantlings and construction of masts and posts used in cargo-handling work are given in the classification society rules and are dependent upon the safe working load (SWL) of the derrick boom. Most masts are self-supporting by virtue of their construction and attachment to the deck. Only special heavy-lift derricks require wire stays or preventers between the post top and the deck.
Sampson post construction is of tubular steel section, stiffened internally by webs. Thicker plating or doubling plates are provided where attachments are made to the post. Derrick booms are of seamless tubing usually with a greater diameter at the middle region where the bending moments are greatest. The various goosenecks and end fittings are welded inserts in the tube ends.
The post attachment to the deck varies but must always provide adequate stiffening and support. Mast houses are fitted at the base of some masts or Sampson posts and may or may not assist in stiffening me structure. Some posts are let into the tween decks or are attached to the corners of superstructure to obtain support. The greater the derrick load the more stiffening is required, often by fitting additional webs below decks and heavier than usual bulkhead stiffeners and brackets below the mast or post.


Figure 7.7 Oil tanker foremast


Derrick rigs

The derricks used for cargo-handling work can be arranged or rigged in several different ways to provide for different manpower requirements, cargo-lifting capacities or lifting cycle times.

Union purchase

The union purchase rig is a much used arrangement for cargo loading and discharging. Two derricks are used, one arranged to plumb the hatch and the other to plumb the quay or over the ship's side. The falls or wires from both derricks are shackled to the same cargo hook. Thus, by using the two winch controllers separately and together the hook is raised or lowered over the hold, travels over the deck and can be raised and lowered over the ship's side.
This arrangement is safe, in that only the load moves, and requires two reliable operators for the winches. It is, however, only suitable for light loads up to about 1 .5 tonnes. A union purchase rig is shown in Figure 7.8.

Figure 7.8 Union purchase rig

Swinging derrick

The fastest and most reliable method of cargo handling is achieved by the swinging derrick rig. A long derrick boom with a clear arc of swing is necessary for this arrangement. An adjustable span is usually arranged to facilitate the plumbing of the hatch and the quay over the ship's side. This is achieved by a topping wire and winch which is independent of the cargo winch. A swinging derrick rig is shown in Figure 7.9.

Figure 7.9 Swinging derrick rig

Figure 7.10 'Yo-yo' arrangement

1 Derrick head fitting.
2 Pendulum block fitting with guide rollers.
3 Upper cargo blocks.
4 Connecting flats.
5 Lower span block.
6 Span swivel.
7 Cross-tree.
8 Inlet for the hauling pan.
9 Lower cargo blocks.
10 Connecting traverse.
11 Swivel eye for flemish hook.
12 Flemish hook.
13 Ladder.
14 Gooseneck pin socker.
15 Fastening device for lower cargo block.
16 Heel fitting.
17 Derrick pin.
18 Gooseneck and gooseneck pin socket.
19 Winches.

Figure 7.11 Stűlken heavy-lift derrick

Heavy-lift derrick

For loads heavier than the safe working load of a single derrick, two derricks coupled together by a 'yo-yo' gear arrangement may be used, as shown in Figure 7.10. The derrick heads must be kept close together during operation and the central travelling block which equalises the load must have a safe working load greater than the cargo being Lifted. A special heavy-lift derrick is fitted to many general cargo ships, with suitable rig and purchase gear for its designed safe working load.
Various patent heavy-lift derricks are available, one example being the Stűlken derrick shown in Figure 7.11. The Stűlken derrick has a safe working load up to 300 tonnes and is positioned between two outwardly raked tapering tubular columns. Several winches are provided for the various hoisting, slewing and topping duties. The controls are all arranged as levers in one console, which can be operated by one man. This heavy-lift derrick can be arranged to serve either of the hatches forward and aft of it. Smaller derricks are also rigged from the tubular columns for normal cargo work.

Deck cranes

Derricks have been replaced on many modern large ships by deck cranes mounted on platforms between the holds (Figure 7.12). The deck crane provides an immediately operational cargo-handling device with minimal rigging requirements and simple, straightforward one-man operation. The safe working load of the crane is determined by its cargo-handling duties, and designs are available from 3-5 tonnes and up to 10-15 tonnes as required. Double gearing is a feature of some of the larger cranes to enable speedier handling of lighter loads. Three basic types of cranes are available - general cargo cranes, grabbing cranes and twin-crane arrangements.

The general cargo crane is for use on cargo ships and bulk carriers. The grabbing crane is for use with a mechanically-operated grab when handling bulk materials. It requires a multiple-wire arrangement for the operation of the grab. Twin cranes utilise standard cranes which can be twinned or operated in unison to lift heavier loads such as containers, if required. A single operator is usual with this system by utilising a master and slave control system in the two cranes. The use of a common revolving platform makes this arrangement possible.

Crane platform

The deck crane is located on a platform positioned some distance from the deck to provide the crane operator with a clear uninterrupted view of the hold and the quayside (Figure 7.13). The crane also revolves around this platform. The

Figure 7.12 General cargo crane

Figure 7.13 Crane pedestal and seat

seat on which the crane rests is usually circular and of steel plate construction with closely spaced vertical ribs or brackets. This seat is usually welded to or is an integral part of the raised post or platform which is welded to the deck of the ship. Adequate structural support and stiffening should be provided both around and under the seat.


Pumping and piping arrangements

For the many services required on board ship, various piping and pumping systems are provided. Some systems, such as bilge drainage and fire mains, are statutory requirements in the event of damage or fire on board ship. Each of the various systems will be examined in turn.


Bilge system

The bilge piping system of any ship must be designed and arranged such that any compartment can be discharged of water when the ship is on an even keel or listed no more than 5 degrees to either side. In the machinery space at least two suctions must be available, one on each side. One suction is connected to the bilge main and the other to an independent power-driven pump or ejector. An emergency bilge suction must also be provided and is usually connected to the largest capacity pump available. A diagrammatic arrangement of a bilge pumping system for a 26000 deadweight tonnes bulk carrier is shown in Figure 7.14.

Figure 7.15 (a) Bilge strum box; (b) bilge mud box

Strum boxes are fitted on all but machinery and tunnel space suction pipes. Perforations of 10 mm maximum diameter are made in the plate to provide a suction area at least twice that of the suction pipe. In the machinery and tunnel space bilge lines, mud boxes are fitted. The mud box fits between lengths of piping and has a perforated centreplate. The use of strum and mud boxes prevents the entry of large objects to the pipeline and safeguards the internal parts of the pump (Figure 7.15).
Suction valves for the individual compartments must be of the screw-down non-return (SNDR) type to prevent reverse flow. all other valves must be of the non-return (NR) type. The port and starboard hold bilge valves are usually grouped in distribution chests at the forward end of the machinery space. Bilge piping is made up of the fore and aft mains and suction branches to the individual compartments. Piping is arranged, where possible, in pipe tunnels or duct keels to avoid penetrating watertight double-bottom tanks. Bilge pipes are independent of piping for any other duties such as ballast or fresh water. Passenger ship bilge mains must run at least 20% of the ship's beam inside of the side shell; in addition, any branches further outboard must have a non-return valve fitted.
Bilge pipe suction lines are sized according to an empirical formula. Minimum branch and main size are 50 mm and 65 mm, respectively, and the maximum size is 100 mm for both. Bilge piping may be constructed of cast iron, steel, copper or other suitable approved materials. It is usual to employ galvanised steel piping in bilge systems.
At least four independent power-driven pumps must be connected to the bilge main. Most ships employ two bilge pumps and have bilge main connections on the ballast and main circulating pumps. Where possible these pumps should be located in separate watertight compartments. One bilge system pump must be capable of operation under reasonable damage conditions. A submersible pump, remotely controlled, would provide this facility. Pumps fitted to the bilge system must be self-priming or connected to a priming system or device.

Ballast system

Requirements for the ballast system of a dry cargo ship are largely similar to those for the bilge system. There must be adequate protection provided against ballast water entering dry cargo or adjoining spaces. Connections between bilge and ballast lines must be by non-return valve. Locking valves or blanking arrangements must prevent accidental emptying of deep tanks or flooding. Where tanks are employed for oil fuel or ballast, effective isolating systems must be used.
A ballast pumping arrangement for a 26 000 deadweight tonnes bulk carrier is shown in Figure 7.16.


Fire main

All passenger ships of 4000 gross tonnes and above must have at least three power-driven fire pumps. All cargo ships in excess of 1000 gross tonnes must have at least two independently driven fire pumps. Where these two pumps are located in one area an emergency fire pump must be provided and located remote from the machinery space. The emergency fire pump must be independently driven by a compression ignition engine or other approved means. Water mains of sufficient diameter to provide an adequate water supply for the simultaneous operation of two fire hoses must be connected to the fire pumps. An isolating valve is fitted to the machinery pace fire main to enable the emergency fire pump to supply the deck lines, if the machinery space main is        broken or the pump is out of action.       
A diagrammatic arrangement of a fire and washdeck system is shown in Figure 7.17. The system is designed to supply valves with hose connections on all the superstructure and upper decks. Relief valves are fitted at either end of the main to ensure that working pressure is not exceeded. The water may be supplied by the machinery space fire pump, the fire and tank-cleaning pump or the emergency fire pump located in the forecastle. Additional lines are led to the hawse pipe for anchor washing and the garbage tank for flushing.
The emergency fire pump in this arrangement is supplied by a booster pump fitted near the bottom of the ship. The booster pump is driven hydraulically from one end of the emergency fire pump, the other end having another sea water pump to further pressurise the water. A diesel engine drives the pumps fitted at either end.


General services

Many other pumping and piping services are fitted in ships for the various domestic, cargo and machinery requirements. For further details of these systems reference can be made to the previously mentioned work. Marine Auxiliary Machinery, by Souchotte and Smith.


Scuppers

Direct drainage of the open decks above the freeboard deck is achieved by means of scuppers. A typical arrangement is shown in Figure 7.18. in enclosed spaces, such as bathrooms or galleys, the scuppers are led to the bilges. A scupper pot is fitted in a deck and acts as the collecting point for water. A pipe is connected to the underside to dram the water directly to the bilge (Figure 7.19).

Figure 7.18 Deck scupper arrangement

Figure 7.19 Accommodation scupper arrangement


Sounding pipes

Sounding pipes are fitted to all tanks to enable soundings to be taken and the depth of liquid present to be measured. Reference to the tank calibration tables will then permit the quantity of liquid present in the tank to be found.
Sounding pipes are made as straight as practicable and are led above the bulkhead deck, except for certain machinery space tanks (Figure 7.20). A minimum bore of 32 mm is required for sounding pipes. This may be greater where a refrigerated space is passed through to allow for icing up. Where the sounding pipe does not emerge above the bulkhead deck. Some form of self-dosing device should be fitted, e.g. a weighted cock. This would prevent flooding in the event of an overflow, contamination due to the entry or other liquids or the escape or hazardous gases from the tank. A striking plate is fitted at the bottom of an open pipe where the sounding rod falls; alternatively, a closed pipe arrangement may be used (Figure 7.20). A number of patent sounding devices are available and may, with approval, be fitted instead of sounding pipes.


Cargo systems
Cargo pumps and piping systems are installed on tankers to discharge and load the Liquid cargo. Separate ballast-pumping systems arc also provided for ballast only tanks which are filled during ballast voyages.
System choice and its flexibility depend upon the range of cargoes, the vessel's trading pattern and what the owner is prepared to pay for. The standard system employs several ring mains along the tank length with branches off to the individual tanks. Other systems are in use, for instance, employing large sluice valves to empty the tanks one to another. The pump suctions are then taken from the aftermost tank with the vessel trimmed by the stern.
An example of a ring main system for a very large crude carrier is shown diagrammatically in Figure 7.21. Three mains are employed to serve the various tanks. This arrangement also enables different grades of oil to be carried in the tanks served by each main. Branches are led off into each of the centre and wing tanks and are fitted with isolating valves. Cross-connections are arranged between the mains, and direct-loading pipes from the deck manifolds join the mains. Two stripping mains are also fitted and led forward with branches off to the various tanks. The stripping lines are used to discharge the last few hundred tonnes of cargo which the main suctions cannot handle.
The main cargo pumps are steam-driven horizontal or vertical single-stage centrifugal pumps. For the system shown in Figure 7.21 one pump is provided for each main. The driving motor or turbine is located in the machinery space and the drive passes through a gastight seal in the pumproom bulkhead.
The stripping mains arc connected in the pumproom to two stripping pumps which are usually of the positive-displacement type.

Figure 7.20 Sounding pipe arrangements

Deck pipework
A particular feature of tankers is the large quantity of piping seen on deck. A typical arrangement is shown diagrammatically in Figure 7.22. The cargo pumps discharge into mains which pass up through the pumproom and along the upper deck to midships. The mains branch into crossovers to port and starboard and are fitted with Y-pieces at the manifolds which are grouped near to the ship's side.

Products tankers
More complex piping arrangements with independent lines are necessary on products tankers to avoid contamination between the different cargo 'parcels'. More than one pumproom may be fitted on such ships, or individual pumps in all tanks with no pumprooms. Arrangements for flushing lines using water or a portion of the cargo may increase the flexibility of a particular system.


Ballasting arrangements

Many tankers operate in the ballast condition on every other voyage. A sufficient quantity of ballast sea water must therefore be loaded on board to provide the ship with satisfactory seakeeping properties. Certain tanks are designated ballast only and are filled by the ballast pump and piping system. Certain cargo tanks may be loaded with sea water ballast using the cargo pumps with a sea suction.

Insulation

Thermal insulation

A ship's steel hull and structure will conduct heat very well. In way of heated tanks, refrigerated spaces and exposed accommodation spaces some form of insulation is necessary to reduce the beat flow to an acceptable level.
Various materials such as glass fibre, cork and some foam plastics are in use as insulation. Glass fibre matting or sheet is used in modern ships since it is easily fitted, is fire resistant, does not rot and does not support animal life. The amount of insulation fitted in a compartment is decided by the temperature which is to be maintained or accepted in the compartment (Figure 7.23).
Fastening is now largely by random pinning, using a stud gun to fix the pins to the steelwork. The pins penetrate the insulation, and caps fitted on the ends of the pins hold the insulation in place. Some slab insulation may be glued to the steelwork. Joins between sections of insulation are sealed, usually with an adhesive tape. In accommodation spaces, insulation will be behind decorative panels. ln places where it is exposed to possible damage, a protective cladding or lining, such as galvanised mild steel sheeting, may be fitted. Insulation on tank-tops must likewise be protected from possible damage or be of a substantial nature in itself. Over oil tanks a space must be left to avoid possible contamination of the insulation. This space is not required when a bituminous covering is placed over the steel surface.
Plugs over manholes in cargo tanks and also hatch covers must be insulated to avoid any areas through which heat might be conducted. Special scupper arrangements are necessary to avoid heat transfer in refrigerated holds. This is achieved by a brine seal in an S-bend trap. The bilges may thus be pumped out but the sealing liquid. although diluted, will not be removed (Figure 7.24).

Acoustic insulation

Sound results from the movement of all particles and travels in the form of waves away from the source. There are many sources of sound on board ship, such as propulsion engines, auxiliary engines, large fans and ventilation plants. These would have a cumulative disturbing affect on personnel if allowed to continue unchecked.
Various countries now have either codes of practice for noise levels in ships, or regulations relating to noise levels in ship spaces. Maximum noise levels are given for particular spaces using a weighted sound pressure level or db(A) value. Most ships at sea, however, would not meet these criteria. New ship designs will require consideration of noise levels in the very early stages if an acceptable noise environment is to be obtained .
Two approaches are made to the solution of the problem. First, rooms and areas which are occupied for any length of time are fitted out in such a manner as to be as sound absorbing as possible. The second method is to isolate or silence the sound from occupied spaces.
Increasing the sound-absorption capacity of a room is achieved by using a variety of sound absorbers. These include membrane absorbers such as thin panels, resonant absorbers such as perforated ceiling boards and porous absorbers such as mineral wool. Sounds can be isolated by the use of flexible connections in ducting, flexible mountings on machinery, and sound insulating the surroundings of a noisy space. Air-conditioning plant noise can be eliminated by the use of duct and baffle silencers and sound attenuating supply and exhaust fittings. Figures 7.25(a) and 7.25(b) illustrate the problems to be found in a ship's accommodation and the various solutions that can be adopted.


1 Sound from fan through unit.
2 Sound from duct system
3 Throttle sound in unit.
4 Sound transmitted through duct system.
5 Airborne transmitted sound.
6 Sound from fan.
7 Hull vibrations.
8 Sound transmitted through accommodation.
9 Echo sounds.
Figure 7.25(a) Sound insulation - accommodation with bed sound comfort

1 Silencer after fan.
2 Duct system without sharp edges.
3 Quiet throttling and silencer.
4 Flexible connection.
5 Vibration insulation.
6 Vibration damper (sound from fan).
7 'Floating' floor.
8 Sound insulation.
9 Sound absorbing ceiling.
Figure 7.25(b) Sound Insulation - accommodation with good sound comfort

Figure 7.26 Horizontal sliding watertight door

Watertight doors

Watertight bulkheads are, of course, specifically designed and constructed to ensure their watertightness. Where openings are necessary in these bulkheads special watertight doors must be fitted. On cargo ships with a shaft tunnel, the tunnel entrance will have a watertight door fitted. On passenger ships, with their large areas of accommodation and access requirements, a greater number of watertight doors will be fitted.
Where openings are cut into bulkheads they must be reinforced to maintain the strength of the bulkhead. This is particularly so in the lower regions of watertight bulkheads, where the greatest loading occurs. Where stiffeners are cut or increased in spacing in way of a watertight door, adequate reinforcing is required. The watertight door has a heavy framework which further stiffens the bulkhead in way of the opening. The size of the opening is kept as small as possible.
All doors fitted below the waterline are of the sliding type, either horizontal or vertical in operation. It is usual to use horizontal sliding doors, except where space limitations require the vertical type.
The sliding door must be able to close against a list of 15 degrees to port or starboard. It mut be operable from the vicinity of the door, in addition to a point above the bulkhead deck. The remote operating point must have an indicator showing the door position.
A horizontal sliding watertight door of Stone Manganese Marine Ltd manufacture is shown in Figure 7.26. A stout door frame is fitted directly into the bulkhead and provides the trackway along which the door slides. The door is moved by a hydraulic cylinder which may be power operated or hand pumped. A special solenoid spool valve which may be remotely or manually operated provides the basis of the control system. Bridge operation, local manual over ride operation and local emergency control of the door are possible. Operating the hand pump together with manual movement of the solenoid valve provides local or remote emergency operation. Powered operation is possible from the bridge or by manual movement of the solenoid valves at either the local or remote pumping stations.
Bridge operation is only usual on passenger ships where there may be a large number of watertight doors.
Watertight doors are pressure tested under a head of water corresponding to their bulkhead position in the event of the ship flooding. This usually takes place at the manufacturers' works.
Above the waterline, in certain approved positions, hinged watertight doors are permitted. These will be similar in construction to the weathertight doors described in Section F of Chapter 5.
A Door-operating cylinder.
B Door-control valve, solenoid/manual operated.
C Power unit comprising:
Pump and motor unit
Motor starter
Door-control valve (manual)
Relief valve and pressure gauge
Red and green light indication
Hand pump (emergency remote)
Supply tank
Level gauge (dipstick)
Oil filter and strainer.
D Hand pump (local).
E Stop valve (servicing).
F Combined alarm closing limit and indicator light switch.
G Operating limit witch.
H Switch strikers.
J Door stop sited behind door cylinder
K Warning plate.
L Alarm.
M Bridge controller/indicator.
N Key-operated isolating switch (1 each side of the bulkhead).
P Non-return valve.

Stabilisers

The motions of a ship in a seaway can result in various undesirable effect, examples of which are cargo damage and human discomfort. Only the rolling or a ship can be effectively reduced by stabilisation. Two basically different stabilising systems are used on ships - the fin and the tank. Both systems attempt to reduce rolling by producing an opposite force to that attempting to roll the ship.

Fin stabiliser

One or more pairs of fins are fitted on a ship, one on each side, see Figure 7.27. The size or area of the fins is governed by ship factors such as breadth, draught, displacement, and so on, but is very small compared with the size of the ship. The fins may be retractable, i.e. pivoting or sliding within the ships form, or fixed. They act to apply a righting moment to the ship as it is inclined by a wave or force on one side. The angle of tilt of the fin and the resulting moment on the ship is determined by a sensing control system. The forward speed of the ship enables the fins to generate the thrust which results in the righting moment.

Figure 7.27 Fin stabiliser

The operating system can be compared to that of the steering gear, in that a signal from the control unit causes a movement of the tin which, when it reaches the desired value, is brought to rest. The fin movement takes place as a result of a hydraulic power unit incorporating a type of variable displacement pump.
The effectiveness of the fins as stabilisers depends upon their speed of movement, which must be rapid from one extreme point to the other. The fins are rectangular in shape and streamlined in section. The use of a movable flap or a fixed and movable portion is to provide a greater restoring moment to the ship for a slightly more complicated mechanism.
The control system is based upon an acceleration sensor. This unit provides a signal which after electronic integration provides a measurement of roll velocity and angle. These various parameters are all used to bring about a suitable fin movement which will oppose the roll.
Fin stabilisers provide accurate and effective roll stabilisation in return for a complex installation which, in merchant vessels, is usually limited to passenger ships. It is co be noted that at low ship speeds the stabilising power falls off, and when stationary no stabilisation is possible.

Tank stabiliser

A tank stabiliser provides a righting or anti-rolling force as a result of the delayed flow of fluid in a suitably positioned transverse tank. The system operation is independent of ship speed and will work when the ship is at rest .
Consider a mass of water in an athwartships tank. As the ship rolls the water will be moved, but a moment or two after the ship rolls. Thus, when the ship is finishing its roll and about to return, the still moving water will oppose the return roll. The water mass thus acts against the roll at each ship movement. This athwartships tank is sometimes referred to as 'flume'. The system is considered passive, since the water flow is activated by gravity.
A wing tank system arranged for controlled passive operation is shown in Figure 7.28. The greater height of tank at the sides permits a larger water build up and thus a greater moment to resist the roll. The rising fluid level must not however fill the wing tank. The air duct between the two wing tanks contains valves which are operated by a roll sensing device. The differential air pressure between tanks is regulated to allow the fluid now to be controlled and 'phased' for maximum roll stabilisation.
A tank system must be specifically designed for a particular ship by using data from model tests. The water level in the system is critical and must be adjusted according to the ship's loaded condition. Also there is a free surface effect, resulting from the moving water which effectively reduces the stability of the ship. The tank system does however stabilise at zero speed and is a much less complex installation than a fin stabiliser.


舾装

舱口盖
舱口盖用于使货舱防水,保护货物并加固舱口的结构。通常使用两种基本类型:安装在舱口横梁上的木制舱口盖和各种设计的专利钢盖。舱口盖安装在舱口围板的顶部,这些在第5章中已经描述过了。露天甲板围板的高度由载重线规则设定(见第10章)。中间甲板围板与甲板齐平或几乎齐平,以减少对该区域货物装载的干扰。


图7.1木制舱口盖

木制舱口盖
横梁和纵向舱口板的组合构成了木制舱口盖布置(图7.1)。长度为舱口的宽度的I形截面梁,沿着舱口的长度间隔安装,被称为舱口梁、移动梁或腹板。如果是滑动型的,梁的末端可以安装在围板侧的槽或支架中,或者锁定在轨道上的位置。梁端部由复板额外加固。取舱口板末端的横梁有一个垂直扁钢,用来固定舱口板。
舱口板纵向安装在舱口梁上,其末端由金属带保护。板的厚度至少为60毫米,跨度大于1.5米的板的厚度更大。舱口板的滚轮梁布置是相同的,滚轮梁只是加速了舱口的打开和关闭。至少两块防水油布必须安装在舱口板上,并适当地固定在舱口围板周围。板条、系缆扣和楔子用于“固定”防水布。在用板条钉牢防水布后,需要钢锁杆或一些合适的附加锁定装置来固定每个舱口盖部分。

钢制舱口盖
多家制造商提供各种设计的专利钢舱口盖。大多数设计采用多个自支撑钢盖,这些钢盖使用由绞盘操作的单线牵引或液压或电力来完全封闭舱口打开和关闭装置。盖子在沿着舱口围板顶部的轨道上的轮子上运行。这些独立的部分或者铰接在一起,或者通过链条相互连接。盖子最终在离开舱口的某一点收起。
麦基嘉钢舱口盖布置如图7.2所示。舱口盖可以通过液压或绞盘操作的单线牵引来关闭或打开。舱口滚轮的轨道由围板上的平台顶部形成。在围板轨道上舱口的置放端处,围板的每一侧都设置有一个垂直板。舱口盖上的上辊骑在该板上,然后盖子倾斜到垂直位置。因此,这些盖子被紧凑地置放在远离舱口的地方。舱口盖在偏心辊上运行,偏心辊在升高位置时充当轮子,在降低位置时离开围板,以使盖能够被紧固。
装配式钢板盖带有用于加强结构的加强筋或腹板。盖的端部在关闭位置重叠。安装有可压缩填料的凹槽围绕盖子的外边缘。当盖板通过夹板固定在围板的凸起边缘上时,形成水密密封,不需要防水油布。盖子之间的横向接缝具有类似的密封布置。图7.2所示的夹板装置是自动的。在夹紧之前,盖轮落入围板的槽中,在松开后通过液压方式升起。滑杆安装在顶部栏杆下方的侧围板和端围板。钩子被定位在夹板,并且可以通过围板轨道中的槽枢转。双动液压缸移动杆来提升或降低吊钩。


图7.2麦基嘉钢舱口盖


图7.3自动周边夹板


图7.4小型水密舱口盖a)舱口剖面图;(b)舱口盖的平面图
在升起位置,挂钩与扣片接合,扣片将舱盖部分向下拉至密封条。对于横向夹板,使用扭力杆装置。扭杆末端的杆臂。这将夹板凸耳压在相邻舱口段末端的压力垫上。外围夹板布置如图7.3所示。


小舱口盖
许多小的出入口、舱入口等,装有钢结构的小舱口盖。
典型的小舱口盖如图7.4所示。围板边缘被盖子周围的多个紧固夹或“卡爪”压入橡胶垫圈中,从而形成防水密封。这些把手被安排用于出入时内部或外部操作。有时会安装一个配重来方便打开盖子。

系泊设备和布置
绞盘和起锚机位于艏楼和艉楼甲板上,有时也位于上层甲板上,当船舶到达和离开其各个停靠港时,执行船舶所需的系泊和系缆任务。在甲板上和甲板边缘周围提供各种配件,以帮助系泊操作,并为系泊和绞缆提供畅通的运行或引导。这些配件的例子是船上的系船柱和各种类型的导缆器。
第5章D节中提到的起锚机有弯曲的末端,用于系泊船只。一个或多个绞缆机安装在船尾甲板上,用于类似的任务。如第6章所述,实支座将荷载传递到甲板上,并加固甲板。较大的船只在上层甲板上也装有系泊绞车。一旦船靠岸,系船柱或系缆桩用于系泊船,并焊接或栓接至甲板或焊接至甲板的箱形结构,如图7.5(a)所示。必须始终通过系船柱和所有系泊配件提供足够的结构支撑,通常是通过对下面的甲板进行额外加固。
导缆器用于将缆索或系泊缆引导至系船柱或系泊绞车。导缆器附在甲板、升高的底座或甲板和舷墙上。可以看到几种不同的类型,例如多角度导缆滚轮、基座导缆滚轮、导缆滚轮和巴拿马导缆孔。多角度导缆滚轮由两个水平滚轮和两个垂直滚轮组成,钢丝穿过滚轮之间的孔,如图7.5(b)所示。基座导缆滚轮由安装在升高的基座或底座上的单个水平或垂直滚轮组成,如图7.5(c)所示。导缆滚轮是一个或多个位于钢制底座上的垂直滚轮,可直接固定在甲板上或甲板和舷墙上,如图7.5(d)所示。巴拿马导缆孔是一个几乎椭圆形的铸件开口,安装在舷墙上适当加强的孔中,如图7.5(e)所示。
多角度导缆滚轮安装在甲板边缘,并减少了导辊或其它导缆器的数量,这些导缆器为绞盘提供了清晰的导线。基座导缆滚轮引导钢丝穿过甲板到达绞车,避开任何障碍物。导缆滚轮在甲板边缘用于引入系泊和绞缆。巴拿马导缆孔安装在通过巴拿马运河的所有船只中心线上的艏楼舷墙的最前面。巴拿马导缆孔也根据需要用于甲板边缘周围的其他位置。
对于船上可能出现的各种系泊和系缆布置,提供了“引线布置”图。这显示了各种缆穿过和越过船甲板上的各种导缆器和绞盘卷绕鼓的运行。图7.6示出了这种船舶艏端的布置。


图7.5 (a)预制系船柱;(b)多角度导缆器;(c)基座导缆器;
(d)双辊导缆器;(e)巴拿马导缆孔

桅杆、井架和甲板起重机

桅杆
船上的桅杆是一个了望台,也是灯、雷达、天线等导航设备的安装点。通过梯子进入上部平台,根据桅杆尺寸,梯子可以安装在外部或内部。
安装在油轮上的前桅如图7.7所示。结构是由内部用腹板加强的轻质板。D型横截面因其流线型、阻力减小而常用。上部平台还通过肘板支撑在桅杆的外板上。桅杆完全焊接在首楼甲板的甲板室和上层甲板上。实圆棒用于加固板的每个自由边缘,在竖立之前,桅杆内部涂有沥青溶液。


图7.7油轮前桅

萨姆森柱
杂货船上的一些桅杆也兼作货物装卸用井架的支柱。萨姆森支柱也更具体地用于支撑井架。有时也使用萨姆森支柱或双足桅杆的系留布置。货物装卸作业中使用的桅杆和支柱的尺寸和结构在船级社规范中给出,并取决于吊杆的安全工作负荷(SWL)。由于其结构和与甲板的连接,大多数桅杆是自支撑的。只有特殊的重型起重井架需要在立柱顶部和甲板之间安装钢丝拉索或防喷器。
萨姆森立柱结构为管状型钢,内部由腹板加固。在与支柱连接的地方提供了更厚的板或复板。吊杆是无缝管,通常在弯矩最大的中间区域直径较大。各种鹅颈管和端部配件在管端焊接插入板。
支柱与甲板的连接各不相同,但必须始终提供足够的加强和支撑。桅杆房安装在一些桅杆或萨姆森柱的底部,对于加强结构可能有帮助也可能没有。一些柱子被放入中层甲板或连接到上层建筑的角落以获得支撑。井架负荷越大,需要的加强就越多,通常是通过在甲板下安装额外的腹板,并在桅杆或支柱下安装比普通舱壁加强件和肘板更重的腹板。

吊杆
用于货物装卸工作的起重机可以以几种不同的方式布置或装配,以满足不同的人力需求、货物提升能力或提升周期时间。

联合采购
联合采购吊杆是一种常用的货物装卸设备。使用两个吊杆,一个用于垂直于舱口,另一个用于垂直于码头或船舷。两个井架上的吊索或钢丝都被拴在同一个货钩上。因此,通过分别使用两个绞盘控制器并一起使用,吊钩在货舱上升起或下降,在甲板上移动,并且可以在船舷上升起和下降。
这种装置是安全的,因为只有负载移动,并且需要两个可靠的绞车操作员。然而,它只适用于大约1.5吨以下的轻负载。联合采购钻机如图7.8所示。


图7.8联合采购吊杆

摆动吊杆
最快和最可靠的货物装卸方法是通过摆动吊杆实现的。这种布置需要一个无遮挡的摆动弧度的长吊杆。通常设置一个可调节的跨度,以便于舱口和船舷上方码头的管道安装。这是通过独立于货物绞车的顶丝和绞车实现的。横摇井架钻机如图7.9所示。


图7.9摆动吊杆


图7.10“溜溜球”布置


1井架头配件。
2配有导辊的摆滑轮。
3上部货舱。
4连接扁钢。
5下部跨距滑轮。
6跨距旋转。
7交叉树。
8牵引盘进口。
9下货舱滑轮。
10连接横骨。
11 Flemish钩旋转眼。
12 Flemish钩。
13梯。
14鹅颈销插座。
15下货滑轮的紧固装置。
16倾斜装置。
17吊杆销。
18鹅颈和鹅颈插销插座。
19绞盘。
图7.11 Stűlken重型起重井架
The two most common types of slings used in material handling applications using single part six-strand wire rope are the mechanical spliced Flemish Eye Sling and the mechanical spliced Returned Loop Eye Sling. Some people call the Returned Loop Eye Sling a Turnback Eye Sling.
在使用单股六股钢丝绳的物料搬运应用中使用的两种最常见类型的吊索是机械拼接的Flemish眼吊索和机械拼接的Returned Loop Eye吊索。有些人称之为返回环眼吊索折返眼吊索。
Visually, the two methods of termination look somewhat different when viewing next to each other. The Flemish Eye Sling normally has a swaged steel sleeve that is tapered down on one end, where a Returned Loop Eye Sling has one or more, straight non-tapered steel or aluminum sleeves. However, due to different fabrication methods and types of sleeves used by some sling manufacturers, the differences are not always so visually evident to the untrained eye.
从视觉上看,这两种终止方法在相邻查看时看起来有些不同。Flemish吊环吊索通常有一个在一端逐渐变细的型锻钢套管,而返回环吊环吊索有一个或多个直的非锥形钢或铝套管。然而,由于一些吊索制造商使用不同的制造方法和套筒类型,对于未经训练的眼睛来说,差异并不总是如此明显。
Although both types of slings use one or more metal sleeves swaged over the rope juncture, the fabrication method to produce each type of sling is different.
尽管两种类型的吊索都使用一个或多个型锻在绳索接合处上的金属套筒,但是生产每种类型的吊索的制造方法是不同的。
The Wire Rope Technical Board Sling User’s Manual describes the different fabrication methods as follows:
《钢丝绳技术委员会吊索用户手册》描述了不同的制造方法,如下所示:
“The returned loop is fabricated by forming a loop at the end of the wire rope, sliding one or more metal sleeves over the short end of the loop eye pressing these sleeves to secure the end of the rope to the sling body.” (See picture below.) Having one metal sleeve at each eye is the most common practice.
回圈的制作方法是在钢丝绳端部形成一个圈,将一个或多个金属套筒套在圈眼的短端上,压紧这些套筒,将钢丝绳端部固定在吊索体上。(如下图所示。)最常见的做法是在每只圈眼上安装一个金属套管。
“The Flemish eye is fabricated by opening or unlaying the rope body into two parts, one having three strands and the other having the remaining three strands and the rope core. The rope is unlayed to allow the loop or eye to be formed by looping one part in one direction and the other part in the other direction and laying the rope back together. The strands are rolled back around the rope body. A metal sleeve is then slipped over the ends of the splice and pressed (swaged) to secure the ends to the body of the sling.”
“佛兰德眼是通过将绳体打开或拆开成两部分制成的,一部分有三股,另一部分有其余三股和绳芯。解开绳索以允许通过将一部分在一个方向上成环而将另一部分在另一方向上成环并将绳索放回到一起而形成环或眼。绳股绕绳体回卷。然后将金属套管套在接头的两端,并加压(型锻)以将两端固定在吊索的主体上。”

It is worth noting that the termination (splice) efficiency or the available strength of the wire rope sling after the fabrication method is complete is typically 90% or higher if fabricated correctly for each of the two methods described above, depending on the diameter of rope and other variables involved in producing the splice. Example of efficiency: A 94% nominal splice efficiency would mean you have 94% of the minimum breaking force (MBF) of the wire rope left after the termination or swaging method is complete.
值得注意的是,如果对于上述两种方法中的每一种正确地制造,则在制造方法完成之后,钢丝绳吊索的端接(拼接)效率或可用强度通常为90%或更高,这取决于绳索的直径和制造拼接所涉及的其它变量。效率示例:94%的标称拼接效率意味着在端接或型锻方法完成后,钢丝绳的最小破断拉力(MBF)为94%。
Now let’s hit a few key considerations for both types of slings being discussed.
现在,让我们讨论一下这两种吊索的几个关键注意事项。
Flemish Eye Sling 佛兰芒吊眼带

•        The Flemish Eye Sling is the more popular of the two-wire rope slings. This is mainly because of its rugged capabilities and ability to withstand abuse coupled with the fact that users prefer the backup splice under the swaged sleeve.
佛兰芒眼吊索是双钢丝绳吊索中比较流行的一种。这主要是因为其坚固耐用的性能和承受滥用的能力,以及用户更喜欢在型锻套管下的备用接头。
•        Normally, a steel sleeve is swaged on a steel wire rope. Thus, no dissimilar materials are in contact with each other that can quicken corrosion attack.
通常情况下,钢套筒被型锻在钢丝绳上。因此,不同的材料不会相互接触而加速腐蚀。
•        ASME B30.9 DOES NOT require a proof test for Flemish Eye Slings unless the user requires it.
ASME B30.9不要求对Flemish吊环进行验证试验,除非用户要求。
•        The Flemish Eye termination has a more streamlined profile that does not get as easily snagged on obstructions.
佛兰芒眼终端有一个更流线形的轮廓,不容易被障碍物勾住。
Returned Loop Eye (Turnback Eye Slings)
折返环眼(折返环眼吊索)

•         Typically, these slings are quicker and cheaper to manufacture, excluding proof test time and costs.
通常,这些吊索制造更快且更便宜,不包括验证测试时间和成本。
•        The strength of the sling depends entirely upon the integrity of the swaged sleeve. If the sleeve fails there is an immediate loss of load. Users in the field need to inspect the sleeves closely before each use.
吊索的强度完全取决于型锻套筒的完整性。如果套筒失效,则会立即损失载荷。现场用户需要在每次使用前仔细检查套管。
•        If aluminum sleeves are used on carbon steel wire rope, then the user may experience quicker deterioration due to the electrochemical reactions between the different metals. Saltwater and corrosive environments are particularly damaging.
如果在碳钢丝绳上使用铝套,则用户可能会由于不同金属之间的电化学反应而经历更快的劣化。盐水和腐蚀性环境尤其具有破坏性。
•        ASME B30.9 DOES require that all Returned Loop Eye Slings (Turnback Eye Slings) be proof tested by the sling manufacturer or a qualified person.
ASME B30.9确实要求吊索制造商或合格人员对所有返回环眼吊索(折返环眼吊索)进行验证试验。
These are just some of the main differences between these two most common types of wire rope slings.
这些只是这两种最常见类型的钢丝绳吊索之间的一些主要区别。

重型起重井架
对于比单个井架的安全工作负荷更重的负荷,可以使用通过“溜溜球”齿轮装置连接在一起的两个井架,如图7.10所示。在操作过程中,井架头必须保持在一起,平衡载荷的中央游动滑车的安全工作载荷必须大于被提升的货物。许多杂货船都装有一种特殊的重型起重井架,并配有与其设计安全工作负荷相适应的钻机和采购设备。
各种专利重型起重井架可用,一个例子是图7.11所示的Stűlken井架。Stűlken井架的安全工作负荷高达300吨,位于两个向外倾斜的锥形管柱之间。提供了几个绞车,用于各种起重、回转和顶部浇料任务。所有的控制都以杠杆的形式排列在一个控制台上,可以由一个人操作。这种重型起重井架可用于其前方或后方的任何一个舱口。较小的井架也由管柱装配,用于正常的货物作业。

甲板起重机
在许多现代大型船舶上,井架已经被安装在货舱之间平台上的甲板起重机所取代(图7.12)。甲板起重机提供了一个立即运行的货物装卸设备,具有最低的索具要求和简单、直接的单人操作。起重机的安全工作负荷由其货物装卸任务决定,根据需要,可提供3-5吨至10-15吨的设计。双齿轮传动是一些大型起重机的特点,可以更快地处理较轻的负载。有三种基本类型的起重机可用-普通货物起重机、抓斗起重机和双吊布置。
普通货物起重机用于货船和散装货船。抓斗起重机在处理散装材料时与机器操作的抓斗一起使用。它需要一个多线装置来操作抓具。双吊使用标准起重机,如果需要的话,标准起重机可以成对或协调操作来提升更重的负载,如集装箱。该系统通常由一名操作员使用两台起重机中的主从控制系统。公共旋转平台的使用使得这种布置成为可能。

起重机平台
甲板起重机位于离甲板一定距离的平台上,为起重机操作员提供清晰不间断的货舱和码头区视野(图7.13)。起重机也围绕这个平台旋转。起重机的底座通常是圆形的,由钢板制成,带有密集的垂直肋或肘板。该底座通常被焊接到或者是被焊接到船的甲板上的升高的柱子或平台的整体部分。应该在底座周围和下方提供足够的结构支撑和加固。


图7.12普通货物起重机


图7.13起重机基座和底座

泵送和管道布置
对于船上需要的许多服务,提供了各种管道和泵系统。一些系统,如舱底排水和消防总管,是船上发生损坏或火灾时的法定要求。我们将依次研究各个不同的系统。

舱底水系统
任何船舶的舱底水管道系统的设计和布置,必须使船舶在平浮或向任何一边倾斜不超过5度时,任何舱室都能排水。机舱内必须至少有两个吸口,每侧一个。一个吸入口连接到舱底水总管,另一个连接到独立的动力驱动泵或喷射器。还必须提供紧急舱底水吸入口,通常连接到容量最大的泵上。图7.14显示了26000载重吨散货船的舱底泵系统的示意图。


图7.14 货舱舱底水系统


图7.15 (a)舱底滤盒;(b)舱底泥浆箱

除了机器和隧道空间吸入管之外,所有设备上都安装有舱底滤盒。板上有最大直径为10 mm的穿孔,以提供至少两倍于吸入管的吸入面积。在机舱和隧道舱底管路中,安装了泥浆箱。泥浆箱安装在管道长度之间,有一个穿孔的中心板。使用滤盒和泥浆箱可防止大物体进入管道,并保护泵的内部零件(图7.15)。
单独隔间的吸入阀必须是拧紧式止回阀(SNDR)类型,以防止回流。所有其他阀门必须为止回阀(NR)型。左右舷舱底阀通常集中在机舱艏端的分配箱中。舱底管道由通向各个舱室的首尾总管和吸入支管组成。在可能的情况下,管道布置在管道隧道或管道龙骨中,以避免穿透水密双层底舱。舱底管道独立于任何其他用途的管道,如压载或淡水。客船的舱底总管必须沿着舷侧外板内至少20%的船宽布置;此外,任何更外侧的分支必须安装止回阀。
根据经验公式确定舱底水管吸入管路的尺寸。最小分支和主要尺寸分别为50毫米和65毫米,最大尺寸为100毫米。舱底管道可由铸铁、钢、铜或其他合适的批准材料制成。通常在舱底系统中使用镀锌钢管。
至少四个独立的电动泵必须连接到舱底总管。大多数船舶使用两个舱底泵,并且在压载泵和主循环泵上具有舱底总管连接。在可能的情况下,这些泵应位于单独的水密舱室内。一个舱底系统泵必须能够在合理的损坏条件下运行。遥控潜水泵可以提供这种设施。安装在舱底系统上的泵必须是自吸式的或连接到一个启动系统或装置上。

压载系统
对干货船压载系统的要求与对舱底系统的要求非常相似。必须提供足够的保护,防止压载水进入干货或相邻的空间。舱底和压载管路之间的连接必须通过止回阀。锁定阀或堵塞装置必须防止深舱意外排空或溢流。当舱用于燃油或压舱物时,必须使用有效的隔离系统。
26000载重吨散货船的压载泵送布置如图7.16所示。


图7.16 一条散货船的压载水系统

消防用水管
所有4000总吨及以上的客船必须至少有三台电动消防泵。所有超过1000总吨的货船必须至少有两个独立驱动的消防泵。如果这两个泵位于同一个区域,则必须提供一个应急消防泵,并远离机舱。应急消防泵必须由压燃式发动机或其他认可的方式独立驱动。必须将直径足够大的水管连接到消防泵上,以便为两条消防软管的同时运行提供充足的供水。机舱消防总管装有隔离阀,使应急消防泵在机舱总管破裂或泵停止运作时,能向甲板管路供水。       

图7.17消防和冲洗甲板系统(H. 液压;G.V. 闸阀)

图7.17显示了消防和冲洗甲板系统的示意图。该系统旨在为所有上层建筑和上层甲板上的阀门提供软管连接。安全阀安装在主管道的两端,以确保不会超过工作压力。水可由机舱消防泵、消防和液舱清洗泵或位于首楼的应急消防泵供应。额外的管路引至锚链管用于洗锚,引至垃圾箱用于冲洗。
此布置中的应急消防泵由安装在船底附近的增压泵供应。增压泵由应急消防泵的一端液压驱动,另一端有另一台海水泵进一步对水加压。柴油主机驱动安装在两端的泵。

总用
许多其他的泵和管道服务安装在船上,用于各种本船、货物和机器需求。对于这些系统的进一步细节,可以参考前面提到的工作。Souchotte和Smith的《船用辅助机器》。

排水孔
干舷甲板以上的露天甲板的直接排水通过泄水孔实现。典型的布置如图7.18所示。在封闭空间,如浴室或厨房,排水口通向舱底。排水舱安装在甲板上,作为集水点。一根管道连接到底部,将水直接抽到舱底水系统(图7.19)。


图7.18甲板排水口布置

图7.19起居排水孔布置

测深管

所有舱都装有测深管,以便进行测深和测量液体深度。参考舱校准表,就可以确定舱中的液体量。
测深管在切实可行范围内尽量做成直的,并引至舱壁甲板之上,但某些机舱处的舱除外(图7.20)。测深管要求最小孔径为32毫米。当通过冷藏空间,这可能会是更大的尺寸以允许结冰。如测深管不露出舱壁甲板之上,应安装某种形式的自动关闭装置,如加重旋塞。这将防止溢流、由于其他液体的进入或危险气体从舱中逸出而造成的污染。在测深尺头下落时会撞击到的开口管底部装有防撞板板;或者,可以使用管道末端封闭的布置(在末端侧面开孔)(图7.20)。许多专利测深装置是可用的,经批准后,可以代替测深管安装。

图7.20测深管布置

货物系统
货泵和管道系统安装在油轮上,以卸载和装载液体货物。单独的压舱泵送系统也提供给在压舱航行期间被填充的仅压舱的舱。
系统的选择及其灵活性取决于货物的范围、船只的贸易模式和船东准备支付的费用。标准系统沿舱长度采用了几个环形主管道,分支通向各个舱。其他系统也在使用中,例如,使用大的闸阀一个接一个地排空舱。然后,泵的吸入口从最后一个舱中取出,此时船舶朝船尾纵倾。
图7.21示意性地示出了一个超大型原油运输船的环形干线系统的例子。三条干线用于为不同的舱供水。这种安排也使不同等级的油可以在每个总管的舱中输送。支管通向中舱和边舱,并装有隔离阀。总管之间布置有交叉连接,来自甲板管汇的直装管连接总管。还安装了两个剥离的总管,并通过分支将它们引向不同的舱。剥离的管路用于卸掉主吸管无法处理的最后几百吨货物。
主货泵是蒸汽驱动的卧式或立式单级离心泵。对于图7.21所示的系统,每个主管配有一个泵。驱动电机或涡轮机位于机舱内,驱动装置穿过泵室舱壁上的气密密封。
泵室中的剥离总管与两台剥离泵相连,这两台泵通常是正排量式的。


图7.23 舱内货物管路


图7.22 甲板上的货物管路

甲板管道工程
油轮的一个特点是甲板上有大量的管道。典型的布置如图7.22所示。货泵排放到总管中,总管向上穿过泵室,沿着上甲板到达船中部。总管分支到左舷和右舷的交叉点,并在靠近船舷的总管处安装Y形件。

成品油船
为了避免不同货物“包裹”之间的污染,成品油船上需要具有独立管路的更复杂的管道布置。在这种船上可以安装一个以上的泵室,或者在没有泵室的所有舱中安装单独的泵。使用水或一部分货物冲洗管路的布置可以增加特定系统的灵活性。

压载布置
许多油轮每隔一次航行都在压载状态下运行。因此,必须在船上装载足够量的压载海水,以使船具有令人满意的耐波性。某些舱被指定为仅压载舱,并由压载泵和管道系统填充。某些货油舱可以使用带有海吸口的货油泵装载海水压载。

隔热

热绝缘
一艘船的钢船体和结构将会很好地传导热量。对于加热舱、冷藏舱和暴露的起居舱,需要某种形式的隔热,以将对流降低到可接受的水平。
各种各样的材料,如玻璃纤维、软木和一些泡沫塑料都被用作绝缘材料。玻璃纤维席或片用于现代船舶,因为它容易安装,防火,不腐烂,不支持动物的生命。安装在隔间内的隔热量取决于隔间内要保持或接受的温度(图7.23)。
紧固现在主要是通过随机销连接,使用螺柱焊枪将销固定到钢结构上。插脚穿过绝缘材料,安装在插脚末端的帽将绝缘材料固定在适当的位置。一些板状绝缘材料可能会粘在钢结构上。绝缘部分之间的连接通常用胶带密封。在居住空间,隔热材料将位于装饰板后面。在可能受到损坏的地方,可以安装保护覆层或衬里,如镀锌软钢板。舱顶上的隔热层必须同样受到保护,以防可能的损坏,或者本身具有坚固的性质。舱上方必须留有空间,以避免绝缘材料可能被污染。当沥青覆盖层覆盖在钢表面时,不需要这个空间。
货舱人孔上的塞子和舱口盖必须绝缘,以避免热量可能通过任何区域传导。需要特殊的排水装置来避免冷藏舱内的热传递。这是通过S型弯管中的盐水密封实现的。因此,除了密封液体之外,舱底可以被泵出。但不会被清除(图7.24)。

图7.23 住舱绝缘布置

图7.24 冷冻货舱排水口弯管

隔音
声音是所有粒子运动的结果,以波的形式远离声源传播。船上有许多声源,如推进主机、辅机、大型风扇和通风设备。如果任其发展,这些问题将对人员产生累积的干扰影响。
各个国家现在都有船舶噪声等级的实施规范,或与船舶空间噪声等级相关的法规。使用加权声压级或db(A)值给出特定空间的最大噪声级。然而,大多数海上船只都不符合这些标准。如果要获得可接受的噪声环境,新船设计将要求在非常早的阶段就考虑噪声水平。
解决这个问题有两种方法。首先,不管房间和区域被住了多长时间,它们的装修都要尽可能的吸音。第二种方法是将声音从被住的空间隔离或消音。
增加房间的吸声能力是通过使用各种吸声器来实现的。这些包括薄膜吸收器如薄板、共振吸收器如穿孔天花板和多孔吸收器如矿棉。声音可以通过使用管道中的柔性连接、机器上的柔性安装以及对嘈杂空间周围的隔音来隔离。空调设备的噪音可以通过使用管道和挡板消音器以及消音供应和排气配件来消除。图7.25(a)和7.25(b)说明了船舶起居舱室中存在的问题以及可以采用的各种解决方案。


1风扇通过装置发出的声音。
2来自管道系统的声音
3单元油门声音。
4通过管道系统传输的声音。
5空气传播的声音。
6风扇发出的声音。
7船体振动。
8通过住舱传播的声音。
9回声。
图7.25(a)隔音-具有床音舒适度的住舱

1 风扇后有消音器。
2无锐边的管道系统。
3静音节流和消音器。
4柔性连接。
5隔振。
6减震器(风扇发出的声音)。
7“浮动”地板。
8隔音。
9吸音天花板。
图7.25(b)隔音-具有良好声音舒适度的房间


水密门

当然,水密舱壁是专门设计和建造的,以确保其水密性。在这些舱壁需要开口的地方,必须安装特殊的水密门。在有轴隧的货船上,隧道入口将安装一扇水密门。在客船上,由于其较大的居住面积和出入要求,将安装更多的水密门。
在舱壁上开孔的地方,必须对开孔进行加固,以保持舱壁的强度。在水密舱壁的较低区域尤其如此,此处出现最大载荷。如果加强筋由于水密门被切割或增加间距,则需要足够的加固。水密门有一个沉重的框架,进一步加强了开口处的舱壁。开口的尺寸保持尽可能小。
所有安装在水线以下的门都是滑动式的,可以水平或垂直操作。通常使用水平滑动门,除非空间限制需要垂直型。
滑动门必须能够在左舷或右舷倾斜15度时关闭。除了在舱壁甲板之上的一点外,还必须能在门的附近操作。远程操作点必须有一个指示器显示门的位置。
石锰船舶有限公司制造的水平滑动水密门如图7.26所示。一个坚固的门框直接安装在舱壁上,并提供了门滑动的轨道。门是由液压缸推动的,液压缸可以是电动的,也可以是手动的。可以远程或手动操作的特殊电磁滑阀提供了控制系统的基础。驾驶室操作、本地手动超驰操作和门的本地紧急控制都是可能的。操作手泵以及手动移动电磁阀可提供本地或远程紧急操作。可以从驾驶室或通过手动移动本地或远程泵站的电磁阀进行动力操作。
驾驶台操作只在客船上常见,船上可能有大量水密门。
水密门在船舶进水时,在与其舱壁位置相应的水头下进行压力测试。这通常发生在制造商的工厂。
在吃水线以上,在某些经批准的位置,允许使用铰链式水密门。这些门在构造上与第5章F节所述的风雨密门相似。

A        开门的液压杆。
B 门控制阀,电磁/手动操作。
C动力装置包括:
泵和电机装置
电动机起动器
门控制阀(手动)
安全阀和压力表
红色和绿色指示灯
手泵(紧急遥控)
供给柜
液位计(油尺)
油过滤器和滤网。
D 手泵(本地)。
E 截止阀(维修用)。
F 组合报警关闭限制和指示灯开关。
G 操作限位开关。
H 开关敲击。
J 位于车门锁芯后面的车门挡块
K 警告牌。
L 报警。
M 驾驶室控制器/指示器。
N钥匙操作的隔离开关(隔板两侧各一个)。
P止回阀。
图7.26水平滑动水密门

稳定器
船在海浪中的运动会导致各种不良影响,例如货物损坏和人的不适。只有船舶的横摇可以通过减摇来有效地减小。船上使用两种基本不同的稳定系统——鳍和舱。两种系统都试图通过产生一个与横摇相反的力来减少横摇。

鳍稳定器
船上装有一对或多对鳍,每侧一个,见图7.27。鳍的尺寸或面积由船的因素如宽度、吃水深度、排水量等决定,但是鳍的尺寸与船的尺寸相比非常小。鳍可以是可伸缩的,即在船形内枢转或滑动,或者是固定的。当船因波浪或一侧的力而倾斜时,它们对船施加一个扶正力矩。鳍的倾斜角度和在船上产生的力矩由传感控制系统确定。船的前进速度使鳍能够产生推力,从而产生扶正力矩。

图7.27鳍稳定器

该操作系统可与舵机的相比较,因为来自控制单元的信号引起鳍的运动,当其达到期望值时,停止运动。鳍的运动是液压动力单元结合一种可变排量泵的结果。
鳍作为稳定器的有效性取决于它们的运动速度,从一个极端点到另一个极端点必须是快速的。鳍的形状为矩形,截面为流线型。使用可移动的襟翼或固定且带可移动的部分是为了给船只提供更大的扶正力矩,用于稍微更复杂的机构。
控制系统基于加速度传感器。该单元提供一个信号,该信号在电子积分后提供横摇速度和角度的测量。这些不同的参数都被用来产生一个合适的鳍运动,该运动将对抗横摇。
鳍稳定器提供了精确和有效的横摇稳定,而复杂的装置在商船中通常仅限于客船。值得注意的是,当船速较低时,稳定能力下降,当静止时,没有稳定能力。

舱稳定器
由于流体在适当定位的横向舱中的延迟流动,舱稳定器提供了复原力或抗横摇力。该系统的运行与船速无关,在船舶静止时也能起作用。
考虑横向舱中的大量水。当船横摇时,水会移动,但在船横摇后的一两个瞬间。因此,当船完成横摇并准备返回时,静止不动的水将与返回的横摇方向相反。因此,在船舶每次运动时,水团都会抵抗横摇。这种横向舱有时被称为“水槽”。该系统被认为是被动的,因为水流是由重力驱动的。
图7.28示出了一个用于受控被动操作的边舱系统。边舱的高度越大,允许积聚的水越多,从而有更大的力矩来抵抗横摇。然而,上升的液位不得充满边舱。两个边舱之间的空气导管包含由横摇传感装置操作的阀门。调节舱之间的空气压力差,使流动得到控制和“定相”,以获得最大的横摇稳定效果。
必须使用模型试验的数据为特定的船舶专门设计一个舱系统。系统中的水位非常重要,必须根据船舶的装载情况进行调整。还有自由表面效应,这是由流动的水产生的,有效地降低了船的稳性。然而,舱系统在零速度时也有稳定能力,并且是比减摇鳍简单得多的装置。

 
回复 支持 反对

使用道具 举报

 楼主| 发表于 2023-2-18 23:09 | 显示全部楼层 来自: 中国上海
8
Oil Tankers, Liquefied Gas Carriers and Bulk Carriers

Oil tankers, because of their sheer size and numbers at sea. are worthy of special consideration. The liquid nature of their cargo requires special forms of construction and outfitting of these vessels. Gas carriers for the bulk transport of liquefied gases are also an increasingly important specialist type of ship. The bulk carrier in its many forms as increasing in its unit size and numbers such that it too is worthy of individual attention.


Oil tankers

Longitudinal and transverse bulkheads divide the cargo-carrying section of vessel into a number of tanks. ln addition to separation of different types of oil, the individual tanks also reduce the effects of the liquid's free surface on the stability of the ship. Since oil contracts and expands with changes of temperature, tanks are rarely completely full and movement of the liquid takes place. The bulkheads, decks. etc., must therefore be oiltight even when stressed or loaded by the movement of the oil in addition to the normal static loads. Longitudinal stresses are considerable in tankers and great strength is therefore required to resist bending and stiffen the hull structure.
Fire and explosion are an ever-present hazard on tankers and special systems of ventilation are necessary. Void spaces or cofferdams are also fitted in places to separate the cargo tank section from other parts of the ship, such as pump-rooms and fore peak tanks. Cargo-handling equipment is provided in the form of pumps located in a pumproom, usually positioned between the machinery space and the cargo tanks. More than one pumproom may be fitted depending upon the cargo carried or the piping arrangements. Suction pipelines run through the cargo tanks, and discharge lines leave the pumproom and travel along the deck to the crossover lines and manifolds situated at midships.
Two main types of oil tanker are to be found at sea today. The very large crude carrier (VLCC) and the products carrier. The main difference is in size and the products carrier has a larger number of tanks with a more complex piping system. This enables the carriage of many different cargo 'parcels' on any one voyage. The various aspects of tanker construction will now be examined.

Framing

All tankers are constructed using either the longitudinal or the combined type of framing system. Ships greater than 198 m in length must be framed longitudinally. A fully longitudinal system of construction will have longitudinal stiffeners along the ship's sides throughout the tank length. These longitudinals are usually offset bulb plates of increasing dimensions towards the bottom shell of the ship. Built-up stiffeners, consisting of webs with symmetrical flat plate flanges, have also been used. Side transverses are fitted in line with the bottom transverses to support the longitudinals against compressive loadings (Figures 8.1 and 8.2). The combined framing system uses side frames with intermediate deep transverse webs. A number of longitudinal stringers are fitted, depending on the depth of the tank. Brackets and knees are used to tie the side frames to the underside of the deck, the bottom plating and the stringers (Figures 8.3 and 8.4).

Figure 8.2 Elevation at centreline of tank (longitudinal framing)

Bottom structure

The bottom structure is longitudinally framed over the cargo tank length. Bulb plates and built-up T-sections are usually employed. The bottom transverses provide support and are spaced at intervals of around 3.8 m on smaller ships and up to 5 m on longer vessels. The longitudinals are continuous and pass through notches cut in the transverses (Figure 8.5). Flat bar make-up plates are fitted to the transverses where the longitudinals pass through. At watertight bulkheads a fully welded collar is fitted (Figure 8.6). The longitudinals are also bracketed to the transverses. The transverses are usually a plate web with a heavier flat bar flange. Horizontal stiffeners are fitted where a considerable transverse depth is employed (Figure 8.1).
A centre girder is fitted, except where there is a centreline bulkhead. Various arrangements of continuous or intercostal longitudinal side girders are also sometimes fitted. The arrangements used will determine the scantlings of the members employed in the construction. The centreline girder is stiffened and supported by vertical docking brackets fitted between each transverse (Figure 8.7). A heavier plate flange is fitted at the upper edge of the centreline girder. Additional stiffening of the centreline girder is provided either by horizontal or vertical flat bars.

Underdeck structure

This is largely the same as that for the bottom structure, with transverses fitted in line with those below. A continuous centreline girder and perhaps intercostal n continuous side girders are fitted beneath the deck.


Bulkheads

Three types of bulkhead are to be found on tankers - longitudinal, transverse and wash.

Longitudinal bulkheads
Flat stiffened or corrugated oil tight bulkheads may be employed. The stiffening is largely the same as that of the side shell, i.e. horizontal stiffeners along the bulkhead where longitudinal shell stiffening is used. Brackets fasten the stiffeners to the transverse bulkheads at the ends. Where side transverses are fitted to the shell, correspondingly positioned vertical webs are fitted at the bulkhead. Horizontal stringers at the ship's side are matched by horizontal stringers on the bulkheads. A continuous ring-type structure of considerable strength is thus built up within the tank space.
This ring-type structure is further braced by the use of beams known as cross-ties fitted between the transverses or side stringers and the longitudinal bulkheads.
Where corrugated bulkheads are employed the corrugations must run horizontally. Vertical webs are fitted at every bottom transverse, in order to support the bulkhead.

Figure 8.4 Elevation at centreline of tank (combined framing) (T, transverse: D, docking bracket; B, bracket)

Figure 8.5 Notch arrangement

Figure 8.6 Continuous longitudinal arrangement through a watertight bulkhead

Transverse bulkheads
Transverse bulkheads are similar in construction to longitudinal bulkhead and may be flat with stiffeners or corrugated. Vertical webs must be fitted to transverse bulkheads in line with the centre girder and may be fitted in line with side girders. Corrugated bulkheads may have vertical or horizontal corrugations with stiffening webs fitted at right-angles to the corrugations. Longitudinal stiffeners are arranged continuously through transverse bulkheads and are attached by brackets.
Transverse bulkheads must not be spaced greater than one-fifth of the ship's length apart. Where the tank length is greater than one-tenth of the ship's length, or 15 m, a perforated or wash bulkhead must be fitted.

Figure 8.7 Docking bracket

Wash bulkheads

A wash bulkhead is similar in construction to a transverse bulkhead but is not oil tight. Large holes or perforations exist in the plating. These hole, while allowing the oil to move through, do restrict the speed and force of its movement and provide additional transverse strength to the ship.

Framing at ends

Beyond the cargo tank length the vessel may be transversely or of combined framing construction and must have certain additional strengthening fitted. A deep tank or tanks is often fitted forward of the cargo tank space. Where transverse framing is employed, solid floors are fitted at very frame space. Inter-costal side girders of depth equal to the floors are also fitted in line with every other bottom shell longitudinal in the deep tank pace. The deep tank is fitted with web frames not more than five frame spaces apart. A centreline bulkhead must also be fitted, unless the main longitudinal bulkheads extend through the deep tank. With longitudinal framing, transverses are fitted in the deep tank not more than 3 m apart. Intercostal side girders are also fitted either side of the centreline. On larger vessels the cargo tank structure may extend into the deep tank itself. Panting and pounding arrangements are also necessary and will be similar to these described in Chapter 5.
All modern tankers now have the machinery pace and accommodation located aft. Web frames arc fitted not more than five frame spaces apart in the machinery space, with fixed or portable beams across the casing opening. Transverse framing of the bottom is usual in the machinery space and construction is similar to that mentioned in Chapter 5. Transverse or longitudinal framing of the sides and deck may be used from the machinery space to the after end of the ship. Deck longitudinals must extend into the machinery space a distance equivalent to one-third of the ship's breadth. Panting arrangements are also fitted in the after peak, as described in Chapter 5.


Superstructures

These are of much the same construction as described in Chapter 5. The load line rules require protective housings around openings in the freeboard and other decks and a forecastle extending 7% of the ship's length from forward. Because of a tanker's high bending stresses extra care must be taken with discontinuities at the superstructure ends.

General

Cofferdams are fitted between oil tanks and other compartments and must be at least 760 mm wide. Pumprooms or water ballast tanks may, subject to certain condition, be accepted instead of cofferdams. Special arrangements are necessary in tanker became of the reduced freeboard to clear the decks of water. Open rails are fitted for at least half the length of the weather deck. Solid bulwarks are usually fitted only at the forecastle and around the superstructure.

Hatches

Access to the cargo tank spaces is by oil tight hatches. Circular or oval shapes are usually employed with coamings at least 225 mm high. Steel covers with suitable oiltight fastening arrangements are usual, Figures 8.8(a) and 8.8(b). Patented cover of other approved materials are also available. Other tanks and cofferdam spaces may have similar hatches or manholes for access (Figure 8.9).


Figure 8.8(a) Cargo tank hatch

Figure 8.8(b) Detail of hatch clamping arrangement

Figure 8.9 Manhole cover: (a) plate; (b) detail of securing arrangement

Ventilation

Ventilation arrangements are fully described in Chapter 9.

Inert gas plants

Inert gas plants are being fitted to an ever-increasing number of tankers to improve their operational safety. The plant provides an inert gas blanket over the surface of the cargo to stop the build-up of flammable vapours which might lead to explosions.
A typical system is shown in Figure 8.10. The plant uses exhaust gas which is drawn from the boiler flue uptakes, where available, or from a separate combustion chamber. The gas enters a scrubbing tower via a water seal which is circulated by sea water. The gas is cooled, solids and unwanted gases are scrubbed out and it then passes through a demister which removes water vapour. The inert gas which contains less than 5% oxygen is then pumped into the cargo tanks, using fan units to drive the gas along the supply main. A deck-mounted water seal is fitted in the main to prevent the back-flow of flammable gases from the cargo tanks.
During unloading the inert gas provides a positive pressure on the cargo surface which assists discharging in addition to ensuring a safe operation. Inert as is fed into tanks prior to loading and when full the fans are stopped. During loading the high velocity venting valves are opened to vent the inert gas to atmosphere. When loading is complete the valves are closed and inert gas is supplied to produce a light pressure in the tanks. During loaded passage the inert gas pressure is monitored and maintained.

Other outfit items

Special circular openings with removable gaslight covers are provided for tank cleaning operation. A number of fixed or portable tank-cleaning machines are lowered into the cargo space through these openings.
Tank sounding gauges, which give local and often remote readouts of liquid depths, are fitted to each cargo tank usually on to a 'pot' or cylindrical seat. Heating coils are fitted in many tankers to improve the discharging of the oil. Steam is passed through coils fitted on the tank bottom to heat the cargo nor to discharge. Gases will be released during heating and the venting system must therefore be open.


Liquefied gas carriers

The past 25 years have seen the emergence of the bulk transport of natural gases both for use as fuel and as a refrigerant. Specialist ships are now used to carry the various types of gas in a variety of tank systems, combined with arrangements for pressurising or refrigerating the gas.
Natural gas is found and released as a result of oil-drilling operation. It is a mixture of such gases as methane, ethane, propane, butane and pentane. The heavier gases, propane and butane, are separated by liquefaction and are termed 'petroleum gases'. The remainder consisting largely of methane are known as 'natural gas'. The properties and therefore the behaviour of these two basic groups vary considerably, thus requiring different means of containment and storage during transportation.
Natural gas is, by proportion, 75- 95% methane and has a boiling point of - 162°C at atmospheric pressure. Methane has a critical temperature of -82°C. The critical temperature is the temperature above which it cannot be liquefied by the application of pressure. A pressure of 47 bar is necessary to liquefy methane at -82°C. Thus, natural gas cannot be liquefied by pressure at normal temperatures. Liquid natural gas tankers are therefore designed to carry the gas in its liquid form at atmospheric pressure and a low service temperature in the region of -164°C. The problems encountered, therefore, deal with protecting the steel structure from the low temperatures, reducing the loss of gas and avoiding the leakage of gas into the occupied regions of the ship.
Petroleum gas consists of propane, propylene and butane or mixtures of these gases, all of which have critical temperatures above normal ambient temperatures. Thus they can be transported either as a liquid at low temperature and pressure or at normal temperature and under pressure. The design problems for this type of ship are similarly protecting the steel hull where low temperatures are employed, reducing gas loss and avoiding gas leakage, with the added consideration of pressurising the tanks.

Liquefied natural gas tankers

The tank types of LNG carriers are self-supporting and either prismatic. cylindrical or spherical in shape or a membrane construction which is supported by insulation. Materials used include aluminium, 90% nickel steel or membranes composed of stainless steel or nickel iron.
Tank designs are split into three categories, namely self-supporting or free standing, membrane and semi-membrane. The self-supporting tank is strong enough by virtue of its construction to accept any loads imposed by the cargo it carries. A membrane tank requires the insulation between the tank and the hull to be load bearing, such an arrangement being termed an integrated tank design. Single or double metallic membranes can be used, with insulation separating the two membrane skins. The semi-membrane or semi-integrated design is similar to the membrane, except that the tank has no support at its comers.
A double-hull type of construction ss used with each of the above designs, the space between being used for water ballast. The basic configurations are shown in Figure 8.11.

Comparison of tank types

Membrane and prismatic tanks use the underdeck cubic capacity most effectively. Cylindrical and spherical tanks involve constructional problems by penetrating the upper deck but provide greater safety in the event of collision or grounding. Membrane tanks are cheaper to build but the insulation which must be load bearing is more expensive. The insulation of spherical tanks need not be load bearing since it is only a partial secondary barrier, if needed at all in this respect. The hull and machinery costs are about equal for each type. All the different types are in service, with the firmly established designs being prismatic, spherical and membrane types.

Figure 8.11 Tank arrangements for liquefied natural gas: (a) prismatic tank; (b) spherical tank; (c) cylindrical tank; (d) membrane tank; (e) double-membrane tank; (f) semi-membrane tank

Boil-off

Liquefied natural gas is continually boiling in tank when transported by sea. There is therefore a need to release this gas to avoid a pressure build-up in the tank. It may be vented directly to atmosphere or burnt in boilers or in specially adapted dual fuel engines. Burning the boil-off gas in a flare mounted on a boom remote from the ship is another possible solution. Re-liquefication is not economical because of the large power and huge cost of the machinery necessary.

Liquefied petroleum gas tankers

Three basic type or liquefied petroleum gas tankers are currently used - the fully pressurised tank, the semi-pressurised partially refrigerated tank, and the fully refrigerated atmospheric pressure tank.
The fully pressurised tank operates at about 17.5-18.0 bar and requires heavy expensive tanks of carbon steel which are usually cylindrical in shape. This high pressure is equivalent to the vapour pressure of the cargo at the highest possible ambient temperature. Usually taken as 45°C. The tank domes. Penetrate the upper deck and have fitted all the necessary connection for loading, discharging, sampling, etc.

Figure 8.12 Cylindrical trunk tank arrangement

Semi-pressurised tanks operate at about 8 bar and a temperature of about -7°C must be maintained in the tanks. Insulation is therefore required around the tank and, since some cargo will boil off, a re-liquefaction plant is needed. Horizontal cylindrical tank configurations are again used. Low temperature steel for temperatures down to around - 45°C must be used for the tanks.
Fully refrigerated        atmospheric pressure        tank systems have        service temperatures about -50°C and maximum working pressures of 0.28 bar. The tanks are insulated, self-supporting and prismatic in shape. The tank material must be ductile at low temperatures and is usually a fine-grain heat-treated steel such as Arctic D or a low alloy nickel steel. A secondary barrier capable of retaining the cargo in the event of main tank fracture is required by classification society rules. Three tank types are used with fully refrigerated LPG ships:

(1) A central trunk runs along the top for the length of the cargo tank. Wing ballast tanks are fitted, their inner surface acting as the secondary barrier (Figure 8.12).
(2) A large dome is situated aft at the top of the tank and wing ballast tanks are fitted (Figure 8.13). The inner surface of the wing tanks acts as the secondary barrier.
(3) A large dome is situated aft at the top of the tank but no wing ballast tanks are fitted (Figure 8.14), Hopper tanks are used for ballast when necessary. The hull itself acts as the secondary barrier and must be of low temperature carbon steel in way of the cargo tanks.


Figure 8.13 Aft dome tank arrangement

Figure 8.14 Tank arrangement with hull as secondary barrier

Comparison of tank types

The reduction in weight of tank material in a semi-pressurised tank design is offset by the need fer refrigerating plant and insulation around the tank. The use of low pressure tanks does, however, permit better utilisation of the underdeck cubic capacity of the vessel. The fully pressurised tank has no need of insulation nor a secondary barrier.

Construction aspects of LNG and LPG carriers

The various regulatory bodies have rules for the construction and classification of ships carrying liquid gases in bulk. These rules follow closely the IMO code for this type of vessel.
A complete or partial secondary barrier is required in all but pressure vessels operating at ambient temperatures down to -10°C. This secondary barrier is a liquid-resisting outer skin which will temporarily contain any leakage of the liquid cargo from the primary barrier or tank. The secondary barrier should also prevent the structure temperature from dropping and should not fail under the same circumstances as the primary harrier.
Bulkheads or cofferdam arrangements are necessary between cargo tanks, depending upon the temperature of the cargo carried.
Cargo-pumping pipework systems must have no interconnection with other systems. Where a cargo tank has no secondary barrier a suitable drainage system must be provided which does not enter the machinery space. Where secondary barriers are used drainage must be provided to deal with any leakage, again from outside the machinery space.
Special ship survival arrangements are required which limit the width of tanks in relation to the ship's breadth. Double-bottom tank heights are also stipulated.
Arrangements of tank design or internal bulkheads where possible must be used to restrict cargo movement and the subsequent dynamic loading of structure. Membrane tanks, for instance, cannot have internal bulkheads and are tapered off in section towards the top.
Materials of construction and those used in piping systems are dealt with in considerable detail in the rules.

Bulk carriers
The bulk carriage of single-commodity cargoes has been a continually advancing trend with the development of specialist types of ship to suit. The desire for flexibility of operation has also led to various designs to enable different bulk cargoes to be carried on different voyages. Such vessels have become known as combination bulk carriers, oil/bulk/ore (OBO) and oil/ore (OO) are examples.
Some particular aspects of bulk carrier construction will now be examined in detail. A transverse section through a general-purpose bulk carrier is shown in 8.15. The cargo hold is seen to be shaped by the upper hopper or saddle tanks, the lower hopper tanks and the double bottom. A composite framing system is used in common with most bulk carriers. Transverse framing is employed in the machinery space, the side shell in way of the cargo tanks, the saddle tanks or upper hopper tanks, the main deck in side of the line of hatches, the forecastle deck and the fore and aft peak tanks. Longitudinal framing is employed at the bottom shell, the tank top and the upper deck outside of the line of hatches.
A section through a typical floor in a lower hopper tank is shown in Figure 8.16. The longitudinal framing structure can be clearly seen. Above the hopper tank can be seen the transversely framed hold with the bracket connecting the

Figure 8.15 Bulk carrier transverse section

Figure 8.16 Solid-floor arrangement in a lower hopper tank

Figure 8.17 Tapering-off of hopper tank at after end: (a) plan view on hopper tank end; (b) section on hopper lank end       
frame to the hopper tank. At the end of the hopper tank region a considerable change in section occurs. The construction used to reduce the effect of This discontinuity is shown in Figure 8.17. A large tapered bracket is used which is connected to the surrounding transversely framed structure as shown.
A section through an upper hopper tank or saddle tank is shown in Figure 8.18. The longitudinal framing under the deck can be seen as well as the bracket connecting the upper edge of the transverse frame to the tank. The side shell portion of the tank is transversely framed by offset bulb plates with plate webs, as shown in Figure 8.18, fitted at every fourth frame. A deep-flanged bracket joins the inner tank side to the hatch side girder.
Details of a bulkhead stool are shown in Figure 8.19. With a corrugated transverse bulkhead as shown, the stool arrangement is used to shape the forward and after lower regions of the cargo hold. This flush tapering shape permits easy discharge of bulk cargoes. and simplifies cargo hold cleaning. Shedder plates are fitted inside the 1roughs of the corrugated bulkhead for the same reason.

8
油轮、液化气船和散装货船

油轮,因为它们巨大的体积和海上的数量,都值得特别考虑。货物的液体性质要求这些船只的特殊形式的构造和舾装。用于大量运输液化气体的液化气运输船也是一种越来越重要的专业船舶。散货船以多种形式出现,其单位尺寸和数量都在增加,因此也值得单独关注。

油轮
纵向和横向舱壁将船只的载货部分分成若干个舱。除了分离不同类型的油之外,单独的舱也减少了液体自由表面对船稳性的影响。由于油随着温度的变化而收缩和膨胀,所以舱很少完全装满,液体也在运动。舱壁,甲板,等等,因此,即使在正常静载荷之外受到油运动的压力或载荷时,也必须是油密的。油轮中的纵向应力相当大,因此需要很大的强度来抵抗弯曲和加固船体结构。
火灾和爆炸是油轮上始终存在的危险,需要特殊的通风系统。空舱或隔离空舱也安装在船上将货油舱部分与船的其他部分隔开,如泵房和艏尖舱分隔开的地方。货物装卸设备以泵的形式安装在泵房内,通常位于机舱和货舱之间。根据所运输的货物或管道布置,可以安装一个以上的泵房。吸入管路穿过货油舱,排放管路离开泵室,沿甲板延伸至位于船中部的交叉管路和管汇。
今天在海上可以发现两种主要的油轮。超大型原油运输船(VLCC)和成品油运输船。主要区别在于尺寸,成品油运输船有更多的舱,管道系统更复杂。这使得在任何一次航行中能够运输许多不同的货物“包裹”。现在将对油轮建造的各个方面进行检查。


图8.1油轮-中横剖面图(纵向骨架)

骨架
所有油轮都采用纵向或组合式骨架系统建造。长度大于198米的船舶必须纵向建造。一个完全纵向的结构系统将在整个舱长度上沿船舷设置纵向加强筋。这些纵骨通常用球扁钢,其尺寸向船底外板逐渐增大。也使用了由带对称面板的腹板组成的组合加强筋。边横骨与底部横骨成一直线安装,以支撑纵向构件抵抗压缩载荷(图8.1和8.2)。组合骨架系统使用舷侧肋骨, 舷侧肋骨中间布置较深的横向腹板。根据舱的深度,安装了许多纵材。肘板和弯头用于将舷侧肋骨连接到甲板下侧、底板和纵材(图8.3和8.4)。


图8.2舱中心线处的立面图(纵向骨架)


图8.3油轮-中横剖面图(复合骨架) OBP=球扁钢

底部结构
底部结构在货舱长度方向上是纵向骨架的。通常采用球扁钢和组合T型材。底部横骨提供支撑,在较小的船上间隔约3.8米,在较长的船上间隔可达5米。纵骨是连续的,并穿过横骨上的切口(图8.5)。在纵骨穿过的横骨上安装扁钢补板。在水密舱壁处,安装一个完全焊接的折边(图8.6)。纵骨也用肘板固定在横骨上。横骨通常是腹板,带有更厚的面板折边。如果采用了相当大的横向深度,则要安装水平加强筋(图8.1)。
除了有中纵舱壁的地方,安装了中底纵桁。有时也安装各种连续或肋间边底纵桁。所用的布置将决定结构中所用构件的尺寸。中底纵桁由安装在各横骨之间的垂直对接肘板加固和支撑(图8.7)。较重的折边板安装在中底纵桁的上边缘。通过水平或垂直扁钢对中底纵桁进行额外加固。

甲板下结构
这在很大程度上与底部结构相同,横梁与底部的横梁对齐。甲板下安装了一个连续的中纵桁和肋间或连续的边纵桁。

舱壁
油轮上有三种类型的舱壁——纵向舱壁、横向舱壁和制荡舱壁。

纵向舱壁
可以使用扁钢加强或槽形的油密舱壁。加强与舷侧外板的加强基本相同,即水平加强筋沿着舱壁布置,和舷侧外板的加强筋平齐。加强筋的末端要用肘板固定在横向舱壁上。在舷侧横骨安装在外板上的地方,相应定位的垂直腹板安装在舱壁上。船侧的水平纵材与舱壁上的水平纵材相匹配。因此,在舱空间内形成了具有相当强度的连续环形结构。
这种环形结构通过使用横梁进一步支撑,横梁被称为边舱撑杆,安装在横梁或侧纵材和纵向舱壁之间。
如果使用槽形舱壁,槽形必须水平延伸。垂直腹板安装在每个底部横骨处,以支持舱壁。

图8.4舱中心线处的立面图(组合骨架)(T、横骨;D、对接肘板;B、肘板)


图8.5槽口布置


图8.6通过水密舱壁的连续纵向布置

横向舱壁
横向舱壁在结构上类似于纵向舱壁,可以是带加强板的平板或槽形板。垂直腹板必须安装在与中底纵桁对齐的横向舱壁上,也可以安装在与边底纵桁对齐的位置上。槽形舱壁可具有垂直或水平槽形,带有与槽形成直角安装的加强腹板。纵向加强筋穿过横向舱壁连续布置,并通过肘板连接。
横向舱壁的间距不得大于船长的五分之一。如果舱长度大于船长的十分之一或15 m,则必须安装穿孔的或制荡舱壁。

图8.7对接肘板

制荡舱壁
制荡舱壁在结构上类似于横向舱壁,但不是油密的。板中存在大孔或穿孔。这些孔虽然允许油通过,但却限制了油运动的速度和力度,并为船提供了额外的横向强度。

端部骨架
超出货油舱的长度,船舶可以是横向的或组合骨架结构,并且必须安装某些额外的加强件。一个或多个深舱通常安装在货舱空间的前面。在采用横向骨架的地方,在每个肋位安装实肋板。深度等于肋板的肋间边纵桁也与深舱的船底纵骨成一直线安装。深舱安装有间隔不超过五个肋位的强肋骨。除非主纵向舱壁延伸穿过深舱,否则还必须安装中纵舱壁。对于纵向骨架,横向构件安装在深舱中,间距不超过3米。在中心线的两侧还安装肋间边底纵桁。在较大的船舶上,货油舱结构可以延伸到深舱本身。抗拍击和砰击布置也是必要的,与第五章中描述的类似。
所有现代油轮现在都有位于船尾的机舱和起居舱室。在机舱中,腹板肋骨安装在相距不超过五个肋位的位置,固定或可移动的横梁穿过机舱棚开口。机舱底部的横向骨架是常见的,其结构与第5章中提到的相似。从机舱到船舶尾端,舷侧和甲板可采用横向或纵向骨架。甲板纵骨必须延伸到机舱内,延伸距离相当于船舶宽度的三分之一。如第5章所述,在尾尖舱也安装了抗拍击(颤振)装置。

上层建筑
这些与第五章所描述的结构大致相同。载重线规则要求在干舷和其他甲板的开口周围有保护性的外壳,并且有一个艏楼从艏端延伸船长的7%。由于油轮的高弯曲应力,必须特别注意上层建筑末端的不连续性。

一般
隔离空舱安装在油舱和其他舱室之间,宽度必须至少为760毫米。在特定条件下,可以接受泵房或压载水舱代替隔离空舱。在干舷降低的油轮上,需要特殊的布置来清除甲板上的水。开放栏杆的长度至少为露天甲板长度的一半。实舷墙通常只安装在艏楼和上层建筑周围。

舱口
通过油密舱口进入货油舱。圆形或椭圆形通常用于至少225毫米高的围板。图8.8(a)和图8.8(b)通常采用带有合适的油密紧固装置的钢盖。也可提供其他认可材料的专利盖。其他舱和隔离空舱可能有类似的舱口或检修孔(图8.9)。

图8.8(a)货舱舱口

图8.8(b)舱口夹紧装置详图

图8.9人孔盖a)板;(b)紧固布置的细节

通风设备
通风布置在第9章中有详细描述。

惰性气体装置
越来越多的油轮安装了惰性气体装置,以提高操作安全性。该设备在货物表面覆盖一层惰性气体,以阻止可能导致爆炸的易燃蒸汽积聚。
典型的系统如图8.10所示。该装置使用从锅炉烟道(如果有的话)或单独的燃烧室中抽出的废气。气体通过由海水循环的水封进入洗涤塔。气体被冷却,固体和不需要的气体被洗去,然后通过除雾器去除水蒸气。氧气含量少于5%的惰性气体随后被泵入货舱,使用风扇装置驱动气体沿供气总管流动。甲板上安装的水封安装在总管上,以防止易燃气体从液货舱回流。
在卸货过程中,惰性气体在货物表面提供正压,这有助于卸货并确保安全操作。惰性气体,在装载前加入舱,装满后停止风机。在装载过程中,打开高速排气阀,将惰性气体排放到大气中。装载完成后,关闭阀门,并供应惰性气体,以在舱中产生较低的压力。在装运期间,惰性气体压力被监控和保持。

其他项目
带有可拆卸气密盖的特殊圆形开口用于舱清洗操作。许多固定的或便携式的液舱清洁机通过这些开口下降到货舱中。
液舱测深计通常安装在一个“罐”或圆柱形底座上,可提供液体深度的本地和远程读数。许多油轮都装有加热线圈,以改善油的排放。蒸汽通过安装在舱底的盘管来加热货物,也不排放。加热过程中会释放气体,因此通风系统必须打开。

液化气运输船
在过去的25年里,出现了大量运输天然气作为燃料和制冷剂的现象。专业船舶现在被用于在各种舱系统中运输各种类型的气体,并结合用于加压或冷藏气体的装置。
石油钻探作业发现并释放了天然气。它是甲烷、乙烷、丙烷、丁烷和戊烷等气体的混合物。丙烷和丁烷这两种较重的气体通过液化被分离出来,称为“石油气”。其余大部分由甲烷组成,称为“天然气”。这两种基本类型的性质和行为差异很大,因此在运输过程中需要不同的包装和储存方法。
按比例来说,天然气含有75- 95%的甲烷,在大气压下沸点为-162℃。甲烷的临界温度为-82℃。临界温度是指在施加压力时甲烷不能液化的温度。在-82℃液化甲烷需要47巴的压力。因此,在常温下,天然气不能通过压力液化。因此,液态天然气油轮被设计成在大气压力和-164℃左右的低工作温度下运输液态气体。因此,遇到的问题涉及保护钢结构免受低温影响、减少气体损失和避免气体泄漏到船的居住区域。
石油气由丙烷、丙烯和丁烷或这些气体的混合物组成,所有这些气体的临界温度都高于正常环境温度。因此,它们既可以在低温和低压下作为液体运输,也可以在常温和压力下运输。这种类型的船的设计问题类似地是在低温下保护钢船体,减少气体损失和避免气体泄漏,并额外考虑加压舱。


图8.10 典型惰性气体装置

液化天然气船

液化天然气运输船的舱类型是自支撑的和棱柱形的,圆柱形或球形或由绝缘体支撑的膜结构。使用的材料包括铝、90%镍钢或由不锈钢或镍铁组成的膜。
舱设计分为三类,即自立式或独立式、膜式和半膜式。由于其结构的原因,自支撑舱足够坚固,能够承受其所载货物施加的任何载荷。薄膜舱要求舱和船体之间的绝缘是承重的,这种布置被称为集成舱设计。可以使用单层或双层金属膜,两层膜皮之间用绝缘材料隔开。半膜或半集成设计类似于膜,除了舱在其拐角处没有支撑。
上述每种设计都采用双壳型结构,两者之间的空间用于压舱水。基本配置如图8.11所示。

舱类型比较

薄膜舱和棱柱形舱最有效地利用了甲板下的容积。圆柱形和球形舱由于穿透上层甲板而存在结构问题,但在发生碰撞或搁浅时提供了更大的安全性。薄膜舱建造起来更便宜,但是必须承重的隔热层更贵。球形舱的隔热层不需要承重,因为它只是一个局部的二级屏障,如果在这方面需要的话。每种类型的船体和机器成本大致相同。所有不同的类型都在使用中,牢固建立的设计有棱柱形、球形和薄膜型。


图8.11液化天然气的舱布置a)棱柱形舱;(b)球形舱;(c)圆柱形舱;(d)薄膜舱;(e)双膜舱;(f)半膜舱

蒸发
海上运输时,液化天然气在舱中不断沸腾。因此,需要释放这种气体,以避免舱中的压力增加。它可以直接排放到大气中,或者在锅炉或专门改装的双燃料主机中燃烧。另一种可能的解决方案是在远离船只的吊杆上安装一个火炬来燃烧汽化气体。再液化是不经济的,因为需要大功率和高成本的机器。

液化石油气船
目前使用三种基本类型的液化石油气舱-完全加压舱、半加压部分制冷舱和完全制冷大气压舱。
完全加压的舱在大约17.5-18.0巴下工作,并且需要通常为圆柱形的碳钢制成的笨重昂贵的舱。这种高压相当于货物在最高可能环境温度下的蒸汽压力。通常认为是45摄氏度。穿透上层甲板,并安装所有必要的连接,用于装载、卸载、取样等,


图8.12圆柱形主舱布置

半加压舱在大约8巴的压力下工作,舱内温度必须保持在大约-7℃。因此,舱周围需要隔热,而且由于一些货物会蒸发,因此需要再液化设备。再次使用水平圆柱形舱配置。温度低至-45°C左右的低温钢必须用于舱。
全制冷常压舱系统的工作温度约为-50°C,最大工作压力为0.28巴。舱是隔热的、自支撑的和棱柱形的。舱材料必须在低温下具有延展性,通常是一种细晶粒热处理钢,如北极D钢或低合金镍钢。船级社规范要求在主舱破裂的情况下能够保持货物的二级屏障。完全冷冻液化石油气船使用三种类型的舱:
(1)一条中央围壁通道沿货油舱的顶部延伸。装有边压载舱,其内表面作为第二道屏障(图8.12)。
(2)一个大的圆顶位于舱顶的尾部,并装有边压载舱(图8.13)。边舱的内表面作为第二道屏障。
(3)一个大的圆顶位于舱顶部的尾部,但没有安装边压载舱(图8.14),必要时使用料斗舱压载。船体本身作为第二层屏障,必须由低温碳钢制成。


图8.13后圆顶舱布置


图8.14船体作为二级屏障的舱布置

舱类型比较
在半加压舱设计中,舱材料重量的减少被制冷设备和舱周围隔热的需要所抵消。然而,低压舱的使用允许更好地利用船的甲板下容积。完全加压的舱不需要隔热,也不需要二级屏障。

液化天然气和液化石油气运输船的建造方面
各种管理机构都有散装运输液化气船舶的建造和入级规范。这些规则严格遵循国际海事组织关于这类船只的法规。
除了在环境温度低至-10°C下运行的压力船外,所有船都需要完全或部分的二级屏障。二级屏障是一种抗液体的外层,可暂时容纳从一级屏障或舱泄漏的液体货物。第二级屏障还应防止结构温度下降,并且不应在与第一层屏障相同的情况下失效。
根据所载货物的温度,货舱之间需要有舱壁或隔离舱。
货泵管道系统不得与其他系统互连。如液货舱没有二级屏障,则必须提供不进入机舱的适当排水系统。在使用二级屏障的地方,必须提供排水系统来处理任何泄漏,同样是从机舱外部。
需要特殊的船舶救生布置来限制与船舶宽度相关的液舱宽度。还规定了双层底舱的高度。
在可能的情况下,舱设计或内部舱壁的布置必须用于限制货物移动和随后的结构动态载荷。例如,薄膜舱不能有内部舱壁,其截面向顶部逐渐变细。
建造材料和管道系统中使用的材料在规范中有相当详细的规定。

散货船
随着专用船型的发展,单一商品货物的散装运输已成为不断发展的趋势。对操作灵活性的需求也导致了各种设计,以使不同的散装货物能够在不同的航程中运输。这种船被称为组合散货船,例如油/散货/矿石船(OBO)和油/矿石船(OO)。
现在将详细研究散装货船构造的某些特殊方面。8.15中显示了通用散货船的横截面。可以看出,货舱由上料斗或鞍形舱、下料斗舱和双层底构成。大多数散装货船通常使用复合骨架系统。机舱、货舱、鞍形舱或上料斗舱的侧外板、舱口线一侧的主甲板、艏楼甲板和艏艉尖舱采用横向构架。纵向骨架用于船底外板、舱顶和舱口线外的上甲板。
图8.16显示了下料斗舱典型肋板的剖面图。可以清楚地看到纵向骨架结构。在料斗上方可以看到横向骨架式货舱,肘板连接着料斗舱的骨架。在料斗舱截面的末端,出现了相当大的截面变化。用来减小这种不连续性影响的结构如图8.17所示。使用一个大的锥形肘板,该肘板连接到周围的横向骨架结构上,如图所示。


图8.15散货船横截面

图8.16料斗舱中的实肋板布置

图8.17料斗舱后端逐渐变细a) 料斗舱末端的平面图;(b)料斗舱末端的截面

图8.17上部料斗舱剖面图
图8.18显示了上部料斗舱或鞍形舱的剖面图。可以看到甲板下的纵向骨架以及将横向骨架的上边缘连接到舱的肘板。如图8.18所示,舱的侧外板部分由带板腹板的球扁钢横向构成,每隔四个肋骨安装一个。一个深折边肘板将内舱侧连接到舱口边纵桁上。

图8.19槽形舱壁下方的凳子布置

图8.19显示了舱壁凳座的细节。利用如图所示的槽形横向舱壁,凳子布置用于形成货舱的前部和后部下部区域。这种平齐的锥形形状便于散装货物的卸载。并且简化了货舱清洁。出于同样的原因,脱落板安装在槽形隔板的槽内。
 
回复 支持 反对

使用道具 举报

 楼主| 发表于 2023-2-18 23:10 | 显示全部楼层 来自: 中国上海
9
Ventilation

An ocean-going ship is required to operate in a variety of very different climates. Air temperature may range from -15°C to 50°C and sea water temperatures from 0°C to 38°C. The moisture content of the air will vary considerably and solar radiation may affect one or more of the ship's exposed surfaces. All the various forms of good and bad weather will also be experienced. The air from the air-conditioning and ventilation plants is therefore required to provide an acceptable climate for the crew to live and work in, sufficient air for machinery use and to maintain temperature and humidity at acceptable levels to the cargo. All this must be achieved regardless of the conditions prevailing external to the ship. The design of suitable systems will therefore require information about the ship's trade routes, type of cargo and machinery installation.

Accommodation
Most ships' air-conditioning systems employ centrally situated units. These units are self-contained and supply the cabins and spaces within a particular area via trunking. The control possible in individual cabins or spaces depends upon the nature and complexity of the central unit. Three basic systems are in use- the single duct, the twin duct and the twin duct with reheat. In each case the central unit will clean, supply warm or cool humidify or dehumidify the air supplied to the cabins.

The single duct system
In the single duct system the central unit mixes outside air with some returned or recycled air. This air is then filtered, heated and perhaps humidified or cooled. This conditioned air is then distributed along a single duct to the individual supply units in the different space. The amount of supply air can be controlled within the particular cabin or space. Figure 9.1 shows the arrangement of the single duct system.


The twin duct system

Again, outside and returned air are mixed in the central unit then filtered, preheated and perhaps humidified. Some of the air leaves the unit before it reaches the cooler, to be reheated; the amount is increased as the outside temperature tails. The remainder of the all passes over the cooling coil. The two air supplies at different conditions are passed through separate ducts to controlled mixing units in the individual spaces. The air temperature and condition can then be selected for the particular space. Figure 9.2 shows the arrangement of the twin duct system.

Figure 9.1 The single duct system

Figure 9.2 The twin duct system

The single duct with reheat system
The central unit mixes outside and return air, filters, preheats and humidifies or cools the air to the lowest required temperature for any part of the system. The air then passes along one duct to individual units in the spaces. Within these units is a controlled heater over which the air passes. Heating may be achieved by circulating hot water or an electric heater. The air supply and its temperature may therefore be regulated. Figure 9.3 shows the arrangement of the single duct with reheat system.

Cargo spaces

The primary function of ships is to transport goods from place to place. The cargo must be delivered in good condition and, in addition to careful loading and discharging, the storage and ventilation must be suitable and satisfactory. Inadequate, poor quality air supplies can seriously damage most cargoes. Fairly simple systems of cargo ventilation and attendant procedures can prevent such damage. Different cargoes react to the climate on board in as complex a manner as the human body, with often irreparable damage as the result.
Certain general cargoes, some fruit and vegetable cargoes and hygroscopic (water-absorbing or emitting) cargoes are carried in non-insulated holds. As a result they are exposed to all climatic changes which may cause condensation on the hull or cargo. Ventilation of the holds in which they are carried is therefore necessary. Refrigerated and frozen cargoes are carried in insulated holds but because of the living, gas-producing nature of the cargo they also require ventilation.

Figure 9.3 The single duct with reheat system

Ventilation of non-insulated cargo holds

The purpose of ventilation in non-insulated holds is to remove surplus heat and humidity, to prevent the condensing of moisture on cargo or hull and to remove gases produced in the ripening process of some fruit and vegetable cargoes. Natural and mechanical ventilation systems are used for this purpose•

Figure 9.4 Natural ventilation of tween-deck space or workshop

Natural ventilation is accomplished by inlet and outlet pipes and trunking to each cargo space. These inlets and outlets consist of cowls or ventilators of various designs. Air is forced in by the action of the wind or drawn in as a result of an ejector type of exhaust drawing air out which is then replaced. Where the force of the wind is utilised the cowls must be manually positioned, and are large cumbersome fittings which must be well stayed to the deck. Figure 9.4 shows a natural ventilation arrangement for a tween deck or workshop. Most modern ship utilise mechanical ventilation for reliability, improved performance and the reduced size of cowls necessary.        •
Mechanical ventilation operates in two distinct systems- the open and the closed.
The open system uses axial flow fans fitted in the inlet and exhaust trunks. The trunks may have separate cowls or be incorporated into Sampson posts or masts. The air is supplied along trunking and duds to the bottom of the hold.
The air is drawn from the top of the hold just below the decks. The exhaust fans can be reversed if condensation is likely near the deckheads, for example with a low outside air temperature. Figure 9.5 shows the arrangement of the open mechanical ventilation system.
The closed system recirculates air and a controlled amount of fresh air can be admitted. The ventilating all is distributed around the hold and cargo, forming an insulating wall or curtain between the two. Exhaust air is drawn from the bottom of the hold. This system affords every possible mode of control and is widely used in somewhat varied forms. Figure 9.6 shows the closed ventilation system.

Figure 9.5 Open ventilation system (a) normal circulation; (b) reversed circulation - to prevent underdeck circulation at low outside temperature

Figure 9.6 Closed ventilation system (1 recirculating damper, 2 inlet air damper, 3 exhaust air damper)

Ventilation of refrigerated cargo holds
Refrigerated cargo holds require a carefully controlled air-replacing system for each individual space. Cooled air is supplied with the refrigerated hold where it gains heat from ripening cargos and entrains the cargo produced. This air is then exhausted and a careful balance must be maintained between inlet and exhaust gas quantities, regardless of the outside climate conditions.
One system achieves this by drawing outside air down to a bank of cooler tubes via a central unit. The dehumidified air then passes into the cargo holds. The exhaust gases are drawn from the hold through duct back to the central unit and then returned to the outside atmosphere. The linking of inlet and outlet values ensures a constant air supply at all times to the hold. Figure 9.7 shows the arrangement of such a system.

Particular types of ship have their associated cargo ventilation problems, e.g. ‘roll-on, roll-off’ ships, and the vehicle exhaust fumes during loading and discharging. Bulk carriers usually only require natural ventilation. The particular problems for each ship type must be considered early on at the design stage to ensure a suitable system is provided.

Figure 9.7 Balanced air renewal system for refrigerated cargo spaces


Machinery spaces

The machinery space requires an all supply for the operation of boilers, combustion engines, compressers, etc., and to maintain a satisfactory climate for the operating staff to work in.
Certain machinery consumes or requires air for its operation and sufficient air at as low a temperature as practically possible should be provided. Underpressure occurring in the machinery space will affect the efficiency and performance of internal combustion engines. Overpressure may lead to leakage of hot air into the accommodation. Ventilation is also necessary to remove the heat generated within the machinery space and thus provide a reasonable climate for staff to work in. This very difficult task is achieved by the provision of ducted supplies of filtered but uncooled air to as many regions as possible. Particular areas such as workshops and control rooms, being small, may be air conditioned and more readily provided with an acceptable working climate.
Various systems of air supply to the machinery spaces and casing are in use and are shown in Figures 9.8-9.10.
Figure 9.8 utilises a medium pressure axial now fan supplying air down a trunking, which is proportionally released at the various platform levels and exhausts through the top of the casing. Figure 9.9 uses a low pressure axial flow fan to supply air into the casing area. Also, a high pressure centrifugal fan provides air through ducts to outlets at the various platforms. Figure 9.10 uses medium pressure axial flow fans to provide a through trunking system to the various outlets at the various platforms. This method has proved to be the best. A diagrammatic arrangement of medium pressure axial flow fans and trunking in a machinery space is shown in Figure 9.11.


Control rooms

The provision of control rooms in most modern machinery spaces ensures close careful control of the climate in such spaces, often with the provision of air conditioning, in addition to ventilation. This climate control provides the personnel with a comfortable working area isolated from the main machinery space. Also, delicate equipment in need of careful climatic control is able to receive it. The satisfactory operation and continuous performance of modern control equipment requires a carefully controlled environment which, by using a control room, can be achieved.
A separate ducted supply is led into the control room and usually through a filtering air-conditioning plant or unit which is set to function automatically with controls located in the control room. A matched exhaust will remove stale warm air from the control room. Figure 9.12 shows such an arrangement.

Figure 9.11 Machinery space ventilation - diagrammatic arrangement

Figure 9.12 Control room ventilation

Figure 9.13 Pumproom ventilation

Pumprooms

Tanker pumprooms require ventilation to carry away poisonous cargo fumes resulting from leaking glands or pipe joints. The working climate in this space well below deck level must also be comfortable for any personnel present. Mechanical exhausting of air is achieved by the use of axial flow fans and trunking. The trunking draws from the pumproom floor and emergency intakes at a height of 2.15 m from the working platform. These emergency intakes must be filled with dampers which can be opened or closed from the weather deck or the working platform. The fan motors are located in the machinery space and drive the fans through gastight seals in the bulkhead. Supply is through cowls or louvres at the top of the pumproom. An arrangement is shown in Figure 9.13.


Double-bottom tanks

Ventilation of double-bottom tanks is provided by means of an air pipe situated remote from the filling pipe and usually al the highest point in the tank to avoid unventilated pockets. The air pipe is led up to the weather deck to a gooseneck or patent type of head. Air pipes from fuel tanks are positioned in low risk areas and have flame screen gauzes fitted (Figure 9.14).

Figure 9.14 Air pipe head

Cargo tanks

Ventilation of cargo tanks avoids over pressure or partial pressure conditions which could occur during loading and unloading of cargo. Temperature fluctuations during a voyage could have a similar effect. Vapour pipelines from the cargo hatch are led to pressure/vacuum relief valves which are usually mounted on a standpipe some distance above the deck. Individual vent lines are fitted for each tank on large tankers and a common venting line is led up a mast or Sampson post on smaller vessels.
During loading and discharging of the cargo the ventilation requirements are considerable. Air must be drawn in or removed in quantities equivalent to the cargo oil discharged or loaded. In addition, during the loading operation the hydrocarbon vapours issuing from the tank must be dispersed well above the deck. This is achieved by the use of high velocity gas venting valves. One type is shown in Figure 9.15. The arrangement consists of a fixed cone around which is a movable orifice plate. A counterweight holds the orifice plate closed until sufficient gas pressure builds up to lift the plate. The gas is throttled through the orifice and issues at high velocity, dispersing into the atmosphere well above the deck. During discharge the cover is opened and a linkage from the cover holds the orifice plate in the fully open position.

Types of ventilator head

Various different types and arrangements of ventilator head are in use. Figure 9.16 shows a selection of the more common designs.

Figure 9.16 Ventilator heads: (a) gooseneck type; (b) mushroom type; (c) fixed mushroom type

9
通风设备

远洋轮船需要在各种不同的气候下运行。气温可能在-15°C到50°C之间,海水温度在0°C到38°C之间。空气中的水分含量变化很大,太阳辐射可能会影响船只的一个或多个暴露表面。也会经历所有各种形式的好天气和坏天气。因此,需要来自空调和通风设备的空气为船员生活和工作提供可接受的气候,为机器使用提供足够的空气,并将货物的温度和湿度保持在可接受的水平。无论船舶外部气候条件如何,都必须做到这一点。因此,设计合适的系统需要有关船只贸易路线、货物类型和机器安装的信息。

住舱
大多数船舶的空调系统采用中央空调装置。这些装置是独立的,通过风道为特定区域内的舱室和空间供气。是否能控制单个舱室或空间取决于中央空调的性质和复杂性。有三种基本系统在使用——单风道、双风道和带再加热的双风道。在每种情况下,中央单元将清洁、提供温暖或凉爽的加湿或除湿的空气。

单管道系统
在单管道系统中,中央单元将室外空气与一些回流或循环空气混合。然后,这些空气被过滤、加热,可能还会被加湿或冷却。然后,经过调节的空气沿着一个单独的管道分配到不同空间中的各个送风单元。可以在特定的机舱或空间内控制供气量。图9.1显示了单管道系统的布置。

双管系统
同样,室外空气和返回空气在中央单元中混合,然后过滤、预热,可能还要加湿。一些空气在到达冷却器之前离开机组,被重新加热;随着外部温度的下降,该量增加。其余的全部通过冷却盘管。不同条件下的两种空气供应通过单独的管道输送到各个空间中的受控混合单元。然后可以为特定空间选择空气温度和条件。图9.2显示了双管系统的布置。

图9.1单管道系统

图9.2双管道系统

带再热系统的单管道
中央单元混合外部和返回空气,过滤,预热和加湿或冷却空气到系统任何部分所需的最低温度。然后,空气通过一个管道进入空间中的各个单元。在这些装置中有一个受控的加热器,空气从上面通过。加热可以通过循环热水或电加热器来实现。因此,可以调节空气供应及其温度。图9.3显示了带有再热系统的单管道的布置。

货舱
船的主要功能是把货物从一个地方运到另一个地方。货物必须在良好的状态下交付,除了小心装卸外,储存和通风必须适当和令人满意。不充足、质量差的空气供应会严重损坏大多数货物。相当简单的货物通风系统和操作程序可以防止这种损害。不同的货物对船上气候的反应就像人体一样复杂,结果往往造成不可挽回的损失。
某些普通货物、一些水果和蔬菜货物以及吸湿性(吸水或散发)货物是在非隔热货舱中运输的。因此,它们暴露在所有可能导致船体或货物凝结的气候变化中。因此,货舱的通风是必要的。冷藏和冷冻货物在隔热舱中运输,但是由于货物的活性和产气特性,它们也需要通风。

图9.3单管道带再热的系统

未隔热货舱的通风
未隔热货舱通风的目的是去除多余的热量和湿气,防止货物或船体上的湿气冷凝,并去除一些水果和蔬菜货物在成熟过程中产生的气体。自然和机械通风系统用于此目的。


图9.4中层甲板空间或车间的自然通风

自然通风是通过进出每个货舱的管道来实现的。这些入口和出口由各种设计的通风罩或通风器组成。风的作用迫使空气进入,或者由于排出器类型的排气将空气抽出,然后空气被替换,空气被吸入。在利用风力的情况下,通风罩必须手动定位,并且是必须很好地固定在甲板上的大而笨重的配件。图9.4显示了中层甲板或车间的自然通风布置。大多数现代船舶利用机械通风来提高可靠性、改善性能和减小必要的通风罩尺寸。
机械通风在两个不同的系统中运行——开放式和封闭式。
开放式系统使用安装在进气管和排气管中的轴流风扇。舱可以有单独的通风罩,也可以装在萨姆森柱或桅杆上。空气沿着围阱和风管供应到货舱底部。
空气从甲板下面的货舱顶部抽出。如果舱盖附近可能出现冷凝,例如室外空气温度较低,排气扇可以反转。图9.5显示了开放式机械通风系统的布置。
封闭系统使空气再循环,并允许受控量的新鲜空气进入。通风孔分布在货舱和货物周围,在两者之间形成一个隔热墙或隔热帘。废气从货舱底部排出。这种系统提供了各种可能的控制方式,并以各种形式广泛使用。图9.6显示了封闭的通风系统。


图9.5开式通风系统(a)正常循环;(b)反向循环----防止室外温度低时甲板下的循环

图9.6封闭通风系统(1再循环风门,2进气风门,3排气风门)

冷藏货舱的通风
冷藏货舱的每个空间都需要一个精心控制的换气系统。冷却空气由冷藏舱提供,在冷藏舱中,冷却空气从成熟的货物中获得热量,并带走所生产的货物。这些空气随后被排出,无论外部气候条件如何,必须在进气量和排气量之间保持谨慎的平衡。
一种系统通过中央单元将外部空气吸入一组冷却器管来实现这一点。除湿后的空气随后进入货舱。废气从直通管道抽回中央单元,然后返回到外部大气中。入口阀和出口阀的连接确保了始终向货舱提供恒定的空气。图9.7显示了这种系统的布置。
特定类型的船舶有其相关的货物通风问题,例如“滚装、滚卸”船舶,以及装卸过程中的车辆废气。散装货船通常只需要自然通风。每种船型的特殊问题必须在设计阶段尽早考虑,以确保提供合适的系统。

图9.7冷藏货舱的平衡空气更新系统

机舱
机舱需要锅炉、内燃机、压缩机等的全部供气,并为操作人员维持一个令人满意的工作环境。
某些机器消耗或需要空气来运转,应提供足够的尽可能低温的空气。机舱中出现的负压将影响内燃机的效率和性能。过压可能会导致热空气泄漏到起居处所中。通风对于排除机舱内产生的热量也是必要的,从而为员工提供一个合理的工作环境。这一非常困难的任务是通过向尽可能多的区域输送经过过滤但未冷却的空气来实现的。车间和控制室等特殊区域较小,可能装有空调,更容易提供可接受的工作环境。

图9.8(左)用中压轴流风机沿围阱向下送风的机舱通风
图9.9(左下)用低压轴流风机和高压离心风机沿围阱向下送风的机舱通风
图9.10(左下)用中压轴流风机和穿透围阱的机舱通风

图9.8-9.10显示了正在使用的向机舱和机舱棚供气的各种系统。
图9.8利用中压轴流风机沿围阱向下送风,空气在不同平台高度按比例释放,并通过机舱棚顶部排出。图9.9使用了一个低压轴流风扇向机舱棚区域供气。此外,高压离心风扇通过管道向各个平台的出口提供空气。图9.10使用中压轴流风机为各种平台的各种出口提供直通围阱系统。这种方法被证明是最好的。图9.11显示了机舱中压轴流风机和围阱的示意图。

控制室
在大多数现代机器处所提供的控制室确保了对这些处所内的气候进行严密仔细的控制,除了通风之外,通常还提供空调。这种气候控制为工作人员提供了一个与主机舱隔离的舒适的工作区域。此外,需要小心气候控制的精密设备也能接受它。现代控制设备的令人满意的操作和连续性能需要精心控制的环境,这可以通过使用控制室来实现。
一个单独的供气管道被引入控制室,通常通过过滤空调设备或装置,该设备或装置通过位于控制室的控制装置自动运行。匹配的排气装置将从控制室排出不新鲜的热空气。图9.12显示了这样的布置。



图9.11机舱通风-图解布置

图9.12控制室通风

图9.13泵房通风

泵房
油轮泵房需要通风,以带走密封套或管道接头泄漏产生的有毒货物烟雾。甲板以下空间的工作环境也必须让所有在场人员感到舒适。机械排气是通过使用轴流风扇和围阱来实现的。围阱从泵室地板和距离工作平台2.15米的紧急入口引出。这些紧急入口必须装有挡风闸,这些挡风闸可以从露天甲板或工作平台上打开或关闭。风扇电机位于机舱内,穿过舱壁上的气密密封驱动风扇。通过泵房顶部的通风罩或百叶窗供应空气。图9.13显示了一种布置。

双层底舱
双层底舱的通风是通过远离加注管的空气管提供的,通常位于舱的最高点,以避免出现不通风的气穴。空气管被引至露天甲板的鹅颈管或专利类型的头部。来自燃油舱的空气管道位于低风险区域,并安装有防火网(图9.14)。

图9.14空气管头

货舱
货舱的通风避免了货物装卸过程中可能出现的过压或分压情况。航行中的温度波动也可能产生类似的影响。来自货舱的蒸汽管道通向压力/真空泄压阀,这些泄压阀通常安装在甲板上方一定距离的竖管上。在大型油轮上,每个油舱都装有独立的排气管,而在较小的船上,一条共用的排气管通向桅杆或萨姆森柱。
在货物装卸过程中,通风要求相当高。空气的吸入量或排出量必须相当于卸下或装载的货油量。此外,在装载作业期间,从液舱排出的碳氢化合物蒸汽必须在甲板上方充分分散。这是通过使用高速排气阀来实现的。一种类型如图9.15所示。该装置由一个固定的圆锥体和一个可移动的孔板组成。配重保持孔板关闭,直到积聚足够的气压来提升孔板。气体通过节流孔节流,并以高速喷出,扩散到甲板上方的大气中。在排放过程中,盖子打开,盖子上的连杆将孔板保持在完全打开的位置。

图9.15 高速排气阀

通风筒的类型

正在使用各种不同类型和布置的通风筒。图9.16显示了一些比较常见的设计。

图9.16通风筒a)鹅颈型;(b)蘑菇型;(c)固定蘑菇型
回复 支持 反对

使用道具 举报

 楼主| 发表于 2023-2-18 23:10 | 显示全部楼层 来自: 中国上海
10
Organisations and regulations

The construction of merchant ships is considerably influenced and regulated by a number of organisations and their various requirements.
Classification societies. with their rules and regulations relating to classification, provide a set of standards for sound merchant ship construction which have developed over many years. These rules are based on experience, practical knowledge and considerable research and investigation.
The International Maritime Organisation (IMO formerly IMCO) is an international organisation which is attempting to develop high standards in every aspect of ship construction and operation. It is intended ultimately to apply these standards internationally to every ship at sea.
A vast amount of legislation is applied to ships and is usually administered by the appropriate government department. The load line rules and tonnage measurement are two particular legislative requirements that are outlined in this chapter.

Classification societies

A classification society exists to classify or 'arrange in order of merit' such ships as are built according to its rules or are offered for classification. A classed ship is therefore considered to have a particular standard of seaworthiness. There are classification societies within most of the major maritime nations of the world and some are listed below:

Lloyd's Register of Shipping (UK).
American Bureau of Shipping (USA).
Bureau Veritas (France).
Det Norske Veritas (Norway).
Germanischer Lloyd (Germany).
Registro Italiano (Italy).
Register of Shipping (USSR).
Nippon Kaiji Kyokai (Japan).

Consultation between the societies takes place on matters of common interest through the lnternational Association of Classification Societies (IACS).
The classification societies operate by publishing rules and regulations relating to the structural efficiency and the reliability of the propelling machinery and equipment. These rules are the result of years of experience, research and investigation into ship design and construction. They are in fact a set of standards. There is no compulsion on a shipowner to have his ship classified. However, the insurance premiums depend very much upon the class of a ship - the higher the standard the lower the premium. Also, by being classified a ship is shown to be of sound construction and a safe means of transport for cargo or passengers. There is no connection between the insurance companies and the classification societies.
The operation and organisation of Lloyd’s Register of Shipping, the oldest classification society, will now be considered. Throughout this book all references to classification society rules are to those of Lloyd's Register of shipping. This society is run by a general committee composed of members of the world community and the industry which it serves. National committees are formed in many countries for liaison purposes. A technical committee advises the general committee on technical problems connected with the society's business and any proposed alterations in the rules. The society publishes its 'Rules and Regulations for the Classification of ships’ in book form, which is updated as necessary, and also 'Extracts' from these rules and 'Guidance Note’ relating to more specific structures and equipment. The society employs surveyors who ensure compliance with the rules by attendance during construction, repairs and maintenance throughout the life of classed ships.
To be classed with Lloyd's, approval is necessary for the constructional plans, the materials used and the constructional methods and standards, as observed by the surveyor. The rules governing the scantlings of the ship’s structure have been developed from theoretical and empirical considerations. Lloyd’s collect information on the nature and cause of all ship casualties. Analysis of this information often results in modifications to the rules to produce a structure which is considered to be adequate. Much research and investigation is also carried out by the society, leading likewise to modifications and amendments to the rules.
The assigning of a class then follows acceptance by the general committee of the surveyor's report on the ship. The highest class awarded by Lloyd's is + 100 A1. This is made up as follows:
100 A         refers to the hull when built to the highest standards laid down in the rule.
1                 refers to the equipment, such as the anchors and cables, being in good and efficient condition.
+                 indicates that the vessel has been built under the supervision of the society's surveyors

It is also usual to name the type of ship following the classification, e g. +1 00 A 1 Oil Tanker. Machinery is also surveyed and the notation LMC (Lloyd's Machinery Certificate) is used where the machinery has been built according to the society's rules and satisfactorily proved on sea trials. This information regarding the classification of a ship is entered in the Register of Ships. The Register of Ships is a book containing the names, classes and general information concerning the ships classed by Lloyd’s Register of Shipping, and also particulars of all known ocean-going merchant ships in the world of 100 tons gross (a capacity measure) and upwards.       
The maintaining of standards is ensured by the society in requiring all vessels to have annual surveys or examinations. Special surveys are also required every four years from the date of the first survey for classification. More detail with regard to these surveys is given in Chapter 12.
The society is also empowered to act as an assigning authority. This means that it acts as the agent for the government in administering certain of the mandatory requirements for shipping, e.g. the load line rules.

IMO
The international nature of seaborn        trade has led finally to the organisation of an international body to provide intergovernmental cooperation on matters concerning ships, shipping and the sea. Under the auspices of the United Nations the International Marine Organisation (IMO), formerly IMCO was found. Following its formal approval by 21 states, the first assembly met in London in 1959.
IMO is responsible for carrying out many studies, producing detailed recommendations, developing standards and providing, following conventions, mandatory requirements for ship construction, outfitting and operation. The requirements such as those of the 1974 International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sta only become mandatory when adopted by the government of the vessel’s registered country. Some of the many areas of involvement by IMO can be seen in the following list:
(1) Navigational equipment.
(2) Life-saving equipment.
(3) Personnel training.
(4) Tanker construction and equipment.
(5) Fire safety in ships.
(6) Radio communications.
(7) Search and rescue techniques.
(8) Subdivision and stability.
(9) Carriage of dangerous goods.
(10) Marine pollution.
Items (4) and (5) will now be examined in some detail, since they embody many aspects affecting the construction of merchant ships.
       
Tanker construction and equipment
The construction and equipment of oil tankers will continue to be a source of much investigation since large quantities of oil have been, and are still being, discharged from damaged or foundered ships. Efforts are being made with the object of preventing or limiting pollution of the sea (and shore) by oil. Two particular avenues of approach are currently being adopted. The first deals with preventing the escape of the cargo oil in the event of a collision or grounding. The second approach is to attempt to limit sizes of centre tanks and wing tanks.
The first arrangement utilises segregated or clean ballast tanks (SBT or CBT). Proposals for the fitting of double-bottom tanks over the cargo tank length and wing ballast tanks have been put forward. These tanks are to be segregated, that is, for the carriage of clean water ballast only. The second method aims at restricting cargo tank sizes to 50 000 m3 for centre tanks and 30 000 m3 for wing tanks. This would limit the extent of pollution in the event of damage to a particular tank..
Other proposals following the 1973 Marine Pollution. Convention which are now in force include:
(1) For new crude carriers over 20 000 deadweight tonnes, segregated ballast tanks (SBT), crude oil washing (COW) and an inert gas system (IGS) will be required.
(2) For existing crude carriers over 40 000 deadweight tonnes, CBT, SBT or COW will be required.
(3) For existing crude carriers over 70 000 deadweight tonnes, IGS will be mandatory.
(4) For products carriers over 20 000 deadweight tonnes, IGS will be required.
(5) For products carriers over 30 000 deadweight tonnes, SBT will he required

Crude oil washing

With this system, cargo tanks are equipped with fixed washing machines through which crude oil (cargo) is pumped. The oil        pray impinges on the tank extremities and frees the sludge which has separated out during shipment. Crude oil washing can therefore mean more efficient discharge of cargo, while also being a useful aid to the load-on-top cleaning system.

Fire Safety in ships

Fire at sea is an ever-present and much feared hazard. For passenger ships the recommendations, rules and regulations following the 1974 International Conference on the Safety of Life at Sea are extensive. They cover the many aspects of detection, restriction and extinguishing of fires. Cargo ships, particularly in the accommodation areas, must likewise have arrangements to deal with fires.
The arrangements for fire protection, by virtue of details of arrangement of construction, as detailed in the 1974 international Conference on Safety of Life at Sea and Lloyd's Rules, are applicable to passenger ships carrying more than 36 passengers and cargo ships of more than 4000 tonnes gross. The following principles are the basis of the regulations:
1. The use of thermal and structural boundaries to divide the ship into main vertical zone .
2. Thermal and structural boundaries are used to separate the accommodation spaces from the rest of the ship.
3. The use of combustible materials is to be restricted.
4. Any fire should be detected, contained and extinguished where it occurs.
5. Access must be provided to enable fire fighting and a protected means of escape.
6. Where inflammable cargo vapour exists the possibility of its ignition must be minimized.

Various definitions are given for the special terms used. Nun-combustible material means a material which neither burns nor gives off inflammable vapours in a sufficient quantity to self-ignite when heated to 750°C in an approved test. Any other material is combustible. A standard fire test is when specimens of the relevant bulkheads or decks are exposed in a test furnace to a particular temperature for a certain period of time.
The 'A' Class division are those division formed by bulkheads and decks which comply with the following:
1. They shall be constructed of steel or other equivalent material.
2. They shall be suitably stiffened.
3. They shall be constructed to prevent the passage of smoke and flame for a one-hour standard fire test.
4. They must be insulated such that the unexposed side will not rise more than 139°C or any point more than 180°C above the original temperature within times as follows: Class A-60, 60 minutes; A-30, 30 minutes; A -15, 15 minutes; A-0, 0 minutes.

The 'B' Class division are those divisions formed by bulkheads which are constructed to prevent the passage of flame for a half-hour standard fire test. They must be insulated so that the unexposed side will not rise more than 139°C or any point more than 225°C, above the original temperature within times as follows: Class B-15, 15 minutes; B-0, 0 minutes.
The 'C' Class division are made of non-combustible material but meet no other requirement.
The main vertical zones are those sections into which the hull, superstructure and deckhouses are divided by 'A' class divisions, the mean length of which should not exceed 40 m.
The hull, superstructure, bulkheads, deck and deckhouses must be of steel or other material which has structural and fire integrity properties equivalent to steel. Pipe materials affected by heat must not be used for outlets near the waterline. The use of combustible materials should be kept to an absolute minimum. Paints, varnishes, etc., with a nitrocellulose base must not be used.
The hull, superstructure and deckhouses must be subdivided into main vertical fire zones of 40 m length or less. 'A' Class fire-resisting divisions are to be used from deck to deck and shell or other boundaries. 'A' Class boundary bulkheads above the bulkhead deck should, where possible, be in line with watertight bulkheads below.
Any openings in 'A' Class bulkheads must be made good for fire-resisting purposes. Dampers must be fitted in vent trunks and ducts and should be operable from either side of the bulkhead: indicators should also be fitted. Doors in 'A' Class bulkheads must be as fire resistant as the bulkhead and should be capable of being opened from either side by one person. Fire doors must he self-closing, even in an inclined position of 3.5°.
Other bulkheads in main vertical fire zones must he of 'B' Class fire-retarding material. Boundary bulkheads and decks separating the accommodation from holds or cargo spaces or machinery spaces must be A-60 Class fire-resisting divisions. Deck coverings within the accommodation spaces should be of non-ignitable material.
Stairways and lifts are to be steel-framed and within enclosures formed by 'A' Class divisions. Self-closing doors with positive means of closure should be fitted at all openings, and be as effective as the bulkhead in which fitted, for fire containment. Control stations, such as the radio room, bridge, etc. must be surrounded by 'A' Class divisions. Skylights in machinery spaces should have means of closing from outside the space and also steel shutters permanently attached.
Ventilation systems other than cargo and machinery spaces must have two independent control points where all machinery can be stopped in the event of a fire. Machinery space ventilation must be capable of being stopped from outside the space. All inlets and outlets must be able to be closed from outside the space. Air spaces in the accommodation behind ceilings, linings, etc., must be fitted with draught stops not more than 14 m apart.
The above arrangements are made to ensure that in the event of a fire on board ship it will be contained within the zone in which it occurs. Attempts can then be made to extinguish the fire or, at worst, escape. Stairways and lift trunks act as chimneys which encourage the fire and 'A' Class bulkheads are used here to ensure that this does not occur.

The load line rules freeboard
Freeboard is the distance measured from the waterline to the upper edge of the deck plating at the side of the freeboard deck amidships. The load line rules set out the requirements for a minimum freeboard which must be indicated on the ship's side by a special load line mark. This minimum freeboard is a statutory requirement under the Merchant Shipping Loadline Rules of 1968. These rules are based on the 1966 International Loadline Convention called by IMCO and ratified by each of the countries taking part.
A minimum freeboard is required principally to ensure that the ship is sea-worthy when loaded. The minimum freeboard provides the ship with a reserve of buoyancy which enables it to rise as it passes through waves and thus remain largely dry on its decks. This reserve buoyancy also improves the vessel's stability and in the event of damage will enable it to remain afloat indefinitely, or at least for a time, to effect the escape of the crew.
The assigning of freeboard follows a calculation which considers the ship's length, breadth, depth and sheer, the density of the water and the amount of watertight superstructures and other features of the ship. Additional conditions of assignment are also made relating to certain openings and fittings. The ship is assigned a basic minimum freeboard on the assumption that it is correctly loaded, with adequate stability and strength. A number of terms and dimensions are used in the computation of freeboard.
Freeboard deck.        This is the uppermost continuous deck exposed to the weather and the sea which has permanent means for the watertight closure of all exposed openings on the deck and in the side hell below.
Deck Line.        This is a horizontal line 300 mm long and 25 mm wide which is positioned amidships port and starboard. The upper edge of the line is located level with the upper surface of the freeboard deck plating on the outer shell.
Length.        The freeboard length is the greater of the following two measurements: (1) on a waterline at 85% of the least moulded depth, 96%of the length along the waterline; or (2) on the same waterline, the distance from the fore side of the stem to the axis of the rudder stock.
Breadth.        Measured at amidships, this is the maximum breadth to the moulded line.
Depth moulded.        This is the vertical distance between the upper edge of the keel and the upper edge of the freeboard deck beam measured at the ship's side.
Displacement.        This is the moulded displacement of the ship, excluding bossings, measured at 85%of the least moulded depth.
Block coefficient.        This is determined using the values of displacement, length, breadth and a value of draught which is 85% of the least moulded depth, i.e.
Block coefficient, Cb = Displacement / (Length * Breadth * Draught)
Superstructure.        This is a structure of adequate strength on the freeboard deck which extends transversely to at least within 0.04 times the breadth from the ship's side. The superstructure length, S, is taken as the mean length of that part of the superstructure within the freeboard length of the ship.

Freeboard categories
In order to assign freeboards, ships are divided into Types A and B. Type A ships are those designed specifically for the carriage of liquid cargoes in bulk. The cargo tanks have only small openings for access which are closed by watertight covers of adequate strength. Type B ships are all those which are not of Type A. The greater freeboard required for the Type B ship may be reduced in certain circumstances. In ships where steel hatch covers are fitted, special subdivision arrangements exist, improved water freeing arrangements are provided and better protection for the crew is given, a reduced freeboard is permitted. This reduction can result in an almost equivalent value to that of a Type A ship. Where this value is almost equivalent the notation Type B-100 is used, indicating a 100% reduction of the freeboard difference between Types A and B. The notation Type B-60 is used where a 60 reduction of freeboard difference is obtained. Bulk carriers particularly benefit from this reduction in freeboard.
The freeboard is determined from a calculation where a tabular freeboard figure based on the ship's length and type is adjusted by several corrections. These corrections are to account for the variations between the actual ship and the standard ship on which the tabular freeboard is based.

Flush deck correction
A Type B ship of less than 100 m length having superstructures with an effective length, E, of up to 35% of the freeboard length, L, may have its freeboard increased by
7.5 (100-L) (0.35 – E/L) millimetres
where E is the effective length of the superstructure, in metres. With the superstructure length, S, known the effective length, E, may be found from the load line rules.

Block coefficient correction
Where the actual block coefficient, Cb, of the ship exceeds 0.68, the freeboard amended by the flush deck correction, if relevant, is multiplied by the ratio
(Cb + 0.68) / 1.36
Cb is obtained as defined earlier.

Depth correction
The formula for the freeboard depth, D, is given in the rules. Where D is greater than the freeboard length, L, divided by 15, the freeboard is increased by
(D – 15/L) R
where R = L/0.48 for ships less than 120 m in length, or 250 for ships greater than 120 m in length. If D is less than L/15 no deduction is made, except where there is an enclosed superstructure extending 0.6L at midships. This deduction would be determined as for the flush deck correction.

Superstructure correction
For an effective length of superstructure, E, of 1.0 times the freeboard length, L, the freeboard may be reduced by 350 mm for a 24 m ship length, 860 mm for an 85 m ship length and 1070 mm for all ship lengths greater than 122 m.
Intermediate length deductions are obtained by interpolation; with effective lengths less than 1.0L the deduction is a percentage of the values given.

Sheer correction
The differences between the actual sheer profile and a standard sheer profile are determined. The correction is then the deficiency or excess multiplied by
(0.75 – S/2L)
where S is the mean length of the superstructure.
For a deficiency of sheer, the correction is added to the freeboard. With an excess, a deduction is permitted where the superstructure covers 0.1L aft and 0.1L forward of midships. For lesser lengths of superstructure, the deduction is obtained by interpolation. A maximum deduction of 125 mm per 100 m of ship length is permitted.
With the tabular value amended by the corrections, the freeboard value will be that for the maximum summer draught in sea water. This value may be further amended if, for instance, the bow height is insufficient as defined in the rules, cargo ports or openings are fitted in the sides below the freeboard deck or the shipowner requests a freeboard corresponding to a draught less than the maximum permissible.

Load line markings
The maximum summer draught, as determined above, is indicated by a load line mark. This consists of a ring of 300 mm outside diameter and 25 mm wide, intersected by a horizontal line 450 mm long and 25 mm wide. The upper edge of this line passes through the centre of the ring. The ring is positioned at midships and at a distance below the upper edge of the deck line which corresponds to the assigned minimum summer freeboard. This value may not be less than 50 mm.
A series of load lines are situated forward of the load line mark and these denote the minimum freeboards within certain geographical zones or in fresh water. The summer load line is level with the centre of the ring and marked S. The tropical T and winter W load lines are found by deducting and adding, respectively, 1/48 of the summer moulded draught. For a ship of 100 m length or less a Winter North Atlantic (WNA) zone load line is permitted. This line is positioned at the winter freeboard plus 50 mm. The fresh water freeboards F and TF are found by deducting from the summer or tropical freeboard the value
Displacement in salt water / (4 X TPC) millimetres
where TPC is the tonnes per centimetre immersion in salt water at the summer load waterline.

Figure 10.1 Load line markings (all lines 25 mm thickness)

These markings are shown in Figure 10.1. In all cases, measurements are to the upper edge of the line.

Conditions of assignment
Mention was made earlier of the conditions of assignment relating to freeboard. These are certain requirements which must be met to ensure the watertightness of openings and the ability of the ship to rapidly free itself of water on its decks. Reference will be made to two particular positions which are now defined.
Position 1.        Exposed freeboard, superstructure and raised quarter decks within one-quarter of the ship's length from the forward perpendicular.
Position 2.        Exposed superstructure decks outside one-quarter of the ship's length from the forward perpendicular.

Structural strength and stability
The ship is required to have the necessary structural strength for the freeboard assigned. Certain criteria with regard to stability must be met and an inclining experiment must be carried out in order to ensure compliance.

Superstructure end bulkheads
Such bulkheads for enclosed superstructures must be adequately constructed. Any openings must have a minimum sill height of 380 mm above the deck.

Hatchways
Portable covers secured by tarpaulins
Substantial coamings of mild steel or equivalent material must be fitted to all hatchways. Minimum heights are 600 mm in Position 1 and 450 mm in Position 2. Requirements must be met in respect of thickness of covers, strength, loading of covers and beams, carriers or socket design, cleats, battens, wedges, number of tarpaulins and securing arrangements.

Watertight steel covers
There are similar requirements for coamings, but these may be reduced in height or dispensed with where the safety of the ship is not affected. Again requirements must be met in respect of cover strength, construction and watertight securing arrangements.

Machinery space openings
Machinery space openings in Position 1 or 2 must be efficiently framed and plated for strength. Openings are to have watertight doors with sill heights of 600 mm in Position 1 and 380 mm in Position 2. All other openings are to have attached steel covers which can be secured weathertight if required.

Other openings in freeboard and superstructure decks
Manholes and scuttles (portholes)must have covers fitted to efficiently secure them. All doorways are to have a minimum sill height of 600 mm in Position 1 and 380 mm in Position 2. All openings other than hatchways, machinery space openings, manholes and scuttles, where in an exposed position, must be enclosed by a structure of equivalent strength and watertightness to an enclosed superstructure.

Ventilators
Coamings on ventilators must be 900 mm above deck in Position 1 and 760 mm in Position 2. Where exposed to severe weather or in excess of 900 mm high, coamings are to be suitably bracketed to the surrounding structure or deck.
Some means of permanent closure, either attached or close by, is required for all ventilators except those of height in excess of 4.5 m in Position 1 or 2.3 m in Position 2.

Air pipes
These pipes must be of efficient construction and have a permanently attached means of closing. The opening height must be a mininum of 760 mm on the freeboard deck and 450 mm on the superstructure decks.

Cargo ports and similar openings
Any cargo ports must be fitted with doors and frames which maintain the structural and watertight integrity of the ship. No door is to be fitted with any part of its opening below the load line decks.

Scuppers, inlets and discharges
All discharges from above or below the freeboard deck from enclosed spaces are to have an efficient non-return arrangement fitted. Arrangements and their control are specified according to the discharge distance from the summer load waterline. Manned machinery space inlets and outlets are to have readily accessible controls and valve position indicators. Scuppers from open spaces may be led directly overboard.

Side scuttles (portholes)
Every side scuttle below the freeboard deck is to be fitted with a hinged cover-plate or deadlight which may be securely closed and made watertight. No side cuttles may be fitted below 2.5% of the ship's breadth or 500 mm, whichever is the greater, above the load waterline.

Freeing ports
Where bulwarks on any exposed decks form wells they must be provided with sufficient means for rapidly freeing the decks of water. Special formulae are given or the determination of the freeing area in relation to the length of the bulwark, its height and the sheer of the deck. The lower edge of the freeing-port should be as close to the deck as possible. Two-thirds of the freeing area should be located near the lowest point of the sheer curve where sheer exists on the deck. Openings are restricted in height to 230 mm by bars being placed across them. Where shutters or flaps are fitted to these openings they should be prevented from jamming.

Protection of the crew
All exposed freeboard and superstructure decks must have bulwarks or guard rails fitted at their perimeter with a minimum height of 1 m. Where rails are fitted the deck and lower rail spacing must not exceed 230 mm and other rails 380 mm. Effective protection and safety in the form of gangways, passages and other means of access requited in the course of their work must be provided for the crew.

Special conditions of assignment for Type A ships

Machinery casings
An enclosed poop, bridge of standard height or a deckhouse of equivalent strength and height must protect the machinery casing. An exposed casing is allowed without doors or with a double-door arrangement, provided it is of weathertight construction.

Hatchways
All exposed hatchways are to have efficient watertight covers of steel or equivalent strength material.

Freeing arrangements
Open rails must be fitted for at least half of the exposed length of the deck. The upper edge of the sheer strake should be kept as low as possible. Where a trunk connects parts of the superstructure, open rails should be fitted at the perimeter of the deck in way of the trunk.

Protection of the crew
Where separate superstructures exist they should be connected by a raised gangway at the level of the superstructure deck. An acceptable alternative would be a passageway below deck. With a single superstructure, adequate safe arrangements should exist for access to all work areas on the ship.

Tonnage
Tonnage, as discussed in this section, is a measure of cubic capacity where 1 ton represents 100 ft3 or 2.83 m3. Tonnage is a measure of the ship's internal capacity, with two values being used. The gross tonnage is the total internal capacity of the ship and the net tonnage is the revenue-earning capacity.
Tonnage values are also used to determine port and canal dues, safety equipment and manning requirements and are a statistical basis for measuring the size of a country's merchant fleet. All ships prior to registry must be measured according to their country's tonnage regulations. The differences in the various measuring systems have led to ships having several tonnage values and to unusual designs which exploited aspects of tonnage measurement. The 1969 IMO International Conference on Tonnage Measurement of Ships led to an international review of the subject and a system which will ultimately be universally adopted. Reference will now be made to the British tonnage measurement system and also the 1969 Convention measurement system.

British tonnage
The current regulations governing tonnage measurement are the Merchant Shipping (Tonnage) Regulations 1967(11). The measurement of tonnage follows from various specialist terms and values which will now be defined in turn.
Tonnage deck.        This is the second deck, except in single-deck ships.
Tonnage length.        An imaginary line is drawn across the ship at the stem and stern on the inside of the hold frames or sparring. The tonnage length is the distance between these lines measured along the ship's centreline on the tonnage deck.
Tonnage breadth.        The breadth of the ship to the inside of the hold frames or sparring.
Underdeck tonnage.        This is the tonnage of the space below the tonnage deck. It is found by dividing the tonnage length into a specified number of parts. At each cross-section formed by this division, the tonnage depth is similarly divided up. The tonnage breadths at these points are then measured. The measured distances are then put through Simpson's rule to provide the underdeck volume which is converted into a tonnage value.

Gross tonnage
This is the total of the underdeck tonnage and the tonnage of the following spaces.
(1) Any tween-deck spaces between the second and upper decks.
(2) Any enclosed spaces above the upper deck.
(3) Any excess of hatchways over 0.5% of the gross tonnage.
(4) At the shipowner's option and with the surveyor's approval, any engine light and air spaces on or above the upper deck.
The term gross register tonnage (GRT) is also used.

Exempted spaces
These are spaces which are not measured for the gross tonnage calculation.
Such spaces may be above or below the tonnage deck and include.
(1) Wheelhouse, chartroom, radioroom and navigation aids room.
(2) Spaces fitted with and for the use of machinery or condensers.
(3) Safety equipment and battery spaces.
(4) Stability tanks and machinery.
(5) Galley and bakery spaces.
(6) Skylights, domes and trunks
(7) Washing and sanitary accommodation forming part of the crew accommodation.

Deducted spaces
The tonnage of these spaces must first be measured and may then be deducted from the gross tonnage of the ship to give the net tonnage. Examples of deducted spaces are:
(1) Master's accommodation.
(2) Crew accommodation and an allowance for provision stores.
(3) Chain locker, steering gear space, anchor gear and capstan space.
(4) Space for safety equipment and batteries below the upper deck.
(5) Workshops and storerooms for pumpmen, electricians, carpenter, and boatswain.
(6) Donkey engine and donkey boiler space if these are outside the machinery space.
(7) Pump rooms, where these are outside the machinery space.
(8) Water ballast tanks, where they are for the exclusive carriage of water ballast; a maximum limit of 19% of the gross tonnage is imposed.
(9) Propelling power allowance - this is the largest deduction and is determined according to certain criteria, as follows:
If the machinery space tonnage is between 13% and 20% of the gross tonnage, the propelling power allowance is 32% of the gross tonnage.
If the machinery space tonnage is less than 13% of the gross tonnage then the propelling power allowance is the amount expressed as a proportion of 32% of the gross tonnage.
Where the machinery space tonnage is more than 20% of the gross tonnage, the propelling power allowance is 1 3/4 times the machinery space tonnage. There is a maximum limit of 55% of the gross tonnage tot the propelling power allowance. If any part of the light and air space is included in the gross tonnage then it may also be included in the machinery space tonnage.

Net tonnage
This is the tonnage value obtained by deducting from the gross tonnage the total value of the deducted spaces. The net tonnage is considered to represent the earning capacity of the ship. The term net register tonnage (NRT) is also used.

Tonnage mark scheme
The tonnage mark scheme was devised to exempt from tonnage measurement the tween deck space between the uppermost complete deck and the second deck, provided a special tonnage draught mark was not submerged. The position of this mark on the ship's side was to generally correspond to the draught which would be obtained if the freeboard had been calculated for the second deck being the freeboard deck. A special mark is used and is shown in Figure 10.3. The position of the mark on the ship's side is given in the amendment to the load line rules dealing with the tonnage mark scheme.

Figure 10.2 Tonnage mark (all lines 25 mm thickness)

When the tonnage mark is at or above the waterline the ship is considered to have a modified tonnage. When the tonnage mark is below the waterline the ship is considered to be at its full tonnage.

1969 Tonnage Convention

Two tonnage values, the gross and the net, are used. The various position and extent of measurements of length, breadth and depth are defined and differ slightly from the British tonnage system. Excluded spaces, a cargo space and other terms are clearly defined.
The gross tonnage is computed from an empirical formula, the terms of which relate to the defined tonnage distances or to constants which are determined from the formulae given. Net tonnage is similarly found by another empirical formula consisting of measurements and constants.
The Convention advocates the use of the terms ‘UMS Gross’ and 'LMS Net' as dimensionless values instead of gross and net tonnages in tons. The acceptance of this convention will remove the tonnage mark scheme which has been the subject of much controversy.


Consequences of the 1969 Convention

Gross tonnage measurements or UMS Gross are, in general, fairly close to those value determined from current regulations. Ships with large exempted spaces will have somewhat larger gross tonnages under the new rules. Net tonnages do show significant variations between the measured values for individual ships. Ore and bulk-carriers with their high density cargoes will have a reduced net tonnage under the new rules. Again, ships with large exempted spaces will have larger net tonnages under the new rules.
Apart from the purely quantitative aspects, the universal adoption of the new rules will provide for safer ships. This is because constructional methods and unusual design features will no longer be influenced by tonnage measurement. The task of measurement will be simpler, since the necessary information can be taken directly from plans. The levies drawn from tonnage measurement will require some adjustment but will ultimately provide all concerned with a clear, precise basis for their charges.

10
组织和法规

商船的建造在很大程度上受到许多组织及其各种要求的影响和管理。
船级社,及其有关入级的规则和条例,提供了一套多年来发展起来的完善的商船建造标准。这些规则基于经验、实践知识和大量的研究和调查。
国际海事组织(IMO前身为IMCO)是一个试图在船舶建造和操作的各个方面发展高标准的国际组织。其目的是最终将这些标准在国际上应用于海上的每一艘船舶。
大量立法适用于船舶,通常由适当的政府部门管理。载重线规则和吨位丈量是本章概述的两项特殊的法律要求。

船级社
船级社存在的目的是对根据其规则建造的或提供入级的船舶进行入级或“按价值排序”。因此,一条入级的船被认为具有特定的适航性标准。世界上大多数主要航海国家都有船级社,其中一些列举如下:
劳埃德船级社(英国)。
美国船级社。
法国船级社。
挪威船级社(挪威)。
Germanischer Lloyd(德国)。
意大利船级社。
船舶注册处(苏联)。
日本Kaiji Kyokai(日本)。

各船级社之间通过国际船级社协会(IACS)就共同关心的问题进行磋商。
船级社通过发布与推进机器和设备的结构效率和可靠性相关的规范和条例来运作。这些规范是多年来对船舶设计和建造的经验、研究和调查的结果。它们实际上是一套标准。没有强迫船主将他的船入级。然而,保险费在很大程度上取决于船只的等级,标准越高,保险费越低。此外,通过入级,一艘船被证明具有良好的结构和安全的货物或乘客运输方式。保险公司和船级社之间没有联系。
现在将考虑最古老的船级社劳氏船级社的运作和组织。在本书中,所有对船级社规范的引用都是指劳氏船级社的规范。该协会由一个由国际社会成员和它所服务的行业组成的委员会管理。许多国家为联络目的成立了国家委员会。一个技术委员会就与该协会业务有关的技术问题以及对规范提出的任何修改向总用委员会提供意见。该协会以书籍的形式出版“船舶入级规范和条例”,并在必要时进行更新,还出版这些规则的“摘录”和与更具体的结构和设备相关的“指导说明”。该协会雇佣验船师,他们通过在入级船舶的整个寿命期间参与建造、修理和维护来确保遵守规范。
要得到劳氏船级社的入级,结构图纸、使用的材料以及结构方法和标准都必须得到批准,并由验船师检验。控制船舶结构尺寸的规则是从理论和经验考虑发展而来的。劳氏收集所有船舶事故的性质和原因的信息。对这种信息的分析常常导致对规则的修改,以产生被认为是适当的结构。该协会还进行了许多研究和调查,同样导致对规则的修改和修正。
随后,验船师的验船报告获总用委员会接纳后,该船会被授予相应的入级符号。劳氏颁发的最高等级是+ 100 A1。这由以下内容组成:
100 A是指船体按照规则中规定的最高标准建造。
1        指设备,如锚和缆绳,处于良好和有效的状态。
+        表明船只是在船级社验船师的监督下建造的。

通常也将船舶类型名称加在入级符号后,例如+1 00 A 1油轮。机器亦须接受检验,如机器是按照船级社的规则建造,并在海上试航中获得令人满意的证明,则使用LMC(劳氏机器证书)的标记。这一关于船只入级的信息记入船只登记簿。船舶登记簿是一本包含由劳氏船级社入级的船舶的名称、等级和一般信息,以及世界上所有已知的总吨位为100总吨(一种容量度量)及以上的远洋商船的详细信息的书。       
船级社要求所有船舶进行年度检验或检查,以确保标准的维持。还要求从第一次入级检验之日起每四年进行一次特别检验。关于这些检验的更多细节在第12章中给出。
该协会还被授权作为授权机关。这意味着它作为政府的代理人,管理航运的某些强制性要求,例如载重线规则。

国际海事组织
海运贸易的国际性最终导致了一个国际组织的成立,以提供关于船舶,航运和海洋的各种事务的跨国合作。在联合国的支持下,前身为IMCO的国际海事组织成立。在得到21个国家的正式批准后,第一次大会于1959年在伦敦召开。
国际海事组织负责开展多项研究,提出详细建议,制定标准,并按照惯例为船舶建造、舾装和操作提供强制性要求。诸如1974年《国际海上人命安全公约》的要求只有在被船只注册国政府采纳时才具有强制性。海事组织参与的许多领域如下:
(1)导航设备。
(2)救生设备。
(3)人员培训。
(4)油轮构造和设备。
(5)船舶的消防安全。
(6)无线电通信。
(7)搜救技术。
(8)分舱和稳性。
(9)危险货物运输。
(10)海洋污染。
第(4)项和第(5)项现在将被详细研究,因为它们包含了影响商船建造的许多方面。
       
油轮结构和设备
油轮的构造和设备将继续成为大量调查的来源,因为大量的油已经并仍在从受损或沉没的船只中排出。人们正在努力防止或限制石油对海洋(和海岸)的污染。目前正在采用两种特别的方法。第一个是在发生碰撞或搁浅时防止货油泄漏。第二种方法是试图限制中舱和边舱的尺寸。
第一种布置利用隔离的或干净的压载舱(SBT或CBT)。有人提出了在货油舱长度上安装双层底舱和边压载舱的建议。这些舱应隔离,即仅用于装载干净的压载水。第二种方法旨在将中央液货舱的容积限制在50000立方米,翼舱的容积限制在30000立方米。这将限制特定舱损坏时的污染程度。
1973年海洋污染事件后的其他提案。目前生效公约包括:
(1)对于载重量超过20000公吨的新油轮,将需要隔离压载舱(SBT)、干净压载舱(COW)和惰性气体系统(IGS)。
(2)对于载重量超过40000吨的现有油轮,将需要CBT、SBT或COW。
(3)对于超过70000载重吨的现有油轮,IGS将是强制性的。
(4)对于超过20000载重吨的成品油运输船,将需要IGS。
(5)对于载重量超过30000吨的成品油运输船,将要求SBT

原油洗涤
在这个系统中,货油舱装有固定的清洗器,原油(货物)通过清洗器泵入。油雾冲击舱末端,释放出装运过程中分离出来的油泥。因此,原油清洗意味着更有效的卸货,同时也是顶部装载清洁系统的有用辅助。

船舶消防安全
海上火灾是一种无时不在、令人恐惧的危险。对于客船,1974年国际海上人命安全会议之后的建议、规则和条例是广泛的。它们涵盖了火灾探测、限制和灭火的许多方面。货船,尤其是在居住区,同样必须有处理火灾的布置。
根据1974年国际海上人命安全会议和劳氏规则所详述的建造布置细节,防火布置适用于运载超过36名乘客的客船和总吨位超过4000吨的货船。以下原则是该条例的基础:
1.利用隔热边界和结构边界将船舶划分为主竖区。
2.隔热和结构边界用于将起居舱与船上的其他空间隔开。
3.可燃材料的使用受到限制。
4.任何火灾都应该在发生的地方被发现、控制和扑灭。
5.必须提供消防通道和受保护的逃生途径。
6.在存在易燃货物蒸汽的地方,必须尽可能降低其着火的可能性。

对于所使用的特殊术语给出了各种定义。不可燃材料是指在批准的试验中,当加热到750°C时,既不燃烧也不释放足够量的易燃蒸汽而自燃的材料。任何其他材料都是可燃的。标准的防火测试是将相关舱壁或甲板的样品在测试炉中暴露在特定温度下一段时间。
“A”级隔板是由符合以下规定的舱壁及甲板所形成的隔板:
1.它们应由钢或其他等效材料制成。
2.它们应适当加强。
3.它们的构造应能在一小时的标准燃烧试验中防止烟和火焰通过。
4.它们必须绝缘,以便未暴露侧不会在如下时间内升高超过139°C或在任何点超过原始温度180°C:A级-60,60分钟;A-30,30分钟;A -15,15分钟;0分钟后。

“B”级隔板是由舱壁形成的隔板,而该等舱壁的建造是为了在半小时标准耐火测试中防止火焰通过。它们必须绝缘,以便未暴露侧不会在以下时间内比原始温度升高超过139°C或在任何点超过225°C:B-15级,15分钟;B-0,0分钟。
“C”级隔板是用非可能燃烧材料造成,但不符合任何其他规定。
主竖区是用“A”级隔板将船体、上层建筑及甲板室分隔的部分,其平均长度不应超逾40米。
船体、上层建筑、舱壁、甲板和甲板室必须由钢或具有等同于钢的结构和防火完整性的其他材料制成。受热影响的管道材料不得用于水线附近的出口。可燃材料的使用应保持在绝对最低限度。不得使用含硝化纤维素的油漆、清漆等。
船体、上层建筑及甲板室必须细分为长度为40米或更短的主竖区。从一层甲板至另一层甲板及船体外板或其他界面,须使用“A”级耐火隔板。舱壁甲板之上的“A”级边界舱壁应尽可能与下面的水密舱壁成一直线。
“A”级舱壁上的任何开口必须耐火。挡火风闸必须安装在通风围阱和通风管内,并应可从舱壁的任何一侧操作:还应安装指示器。“A”级舱壁的门必须与舱壁一样耐火,并应能由一人从任何一边开启。防火门必须自动关闭,即使在3.5°的倾斜位置。
主竖区内的其他舱壁必须是“B”级耐火材料。将起居舱与货舱或机舱分隔的边界舱壁和甲板必须是A-60级耐火隔板。起居舱内的甲板敷料应为非易燃材料。
楼梯和电梯为钢架结构,位于由“A”级隔板形成的环围内。所有开口处应安装有可靠关闭装置的自动关闭门,并应与安装该门的舱壁一样有效,以进行防火。控制站,如无线电室、驾驶台等,必须被A级分隔包围。机舱内的天窗应有从舱外关闭的设施,并永久附装钢制百叶窗。
除货舱和机舱之外的通风系统必须有两个独立的控制点,一旦发生火灾,所有的机器都可以在这两个控制点停止工作。机舱通风必须能够从舱外停止。所有入口和出口必须能够从空间外部关闭。天花板、衬里等后面的空间,必须安装间距不超过14米的风挡。
作出上述安排是为了确保船上一旦发生火灾,火势将被控制在发生火灾的区域内。然后可以尝试灭火,或者在最坏的情况下,尝试逃生。楼梯和电梯通道充当了助长火灾的烟囱,这里使用了“A”级舱壁以确保这种情况不会发生。

载重线规定干舷
干舷是指从水线到船中部干舷甲板舷侧的甲板上边缘的距离。载重线规则列出最低干舷的规定,而最低干舷必须以特别的载重线标记在船舷显示。这个最小干舷是1968年商船载重线规则的法定要求。这些规则是基于1966年国际载重线公约,该公约由IMCO提出,并经各参与国批准。
要求最低干舷主要是为了确保船舶在装载时是适航的。最小干舷为船舶提供了浮力储备,使其能够在穿过波浪时上升,从而在甲板上保持大部分干燥。这种储备浮力还提高了船只的稳性,并且在损坏的情况下,将使其能够无限期地保持漂浮,或者至少保持一段时间,以实现船员的逃生。
干舷的分配遵循一种计算方法,这种计算方法考虑了船舶的长度、宽度、深度和舷弧、水的密度、水密上层建筑的数量以及船舶的其他特征。还制定了与某些开口和配件相关的附加分配条件。假定船舶正确装载,具有足够的稳性和强度,则为船舶指定一个基本的最小干舷。在计算干舷时使用了许多术语和尺寸。
干舷甲板。这是暴露在天气和海洋中的最上面的连续甲板,其具有永久的装置用于水密封闭甲板上和下面舷侧舱中所有暴露的开口。
甲板线。这是一条长300毫米、宽25毫米的水平线,位于船中的左舷和右舷。该线的上边缘与干舷甲板板的上表面齐平。
船长。干舷船长为以下两个量度中的较大者1)在最小型深的85%的水线上,为沿水线长度的96%;或(2)在同一水线上,由船首柱前端至舵杆轴线的距离。
船宽。在船中部测量,这是型线的最大宽度。
型深。这是在船舷侧测量的龙骨上缘和干舷甲板横梁上缘之间的垂直距离。
排水量。这是船舶的型排水量,不包括轴毂,在最小型深的85%处测量。
方形系数。这是使用排水量、船长、船宽和吃水深度值(最小型深的85%)确定的,即
方形系数,Cb =排水量/(船长*船宽*吃水)
上层建筑。这是一个干舷甲板上有足够强度的结构,其横向延伸至距离船舷至少0.04倍宽度以内(即其宽度不小于船宽的96%)。上层建筑长度S,取为上层建筑在船舶干舷船长范围内的平均长度。

干舷类别
为了分配干舷,船舶分为A型和B型。A型船舶是专为运输散装液体货物而设计的船舶。货油舱只有很小的入口,由足够强度的水密盖封闭。B型船舶是指所有不属于A型的船舶。B型船舶所需的较大干舷在某些情况下可以减小。在装有钢舱口盖的船舶上,存在特殊的分舱布置,提供改进的排水布置,并给予船员更好的保护,允许降低干舷。这种减少可以产生与A型船几乎相等的值。如果该值几乎相等,则使用B-100型符号,表示A型和B型之间的干舷差减少了100%。如果干舷差减少了60 %,则使用B-60型符号。散货船尤其受益于干舷的减少。
干舷是通过计算确定的,其中基于船长和类型的表列干舷数字通过几次修正进行调整。这些修正是为了说明实际船舶与作为表列干舷基础的标准船舶之间的差异。

齐平甲板校正
长度小于100米的B型船舶,其上层建筑的有效长度E可达干舷船长L的35%,其干舷可增加
7.5(100-L)(0.35-E/L)毫米
其中E是上层建筑的有效长度,以米为单位。已知上层建筑长度S,有效长度E可从载重线规则中找到。

方形系数校正
凡船舶的实际方形系数Cb超逾0.68,则经齐平甲板修正(如有关的话)修订的干舷乘以该比率
(Cb + 0.68) / 1.36
Cb按照前面的定义获得。

深度校正
规则中给出了干舷深度D的公式。如果D大于干舷船长L除以15,则干舷增加
(D–15/L)R
其中长度小于120米的船舶R = L/0.48,长度大于120米的船舶R = 250。如果D小于L/15,则不作扣除,除非有一个在船中部延伸0.6L的封闭上层建筑。这种扣除将根据齐平甲板校正来确定。

上层建筑校正
上层建筑的有效长度E为干舷船长L的1.0倍,对于24米长的船舶,干舷可减少350毫米;对于85米长的船舶,可减少860毫米;对于所有大于122米长的船舶,可减少1070毫米。
中间长度的推导是通过插值得到的;有效长度小于1.0L时,扣减量为给定值的百分比。

舷弧修正
确定实际剪切剖面和标准剪切剖面之间的差异。然后,修正量等于不足或超出量乘以(0.75S/2L)
其中S是上层建筑的平均长度。
对于舷弧的不足,修正量要加到干舷上。超过时,如果上层建筑覆盖船中前后各0.1L,则允许扣除。对于长度较小的上层建筑,可通过内插法进行推导。每100米的船舶长度最多允许扣除125毫米。
通过修正对表格值进行修正,干舷值将是海水中最大夏季吃水的值。例如,如果船首高度不足以满足《规则》的规定,在干舷甲板以下的舷侧安装了装货口或开口,或者船东要求的干舷相当于吃水小于最大允许吃水,则该值可以进一步修改。

载重线标记
如上所确定的最大夏季吃水由载重线标志表示。这包括一个外径为300毫米、宽25毫米的环,与一条长450毫米、宽25毫米的水平线相交。这条线的上边缘穿过环的中心。该环位于船中部,在甲板线上缘以下一段距离处,该距离对应于指定的最小夏季干舷。该值不得小于50毫米。
几条载重线位于载重线标记的前面,这些表示在某些地理区域内或在淡水中的最低干舷。夏季载重线与环的中心平齐,并标有S。热带T载重线和冬季W载重线分别通过减去和加上1/48的夏季型吃水而得出。长度为100米或小于100米的船舶,允许有北大西洋(WNA)冬季区域载重线。这条线位于冬季干舷加上50毫米处。淡水干舷F和TF是通过从夏季或热带干舷中减去该值而得到的
盐水中的排水量/ (4 X TPC)毫米
其中TPC是在夏季载重水线时盐水中每厘米浸入的吨数。

图10.1载重线标记(所有线的厚度均为25 mm)

这些标记如图10.1所示。在所有情况下,测量都是到线的上边缘。

分配条件
前面提到过与干舷有关的分配条件。这些是必须满足的某些要求,以确保开口的水密性和船舶快速排出甲板上的水的能力。将参考现在定义的两个特定位置。
位置1。从首垂线起四分之一船长内的外露干舷、上层建筑和升高后甲板。
位置2。从首垂线起四分之一船长以外的外露上层建筑甲板。

结构强度和稳性
要求船舶对于指定的干舷具有必要的结构强度。必须满足稳性方面的某些标准,并且必须进行倾斜试验,以确保符合要求。

上层建筑端舱壁
围封上层建筑的此类舱壁必须充分建造。任何开口都必须具有高于甲板380 mm的最低门槛高度。

舱口
用防水油布固定的便携式盖子
所有舱口必须安装低碳钢或同等材料的坚固围板。位置1的最小高度为600毫米,位置2的最小高度为450毫米。必须满足关于盖板厚度、强度、盖和梁的负载、承座或插口设计、夹具、板条、楔子、防水布数量和固定装置的要求。

防水钢盖
也有和对围板类似的要求,但在不影响船舶安全的情况下,这些要求可以降低高度或免除。此外,还必须满足盖强度、结构和水密固定装置方面的要求。

机舱开口
位置1或2的机舱开口必须有效地加框和板以增加强度。开口应配有水密门,位置1的门槛高度为600 mm,位置2的门槛高度为380 mm。所有其他开口应附有钢盖,如有需要,可防风雨固定。

干舷甲板和上层建筑甲板上的其他开口
检修孔和舷窗(舷窗)必须装有盖子,以有效地保护它们。所有门道在位置1的最低门槛高度为600 mm,在位置2的最低门槛高度为380 mm。除舱口、机舱开口、人孔和舷窗外,所有处于暴露位置的开口必须用强度和水密性与封闭上层建筑相当的结构封闭。

通风装置
通风装置上的围板在位置1必须高于甲板900 mm,在位置2必须高于甲板760 mm。在暴露于恶劣天气或高度超过900毫米的地方,围板应适当地用肘板固定在周围的结构或甲板上。
除了位置1处高度超过4.5米或位置2处高度超过2.3米的通风装置外,所有通风装置都需要一些永久性关闭装置,无论是附着式的还是关闭式的。

空气管道
这些管道必须具有有效的构造,并具有永久连接的关闭装置。开口高度在干舷甲板上必须至少为760毫米,在上层建筑甲板上必须至少为450毫米。

货舱口和类似开口
任何货舱口都必须安装保持船舶结构和水密完整性的门和框架。任何门的开口部分不得安装在载重线甲板之下。

排水口、进水口和排水口
所有从封闭处所的干舷甲板之上或之下排放的污水,均须装有有效的止回布置。根据从夏季载重水线的排放距离来规定布置及其控制。有人操纵的机舱入口和出口应具有易于接近的控制装置和阀门位置指示器。露天处所的排水口可直接通向船外。

舷窗
干舷甲板之下的每扇舷窗均须安装一个铰链盖板或舷窗盖,该盖板或舷窗盖可稳固地关闭并做到水密。不得在船舶宽度的2.5%以下或载重水线以上500毫米(以较大者为准)安装舷窗。

舷墙排水孔
如任何外露甲板上的舷墙形成水井,则必须提供足够的设施以迅速排出甲板上的水。对于舷墙的长度、高度和甲板的舷弧,给出了确定舷墙面积的特殊公式。舷墙排水孔的下缘应尽可能靠近甲板。舷弧面积的三分之二应位于舷弧曲线的最低点附近,如果甲板上存在舷弧。通过将钢条横放在开口上,将开口的高度限制为230毫米。当百叶窗或挡板安装在这些开口上时,应防止它们堵塞。

保护船员
所有暴露的干舷和上层建筑甲板必须在其周边安装舷墙或护栏,最低高度为1米。在安装栏杆的地方,甲板和下栏杆的间距不得超过230毫米,其他栏杆的间距不得超过380毫米。必须为船员提供工作过程中所需的舷梯、通道和其他通道等形式的有效保护和安全措施。

A型船的特殊分配条件

机舱棚
标准高度的封闭船尾楼、驾驶室或同等强度和高度的甲板室必须保护机舱棚。允许无门或双门布置的外露机舱棚,前提是其为风雨密结构。

舱口
所有暴露的舱口都要有有效的水密钢盖或同等强度的材料。

舷侧排水装置
必须为至少一半的甲板暴露长度安装开放式栏杆。舷侧列板的上边缘应尽可能低。如围壁通道连接部分上层建筑,应在围壁通道的甲板周边安装开敞式栏杆。

保护船员
如果存在独立的上层建筑,则应在上层建筑甲板的高度用升高的舷梯连接。可接受的替代方案是一条甲板下的通道。对于单一上层建筑,应存在足够的安全布置,以便进入船上的所有工作区域。

吨位(本节内容较老,与国际吨位公约不符)
本节中讨论的吨位是立方容量的量度,其中1吨代表100 ft3或2.83 m3。吨位是船舶内部容量的量度,有两个数值。总吨位是船舶的总内部容量,净吨位是创收能力。
吨位值还用于确定港口和运河费用、安全设备和人员配备要求,并且是衡量一个国家商船队规模的统计基础。所有船舶在注册前必须根据其国家的吨位条例进行测量。各种测量系统的差异导致船舶有几个吨位值,以及利用吨位测量的不同寻常的设计。1969年国际海事组织船舶吨位丈量国际会议导致了对这一问题的国际审查和最终将被普遍采用的制度。现在将参考英国吨位测量系统以及1969年公约测量系统。

英国吨位
现行的吨位丈量规例是1967年商船(吨位)规例(11)。吨位的测量遵循各种专业术语和值,现在将依次对其进行定义。
吨位甲板。这是第二层甲板,除了在单层甲板的船上。
吨位长度。一条假想的线在船首和船尾划在货舱肋骨或护板内侧。吨位长度是在吨位甲板上沿船舶中心线测量的这些线之间的距离。
吨位宽度。从船的宽度到货舱肋骨或护板的内侧。
甲板下吨位。这是吨位甲板下空间的吨位。它是通过将吨位长度分成指定数量的部分得到的。在由这种划分形成的每个横截面上,吨位深度被类似地划分。然后测量这些点的吨位宽度。然后,测量的距离通过辛普森法则得到甲板下体积,该体积被转换成吨位值。

总吨数
这是甲板下吨位和以下空间吨位的总和。
(1)第二层甲板与上层甲板之间的任何中层甲板空间。
(2)上层甲板之上的任何围封舱间。
(3)超过总吨位0.5%的舱口。
(4)由船东选择并经验船师批准,上甲板之上或之上的任何引擎灯及空气舱。
还使用了总注册吨位(GRT)这一术语。

豁免空间
这些空间不是为计算总吨位而测量的。
该等空间可在吨位甲板之上或之下,并包括。
(1)舵机房、海图室、无线电室和助航室。
(2)装有机器或冷凝器并供其使用的舱间。
(3)安全设备和电池空间。
(4)稳定舱和机器。
(5)厨房和面包房。
(6)天窗、圆顶和围壁通道
(7)构成船员舱房一部分的洗濯间及生间。

扣除空间
这些舱位的吨位必须首先量度,然后可从船舶的总吨位中扣除,以得出净吨位。扣除空间的例子有:
(1)船长住舱。
(2)船员住舱和给养储藏室。
(3)锚链舱、舵机间、锚具及绞盘间。
(4)上层甲板以下放置安全设备和电池的空间。
(5)水泵工、电工、木匠和水手长的车间和库房。
(6)辅助引擎及辅助锅炉舱(如该等舱间在机舱外面)。
(7)泵房,该等泵房在机舱外面。
(8)专门用于运输压载水的压载水舱;最高限额为总吨位的19%。
(9)推进动力余量-这是最大的扣除额,根据某些标准确定,如下所示:
如果机舱吨位在总吨位的13%至20%之间,推进功率余量为总吨位的32%。
如果机舱吨位少于总吨位的13%,则推进动力余量是以总吨位的32%的比例表示的数量。
如机舱吨位超过总吨位的20%,则推进动力余量为机舱吨位的1 3/4倍。总吨位的55%作为推进功率的最大限度。如果光舱和空气舱的任何部分包括在总吨位内,则它也可包括在机舱吨位内。

净吨位
这是从总吨位中减去扣除舱位的总价值所得的吨位值。净吨位被认为代表了船只的盈利能力。也使用净注册吨位(NRT)一词。

吨位标志图纸
吨位标记方案旨在免除最上层完整甲板和第二层甲板之间的中层甲板空间的吨位测量,前提是特殊吨位吃水标记未被淹没。该标记在船舷的位置,大致上是与假如干舷是为干舷甲板的第二层甲板计算而得的吃水相对应。使用特殊标记,如图10.3所示。该标记在船舷的位置,已在处理吨位标记图纸的载重线规则的修订中列出。

图10.2吨位标记(所有线条厚度均为25毫米)

当吨位标记在水线处或水线以上时,船舶被视为具有经修改的吨位。当吨位标记在水线以下时,该船被视为处于其满载吨位。

1969年吨位公约

使用了两个吨位值,总吨和净吨。长度、宽度和深度的各种测量位置和范围都有定义,与英国吨位系统略有不同。排除空间、货舱和其他术语都有明确的定义。
总吨位是根据经验公式计算的,该公式的术语与规定的吨位距离或常数有关,这些常数是根据给定的公式确定的。由测量值和常数组成的另一个经验公式同样可以得出净吨位。
该公约提倡使用术语“UMS总吨”和“LMS净吨”作为无量纲值,而不是以吨为单位的总吨和净吨。接受这一公约将取消备受争议的吨位标志图纸。

1969年公约的后果

总吨位测量值或UMS总吨位,一般来说,相当接近于根据现行法规确定的那些值。根据新规定,拥有大面积豁免空间的船舶将拥有更大的总吨位。净吨位确实显示出各船测量值之间的显著差异。根据新规定,装载高密度货物的矿石和散货船的净吨位将会降低。同样,根据新规定,拥有大面积豁免空间的船舶将拥有更大的净吨位。
除了纯粹的数量方面,新规则的普遍采用将为船舶提供更安全的保障。这是因为构造方法和不寻常的设计特征将不再受吨位测量的影响。测量的任务将会更简单,因为必要的信息可以直接从图纸中获得。从吨位丈量中提取的征税将需要一些调整,但最终将为所有相关方提供一个清晰、准确的收费基础。
回复 支持 反对

使用道具 举报

 楼主| 发表于 2023-2-18 23:10 | 显示全部楼层 来自: 中国上海
11
Corrosion and its Prevention

The prevention of corrosion on board ship is an immense ongoing process demanding the attention and skills of considerable number of personnel. The ship because of its size, its physical environment and the materials used in its construction is subject to attack from the various forms of corrosion.

Corrosion

Corrosion is the wasting of metals by chemical or electrochemical reaction with their surroundings. Erosion is a term often associated with corrosion and refers to the destruction of a metal by abrasion. Erosion is therefore a mechanical wastage process that exposes hare metal which can then corrode.
Iron and steel corrode in an attempt to regain their oxide form which is in a balanced state with the earth's atmosphere. This oxidizing, or rusting as it is commonly termed, will take place whenever steel is exposed to oxygen and moisture. The prevention of corrosion therefore deals with the isolation of steel from its environment in order to stop this oxidation taking place.
In addition, the presence of a ship almost constantly in sea water enables an electrochemical reaction to take place on unprotected steel surfaces. A corrosion cell is then said to have been formed. This often referred to as a 'galvanic cell', since its current flow is a result of a potential difference between two metals (not necessarily different) in a solution such is sea water. This current flow results in metal being removed from the anode metal or positive electrode, while the cathodic metal or negative electrode is protected from corrosion. Most common metals can be arranged in what is known as a galvanic series, according to their electrical potential in sea water, as shown in Table 11.1.
A simple example of a corrosion cell would be a plate of copper and one of iron placed in a sea water solution and joined by a wire. Reference to Table 11.1 will show that copper will become the cathode in protected end and the steel will become anodic and corrode. This shown in Figure 11.1. The chemical reactions taking place and the electron flow occurring will result in the anodic metal combining with dissolved oxygen to form its stable oxide form (rust).
Corrosion can also occur as a result of stress, either set up in the materials during manufacture or as a result of its 'working' in the sea. The effects of stress and fatigue are to provide areas where cracking may occur, but even these some-times minute cracks create conditions under which galvanic corrosion will proceed. The combined action of the two has a considerable effect on the material.

Table 11.1 GALVANIC SERIES OF METALS AND ALLOYS IN SEA WATER
Cathodic or noble materials
(protected material)

Anodic or ignoble metals
(corroding material)
Platinum
Gold
Graphite
Silver
Passive stainless steels
Passive high nickel alloys
Passive nickel
Silver solders
Copper-nickel alloys
Bronzes
Gunmetal
Copper
Brass (70/ 30)
Active nickel alloys
Active nickel
Mill scale
Naval brass and brass (60/40)
Tin
Lead
Lead-tin solders
Active stainless steels
Cast iron
Iron and steel
Aluminium alloys
Cadmium Aluminium
Zinc
Magnesium alloys
Magnesium

Figure 11.1 Corrosion cell

Corrosion prevention

The prevention of corrosion deals in the first place with the provision of an adequate protective coating for the ship's structural steel and its continued maintenance. Secondly, a means of preventing electrochemical wastage is required, which is known as cathodic protection. The two distinctly different types of corrosion prevention are usually complementary to one another in that both are normally fitted on modern ships. Finally, it should be noted that a knowledge of the processes of corrosion can ensure the reduction or prevention of corrosion on board ship, particularly on the internal structure, by the use of good design and arrangement of structural members.

Paint

Protective coatings refer to the application of a suitable paint system. Paint is a mixture of three ingredients - the pigment, the binding agent or vehicle and the solvent. The pigment is responsible for the colour and covering capacity and may also refer to certain additives, depending upon the properties required of the final product. The binding agent or vehicle, depending on its proportion in the paint, will decide the consistency and ease of application of the paint. The solvent or thinner is added to make the paint now easily.
Most paints consist of solid pigments, usually in a finely divided form, suspended in a liquid binder or vehicle which when spread thinly over a surface will eventually dry out. A thin dry film is then left adhering to the surface. The 'drying' process associated with ships' paints is usually the evaporation of the solvent from the vehicle. Good ventilation is therefore essential and moisture-laden atmospheres are to be avoided during the drying process. The coating applied must also be thin to ensure that it dries out correctly. The appropriate solvent is essential to ensure the correct drying time; too quick and blistering can occur, too slow and the paint may end up immersed before it is dry.
The common vehicles in use are:
(1) Bitumen or pitch - bitumen or pitch in a white spirit solvent, or blends of pitch with other materials.
(2) Oil based - vegetable drying oils. e.g. linseed oil. dehydrated castor oil.
(3) Oleo-resinous - natural or artificial resins mixed into drying oils.
(4) Alkyd-resin - a special type of (3).
(5) Chemical resistant - chlorinated rubber, epoxide resins and coal tar/ epoxide are examples.

All the above vehicle types are suitable for above-water use. Only types (1) and (5) and certain types of (3) are suitable for underwater use, because of the need to resist alkaline deposits formed at the anodes of corrosion cells.


Anti-fouling paint

Fouling is the covering of a ship's underwater surface with marine organisms such as green slime, weeds and barnacles. Fouling occurs usually only when the ship is at rest and is dependent on water temperature, salinity, the season, the place. etc.
The slower speeds of the larger tankers and bulk carriers has resulted in increased fouling problems, since some marine organisms can survive and grow at speeds of 10- 15 knots. The result of fouling is increased hull resistance and subsequent loss of the ships' speed or increased fuel consumption.
Anti-fouling paints function by slowly releasing a poison into the laminar sea water layer surrounding the ship. This sea water soluble poison is toxic to marine organisms which must pass through this laminar layer in order to attach themselves to the ship. The poison is released at a controlled rate, determined by the type of toxin and also the degree and rate of solubility of the binder.
Two basically different types of anti-fouling paint currently exist - non-polishing and self-polishing.
Non-polishing anti-fouling may have either a soluble or insoluble matrix. The soluble matrix consists mainly of rosin (colophony) which is slightly sea-water soluble. The bio-active materials (poisons) are released in sea water together with the binder. The insoluble matrix type uses a large proportion of polymeric binders which are insoluble in sea water. The bio-active materials are released together with other components which act as leaching aids. This leaves behind a released layer of insoluble binder. The release rate of the bio-active materials in each type will decrease with time in service of the vessel. The bio-active materials will include cuprous oxide and organotin compounds.
The amount or 'loading' of these materials is varied according to the vessel's requirements. Small amounts would be used for vessels trading in cold and temperate climates with short idle periods and long sailing times. Large amounts would be used for a vessel trading world-wide in warm climates with short-to-medium idle time and varied sailing periods. Different strengths of binder result in the use of one-or two-coat systems to achieve a particular dry film thickness. The dry film thickness determines the quantity of bio-active materials available and the system life time. For any particular dry docking interval a suitable life time must be selected. It should be noted that the bio-active materials in the system are consumed faster during high speed sailing.
Self-polishing anti-fouling is designed to wear down slowly while maintaining a bio-active interface between the coating and the water. One type of this paint uses a tributyltin copolymer binder and reinforcing bio-active compounds which produce a synergistic (assisting one another) effect with tributyltin anti-foulants.
The tributyltin copolymer produces tributyltin oxide (TBTO)in a hydrated form by hydrolysis (ionic dissociation) with sea water. The reinforcing bio-active compounds are comprised of cuprous oxides and organotin compounds. They leach as the tributyltin copolymer releases its tributyltin content. The copolymer then becomes water soluble and is washed off. This renews und activates the next layer of tributyltin molecules.
The self-polishing rate is determined during paint manufacture by the nature of the copolymer binder. One manufacturer provides three self-polishing rates which, together with two possible degrees of fouling protection, results in six possible types of coating. The fouling protection may be either normal or severe.
The three self-polishing rates relate to low-to-medium speed, medium-to-high speed and very high speed hulls. The degree of hull roughness acceptable increases in the same order and dry film thicknesses are 100 μm,80 μm and 60 μm per coat minimum respectively. The self-polishing rate will increase with speed and average hull roughness.

Figure 11.2 Principal painting areas

Painting the ship

The paint used must be appropriate for the degree of protection required at the particular area or section of the ship. The principal areas requiring, different forms of treatment are the underwater plating and boot topping region, the top sides, the superstructure and the weather decks (Figure 11.2).


Preparation and priming

The surface preparation of the steel plate must first be good in order to ensure the successful operation of the applied painting system. The steel plates used in ship construction are first shot-blasted to remove all traces of rusting and mill scale which may be present. The plating is then immediately primed with a quick-drying prefabrication primer. This all takes place as part of a continuous undercover process under controlled conditions. This coating is usually adequate to protect the plate during the various fabrication processes leading to its incorporation into the hull of the ship. Final painting will progress with the construction of the ship.


Underwater areas

The underwater and boot topping plating region will have paint types applied after consideration of the presence and type of cathodic protection applied to the hull and the degree of anti-corrosive and anti-fouling paint which is required. Highly alkaline conditions are to be found near the anodes of cathodic protection systems, and paints of an epoxide type are therefore required to resist these chemical conditions. Anti-fouling properties are also required for paints used in this region to emit poisons that will kill the marine organisms which tend to collect on ships' hulls. While fouling in the main increases ship resistance there are certain bacteria which reduce sulphates in sea water and release oxygen which can then take part in the corrosion process. The anti-fouling properties of a paint for the underwater regions are therefore important. The actual choice of paint type and its particular composition is usually made by the shipowner bearing the above factors in mind.
Modern practice makes little or no distinction between the paint used on the bottom shell and that used around the boot topping region. The boot topping region is, however, more likely to suffer damage due to mechanical abrasion (erosion) and the action of waves. Some suitable vehicle types of paint for this region would be bitumen in pitch, oleo-resinous epoxide, coal tar/epoxide resin and chlorinated rubber. A compatible primer would be applied first, then the particular paint type and a final coat of anti-fouling paint if it is to be used.

Topsides and superstructures

Topsides and superstructures are usually adequately coated with primer, an undercoat and a finishing paint. Paint based on alkyd resins, modified alkyd resins and enamels are used in this region. Since appearance is of some importance, good colour- and gloss-retaining properties of the paints used on these parts is essential.


Weather decks

The paint for the weather deck area requires exceptionally good resistance to wear and abrasion and some non-slip quality. The deck coating should also be resistant to any oils or chemicals carried as cargo or fuel. Initial protective coatings topped by grit-reinforced oleo-resinous paints have been used success fully, as have primers and chlorinated rubber deck paints. Certain metallic final coats have been tried with considerable success, more particularly on naval vessels. The constant abrasion on weather decks from traffic, cargo handling and general ship operation makes long-term protection by paint alone almost impossible. Self-sealing coatings utilising epoxide resins have been used with some success on top of epoxide resin paint for a hard-wearing deck covering.


Tanks

Ballast, cargo/ballast and fresh water tanks require special coatings, depending upon the nature of their contents. Treatments used include two coats of epoxide resin or a three-coat phenolic resin-based paint, with care taken to ensure compatibility with the tank contents. Fresh water tanks can be satisfactorily protected by bitumen or tar paint. Drinking water tanks must have a non-taint coating such as artificial bitumen to BS 3416 Type 2.


Cathodic protection

When a metal is in contact with an electrolyte, e.g. the steel of a ship's hull in sea water, small corrosion cells may be set up due to slight variations in the electrical potential of the metal's surface. Electric currents flow between the high and low potential points, with the result that metal is corroded from the point where the current leaves the metal (the anode). At the point where the current re-enters the metal (the cathode) the metal is protected. Cathodic protection operates by providing a reverse current flow to that of the corrosive system. With current then entering the metal at every point, i.e. the whole metal surface becomes a cathode, it is therefore cathodically protected.
When the potential over the immersed hull surface is 0.80-0.85 V more negative than a reference silver/silver chloride electrode in the water nearby, then the hull is adequately protected. Current density of the order of 20-100 mA/m2 is usually sufficient on a painted hull to reverse any corrosion current and cease further metal corrosion. Current density necessarily increases for a poorly painted hull and therefore cathodic protection should be regarded as an additional protection to painting and by no means a substitute.
Two means of cathodic protection are in general use on ships - the sacrificial anode type and the impressed current type. The sacrificial anode type of cathodic protection uses metals such as aluminium and zinc which form the anode of a corrosion cell in preference to steel (see Table 11.1). As a consequence, these sacrificial anodes are gradually eaten away and require replacement after a period of time. The impressed current system provides the electrical potential difference from the ship's power supply through an anode of a long-life highly corrosion-resistant material such as platinised titanium.


Sacrificial anode system

Sacrificial anodes are, in practice, arranged as blocks and are securely bolted or welded to the ship's hull by their steel core to give a good electrical connection. Their metal composition is aluminium or zinc, usually in alloyed form. They are designed to ensure uniform wearing away and to provide a constant current to the protected steel. The amount of sacrificial anode material fitted to a ship's hull is based on the wetted surface area of hull and a measure of the hull's electrical potential. The amount of anode material should provide a protective current of 12- 20 mA/m2. Modern sacrificial anodes have a life of 3-4 years before requiring replacement.


lmpressed current system

The impressed current system consists of a source of direct current, anodes, apparatus for measuring and controlling the current and a high quality inert protective coating around the areas of the hull nearest to the anodes. Continuous control of the impressed current requited for adequate protection varies with the immersed area, the ship speed, the salinity of the water and the condition of the hull paintwork. Modern equipment is capable of automatic current control under all of these conditions. This control is usually obtained by the use of reference anodes positioned some distance from the operating anode. If too great a current were to flow it could actually blister or destroy paint coatings on the ship's hull. Around the anodes a protective shield of epoxy resin is applied directly to the hull for a radius of 1 m or more, since highly alkaline conditions arise near the anodes. An impressed current system for a ship is shown in Figure 11.3. Details of an anode and a reference anode together with the cofferdam cable arrangements are given in Figures 11.4 and 11.5. A propeller shaft bonding arrangement must be fitted with impressed current systems to ensure propeller protection (Figure 11.6).


Cathodic protection of tanks

The cathodic protection of ballast and cargo/ballast tanks is only ever of the sacrificial anode type using aluminium, magnesium or zinc anodes. The use of aluminium and magnesium anodes is restricted by height and energy limitations to reduce the possibility of sparks from falling anodes. Magnesium and aluminium anodes are not permitted at all in cargo oil tanks or tanks adjacent to- cargo oil tanks. The anodes are arranged across the bottom of a tank and up the sides, and only those immersed in water will be active in providing protective current flow. Current density in tanks varies from 5 mA/m2 for fully-coated, surfaces to about 100 mA/m2 for ballast-only tanks. Deckheads cannot be cathodically protected, since tanks are rarely full; they are therefore given adequate additional protective coatings of a suitable paint for the upper 1.5 m of the tank.

Figure 11.4 Anode arrangement: (a) anode; (b) section through anode

Corrosion prevention by good design

The third method of corrosion prevention is by good design based on a knowledge of the corrosion processes. Good design. therefore, should avoid the trapping of corrosive agents or the setting up of corrosion cells in places which cannot be reached, are poorly ventilated, or rarely protected or maintained.
Small pockets, crevices, etc., where salt spray, water, etc., can collect will result ultimately in severe rusting. Since this involves an increase in volume of the material it will be followed by distortion or fracture of the structural members. Scaling of such crevices by welding or concrete, or their avoidance in the design stage, should be ensured. Dripping water as a result of poorly designed discharges or scuppers should be avoided. Condensed moisture on the underside of enclosed structures will cause corrosion and good design should ensure adequate ventilation of these areas. Steel decks covered by wood will corrode unless the steel is suitably protected and the wood is 'sealed' by a bitumen coating. All joints should be sealed by a suitable filler and any bolts through the wood should have washers under the nuts to prevent the entry of water. Paint, to be an effective protection, requires an adequate thickness over the metal surface. The surface should be made as accessible as possible to enable good coverage and a uniform dry paint thickness. Welding can be used to fill small crevices; however, any welded surface must be suitably prepared prior to painting to ensure protection against corrosion. Smooth rounded surfaces are always easier to paint and less liable to damage and subsequent corrosion.
The atmosphere of machinery spaces and boiler rooms, with the presence of heat, moisture, vibration and foul air, presents ideal conditions for the corrosive process to take place. Surfaces should therefore be kept water-free and as cool as possible by good drainage, insulation of steam pipes, etc., and good ventilation. Inaccessible places such as machinery seats should be well protected by painting before any machinery is fitted. Double-bottom tanks under boilers are some-times left empty and specially coated with heat-resistant paint. All double-bottom tanks should be regularly inspected and maintained but only after adequate ventilation has been ensured. Maintenance should take the form of painting with bitumastic paint mixtures or in some cases cement wash. Any double-bottom tanks regularly used for oil will have little or no need for corrosion protection.
Two different metals in contact in the presence of an electrolyte such as rain, spray or condensation, can result in a corrosion cell. This can create problems in areas where light alloy members such as aluminium are in contact with steel, as in the superstructure of passenger ships .Modern practice with such joints is to use insulating ferrules, such as neoprene or some inert filler, between the metal surfaces. Problems do still arise where such joints are made by bolting or riveting, and regular maintenance and attention is required.
Where stainless steel is used in a marine environment the passive mode should be selected, since it is almost immune to electrochemical action.
 
腐蚀及其预防
在船上,防腐蚀是一个巨大的持续过程,需要大量人员的关注和技能。由于其尺寸、物理环境和建造材料的原因,船容易受到各种形式的腐蚀。

腐蚀
腐蚀是金属因与周围环境发生化学或电化学反应而产生的损耗。侵蚀是一个经常与腐蚀联系在一起的术语,指的是磨损对金属的破坏。因此,侵蚀是一种暴露出金属的机械损耗过程,然后被腐蚀。
铁和钢受到腐蚀,试图重新获得它们的氧化物形式,这种形式与地球大气处于平衡状态。只要钢暴露在氧气和湿气中,就会发生氧化或通常所说的生锈。因此,为了防止腐蚀,需要将钢与其环境隔离,以阻止氧化的发生。
此外,船舶几乎始终处于海水中,这使得电化学反应能够在无保护的钢表面上发生。这时就说腐蚀电池已经形成。这通常被称为“原电池”,因为它的电流是由海水等溶液中两种金属(不一定不同)之间的电位差引起的。该电流导致金属从阳极金属或正电极上移除,而阴极金属或负电极被保护免受腐蚀。如表11.1所示,根据金属在海水中的电位,最常见的金属可以排列成所谓的电偶系列。
腐蚀电池的一个简单例子是将一块铜板和一块铁板放在海水溶液中,用导线连接起来。参考表11.1可以看出,铜将成为受保护端的阴极,钢将成为阳极并被腐蚀。这如图11.1所示。发生的化学反应和电子流将导致阳极金属与溶解氧结合,形成稳定的氧化物形式(铁锈)。
应力也可能导致腐蚀,应力可能是制造过程中材料内部产生的,也可能是材料在海中“工作”的结果。应力和疲劳的作用是提供可能出现裂纹的区域,但即使这些微小的裂纹也会产生电偶腐蚀的条件。两者的共同作用对材料有相当大的影响。

表11.1海水中金属和合金的电偶系列
阴极或贵金属
(受保护材料)


金色的
石墨

钝化不锈钢
钝化高镍合金
钝化镍
银焊料
铜镍合金
青铜
青铜

黄铜(70/ 30)
活性镍合金
活性镍
里皮
海军黄铜和黄铜(60/40)


铅-锡焊料
活性不锈钢
铸铁
钢铁
铝合金
镉铝

镁合金

阳极或可忽略的金属
(腐蚀材料)


图11.1腐蚀电池

防腐蚀
防止腐蚀首先要为船舶的结构钢提供足够的保护涂层,并对其进行持续维护。第二,需要一种防止电化学损耗的方法,即阴极保护。这两种截然不同的防腐方式通常是互补的,因为它们通常都安装在现代船舶上。最后,应该注意的是,腐蚀过程的知识可以确保通过使用良好的设计和结构构件的布置来减少或防止船上的腐蚀,特别是内部结构上的腐蚀。

油漆
保护涂层是指应用合适的油漆系统。油漆是三种成分的混合物——颜料、粘合剂或载色剂和溶剂。颜料负责颜色和遮盖能力,也可以指某些添加剂,这取决于最终产品所需的性能。粘合剂或载色剂,取决于其在油漆中的比例,将决定油漆应用的一致性和方便性。加入溶剂或稀释剂是为了让油漆变得容易流动。
大多数油漆是由固体颜料组成的,通常是微细的形式,悬浮在液体粘合剂或载色剂中,当薄薄地涂在表面上时,最终会变干。然后在表面留下一层干膜。与船舶油漆相关的“干燥”过程通常是溶剂从载体中蒸发。因此,良好的通风是必不可少的,干燥过程中应避免潮湿的空气。应用的涂层也必须薄,以确保它正确干燥。合适的溶剂对于确保正确的干燥时间至关重要;太快会起泡,太慢会导致油漆未干就浸入水中。
常用的载色剂有:
(1)沥青——石油溶剂中的沥青,或沥青与其他材料的混合物。
(2)油基——植物干性油。例如亚麻籽油,脱水蓖麻油。
(3)油性树脂——混合在干性油中的天然或人造树脂。
(4)醇酸树脂——(3)的一种特殊类型。
(5)耐化学性——例如氯化橡胶、环氧树脂和煤焦油/环氧化物。

以上所有载色剂类型都适合水上使用。只有类型(1)和(5)以及某些类型(3)适合水下使用,因为需要抵抗在腐蚀电池阳极形成的碱性沉积物。

防污漆
污垢是指船舶水下表面覆盖有海洋生物,如绿色粘液、杂草和藤壶。结垢通常只在船静止时发生,并取决于水温、盐度、季节和地点。等等,
较大的油轮和散装货船的较慢速度导致了更多的结垢问题,因为一些海洋生物可以在10- 15节的速度下生存和生长。结垢的结果是增加了船体阻力和随后的船速损失或增加了燃料消耗。
防污漆的作用是通过缓慢释放毒素到船周围的层流海水层中。这种可溶于海水的毒物对海洋生物是有毒的,海洋生物必须穿过这一薄层才能附着在船上。毒物以受控的速率释放,这取决于毒素的类型以及粘合剂的溶解程度和速率。
目前存在两种基本不同类型的防污漆-非抛光和自抛光。
非抛光防污剂可含有可溶性或不溶性基质。可溶性基质主要由微溶于海水的松香(树脂)组成。生物活性物质(毒物)与粘合剂一起释放到海水中。不溶性基质型使用大比例的不溶于海水的聚合物粘合剂。生物活性材料与充当浸出助剂的其他组分一起释放。这会留下一层不溶性粘合剂。每种类型的生物活性材料的释放速率将随着船使用时间的延长而降低。生物活性材料将包括氧化亚铜和有机锡化合物。
这些材料的数量或“装载量”根据船舶的要求而变化。少量将用于在寒冷和温带气候下贸易的船只,闲置时间短,航行时间长。大量将用于在温暖气候下进行全球贸易的船只,其闲置时间短至中等,航行时间各不相同。不同强度的粘合剂导致使用单涂层或双涂层系统来获得特定的干膜厚度。干膜厚度决定了可利用的生物活性材料的数量和系统寿命。对于任何特定的干坞间隔,必须选择合适的寿命。应该注意的是,在高速航行期间,系统中的生物活性材料消耗得更快。
自抛光防污设计用于缓慢磨损,同时保持涂层和水之间的生物活性界面。一种类型的这种涂料使用三丁基锡共聚物粘合剂和增强生物活性化合物,它们与三丁基锡防污剂产生协同(相互帮助)效应。
三丁基锡共聚物通过海水水解(离子离解)产生水合形式的三丁基锡氧化物(TBTO)。增强生物活性化合物由氧化亚铜和有机锡化合物组成。当三丁基锡共聚物释放其三丁基锡成分时,它们会浸出。然后共聚物变成水溶性的并被洗掉。这更新并激活了下一层三丁基锡分子。
自抛光速率由共聚物粘合剂的性质在油漆制造过程中决定。一家制造商提供了三种自抛光速率,再加上两种可能的防污程度,从而产生了六种可能的涂层。污垢保护可能是正常的,也可能是严重的。
这三种自抛光速率分别与中低速、中高速和超高速船体相关。船体外板粗糙度可接受的增加程度与干膜厚度相同,每层最低分别为100微米、80微米和60微米。自抛光率将随着速度和平均船体粗糙度而增加。

图11.2主要涂漆区域

船的涂漆
所使用的油漆必须适合船舶特定区域或部分所需的防护等级。需要不同形式处理的主要区域是水下板和水线带区域、顶侧、上层建筑和露天甲板(图11.2)。

表面处理和涂底漆
钢板的表面处理首先必须良好,以确保涂装系统的成功运行。用于造船的钢板首先要进行喷丸处理,以去除所有可能存在的锈迹和氧化皮。然后,立即用快干预制底漆给板涂底漆。这一切都是在受控条件下进行的连续遮蔽行动的一部分。这种涂层通常足以在使其结合到船体中的各种制造过程中保护板材。最终涂装将随着船的建造而进行。

水下区域
在考虑了应用于船体的阴极保护的存在和类型以及所需的防腐和防污油漆的程度后,得到水下和水线带区域将应用油漆类型。阴极保护系统的阳极附近会出现高碱性条件,因此需要环氧类涂料来抵抗这些化学条件。在这一区域使用的油漆也需要防污性能,以释放毒素,杀死倾向于聚集在船体上的海洋生物。虽然污垢总的说来增加了船舶阻力,但某些细菌会减少海水中的硫酸盐并释放氧气,这些氧气随后会参与腐蚀过程。因此,水下区域涂料的防污性能非常重要。油漆类型及其特定成分的实际选择通常由船东根据上述因素做出。
现代实践很少或没有区分底外板上使用的油漆和水线带区域周围使用的油漆。然而,水线带区域更可能由于机械磨损(侵蚀)和波浪的作用而遭受损坏。适用于该区域的一些漆料类型包括沥青、环氧树脂、煤焦油/环氧树脂和氯化橡胶。首先使用相容的底漆,然后是特定的油漆类型,如果要使用的话,最后再涂一层防污漆。

顶部结构和上层建筑
顶部和上层建筑通常涂有底漆、头层漆和面漆。该区域使用基于醇酸树脂、改性醇酸树脂和瓷漆的油漆。因为外观很重要,所以这些零件上使用的油漆必须具有良好的保色保光性能。

露天甲板
露天甲板区域的油漆需要非常好的耐磨性和抗磨性以及一定的防滑性。甲板涂层还应能抵抗作为货物或燃料运输的任何油或化学品。最初的保护涂层上涂有砂砾增强油性树脂漆,已经成功使用,底漆和氯化橡胶甲板漆也是如此。某些金属面漆的尝试取得了相当大的成功,尤其是在军舰上。交通、货物装卸和一般船舶操作对露天甲板的持续磨损使得仅靠油漆进行长期保护几乎不可能。利用环氧树脂的自密封涂料已经在环氧树脂涂料之上成功地用于耐磨甲板覆盖物。


压载舱、货物/压载舱和淡水舱需要特殊涂层,这取决于其内容物的性质。使用的处理包括两层环氧树脂或三层酚醛树脂基涂料,注意确保与舱内容物的兼容性。用沥青或焦油涂料可以令人满意地保护淡水舱。根据BS 3416类标准,饮用水舱必须有无污染涂层,如人造沥青。

阴极保护
当金属与电解液接触时,例如海水中的船体钢,由于金属表面电位的轻微变化,可能会形成小的腐蚀电池。电流在高电位点和低电位点之间流动,结果金属从电流离开金属的点(阳极)开始被腐蚀。在电流重新进入金属(阴极)的地方,金属受到保护。阴极保护通过提供与腐蚀系统相反的电流来工作。然后电流在每个点进入金属,即整个金属表面成为阴极,因此受到阴极保护。
当浸没的船体表面上的电位比附近水中的参比银/氯化银电极负0.80-0.85 V时,则船体得到充分保护。20-100 mA/m2数量级的电流密度通常足以在涂漆船体上逆转任何腐蚀电流并停止进一步的金属腐蚀。对于油漆质量差的船体,电流密度必然增加,因此阴极保护应被视为油漆的附加保护,而绝不是替代品。
船上通常使用两种阴极保护方法——牺牲阳极法和外加电流法。牺牲阳极型阴极保护使用铝和锌等金属,这些金属形成腐蚀电池的阳极,优于钢(见表11.1)。结果,这些牺牲阳极逐渐被腐蚀,一段时间后需要更换。外加电流系统通过一个长寿命高抗腐蚀材料(如镀铂钛)的阳极提供来自船舶电源的电位差。

牺牲阳极系统
实际上,牺牲阳极排列成块状,并通过其钢芯牢固地栓接或焊接在船体上,以提供良好的电气连接。其金属成分是铝或锌,通常是合金形式。它们旨在确保均匀磨损,并为受保护的钢材提供恒定电流。安装在船体上的牺牲阳极材料的量基于船体的润湿表面积和船体电势的测量值。阳极材料的量应该提供12- 20 mA/m2的保护电流。现代牺牲阳极在需要更换之前有3-4年的寿命。

外加电流系统
外加电流系统由直流电源、阳极、测量和控制电流的仪器以及靠近阳极的船体区域周围的高质量惰性保护涂层组成。充分保护所需的外加电流的连续控制随浸没面积、船速、水的盐度和船体油漆状况而变化。现代设备能够在所有这些条件下进行自动电流控制。这种控制通常通过使用与工作阳极有一定距离的参考阳极来实现。如果电流过大,实际上可能会起泡或破坏船体的油漆涂层。由于阳极附近会出现高碱性条件,所以在阳极周围,半径为1 米或更大的范围内,直接将环氧树脂保护罩应用于船体。船舶的外加电流系统如图11.3所示。图11.4和11.5给出了阳极和参考阳极以及隔离空舱电缆布置的细节。螺旋桨轴粘合装置必须配备外加电流系统,以确保螺旋桨保护(图11.6)。

舱的阴极保护
压载舱和货物/压载舱的阴极保护仅是使用铝、镁或锌阳极的牺牲阳极类型。铝和镁阳极的使用受到高度和能量的限制,以减少坠落阳极产生火花的可能性。货油舱或与货油舱相邻的舱中根本不允许使用镁和铝阳极。阳极排列在舱的底部和侧面,只有浸入水中的阳极才能提供保护电流。舱中的电流密度从全涂层表面的5 mA/m2到只用于压载的舱的约100 mA/m2不等,舱顶不能被阴极保护,因为舱很少是满的;因此,在舱上部1.5米处,为它们提供了适当的额外保护涂层。

图11.4阳极布置a)阳极;(b)穿过阳极的截面

图11.5 参考阳极a)阳极;(b)穿过阳极的截面
图11.6 螺旋桨轴接地装置

通过良好的设计防止腐蚀
第三种防腐方法是基于腐蚀过程知识的良好设计。因此,好的设计应避免在无法到达、通风不良或很少保护或维护的地方捕集腐蚀剂或建立腐蚀电池。
小窝、裂缝等,那里有盐雾、水等,最终会导致严重生锈。由于这涉及到材料体积的增加,随之而来的是结构构件的变形或断裂。应确保通过焊接或混凝土处理此类裂缝,或在设计阶段避免此类裂缝。应避免因排水或排水口设计不当而导致滴水。封闭结构下侧的冷凝湿气会导致腐蚀,良好的设计应确保这些区域有足够的通风。除非钢材得到适当保护,并且木材被沥青涂层“密封”,否则被木材覆盖的钢甲板会被腐蚀。所有接头都应该用合适的填充物密封,穿过木材的螺栓应该在螺母下有垫圈,以防止水进入。油漆作为一种有效的保护,需要在金属表面有足够的厚度。表面应尽可能容易接近,以确保良好的覆盖率和均匀的干漆厚度。焊接可以用来填充小裂缝;然而,任何焊接表面必须在喷漆前进行适当的处理,以确保防腐蚀。光滑的圆形表面更容易上漆,也不容易损坏和腐蚀。
机舱和锅炉房的空气中存在热量、湿气、振动和污浊空气,为腐蚀过程的发生提供了理想的条件。因此,表面应保持无水,并通过良好的排水、蒸汽管隔热等措施尽可能保持凉爽,并且通风良好。在安装任何机器之前,机器底座等难以接近的地方应涂上油漆加以保护。锅炉下面的双层底舱有时是空的,并涂有耐热漆。所有双层底舱应定期检查和维护,但必须在确保充分通风后进行。维护应采取用沥青混合漆喷涂的形式,或在某些情况下用水泥清洗。任何经常用来装油的双层底舱都很少或根本不需要防腐。
两种不同的金属在有电解液(如雨水、喷雾或冷凝)的情况下接触,会形成腐蚀电池。这可能会在轻合金构件(如铝)与钢接触的区域产生问题,如客船的上层建筑。这种接头的现代做法是在金属表面之间使用绝缘套圈,如氯丁橡胶或一些惰性填料。当这种接头通过螺栓连接或铆接制成时,仍然会出现问题,并且需要定期维护和注意。
在海洋环境中使用不锈钢时,应选择被动模式,因为它几乎不受电化学作用的影响。 
12
Surveys and Maintenance

In common with all machinery a ship requires regular overhaul and maintenance. The particularly severe operating conditions for an almost all-steel structure necessitate constant attention to the steelwork. The operations of berthing, cargo loading and discharge, constant immersion in sea water and the variety of climatic extremes encountered all take their toll on the structure and its protective        coatings. The classification        societies have        requirements for examination or survey of the ship at set periods throughout its life. The nature and extent of the survey increases as the ship becomes older.


Periodical surveys

All ships must have an annual survey, which is carried out by a surveyor employed by the classification society. This survey should preferably take place in a drydock but the period between in-dock surveys may be extended up to 2 1/2 years. Such an extension is permitted where the ship is coated with a high resistance paint and an approved automatic impressed current cathodic protection system is fitted. In-water surveys are permitted for ships which are less than 10 years old and greater than 38m in breadth and have the paint and cathodic protection systems already referred to. Special surveys of a more rigorous nature are required every 4 years. Continuous surveys are permitted where all the various hull compartments are examined in rotation over a period of 5 years between consecutive examinations.
During an annual survey the various closing appliances on all hatchways and other hull openings through which water might enter must be checked to be in an efficient condition. Water-clearing arrangements, such as scuppers and bulwark freeing port, must also operate satisfactorily. Guard rails, lifelines and gangway are also examined.
When surveyed in drydock the hull plating is carefully examined for any signs of damage or corrosion. The sternframe and rudder are also examined for cracks, etc. The wear in the rudder and propeller haft bearings is also measured.
The fire protection, detection and extinguishing arrangements for passenger ships are examined every year and for cargo ships every two years.
For a special survey, the requirement> of the annual survey must be met together with additional examinations. A detailed examination of structure by removing covers and linings may be made. Metal thicknesses at any areas showing wastage may have to be checked. The double-bottom and peak tanks must be tested by filling to the maximum service head with water. The decks, casings and superstructures, together with any areas of discontinuity, must be examined for cracks or signs of failure. All escape routes from occupied or working spaces must be checked, Emergency communications to the machinery space and the auxiliary steering position from the bridge must also be proved.
For tankers, additional special survey requirements include the inspection of all cargo tanks and cofferdam spaces. Cargo tank bulkheads must be tested by filling to the top of the hatchway of all or alternate tanks. The greater the age of a ship the greater will be the detail of examination and testing of suspect or corrosion-prone spaces.
Liquefied gas tankers have requirements for annual surveys, as mentioned earlier, and several additional items. All tanks, cofferdams, pipes, etc., must be gas freed before survey. Where the maximum vapour pressure in the tanks is 0.7 bar or less the inner tank surfaces are to be examined. In addition, the tanks must be water tested by a head of 1.45 m above the top of the tank. All lank level devices, gas detectors, inerting arrangements, etc., must be proved to be operating satisfactorily. The special survey requirements are as previously stated, together with the examination internally and externally where possible of all tank areas. Tank mountings, supports, pipe connections and deck sealing arrangements must also be checked. Samples of insulation, where fitted, must be removed and the plating beneath examined. Pressure-relief and vacuum valves must be proved to be efficient. Refrigeration machinery, where fitted, must be examined.

Hull surveys of very large crude carriers

The very size of these ships necessitates considerable planning and preparation prior to any survey. Large amounts of staging is necessary to provide access to the structure. Good lighting, safe access and some means of communication are also required. Surveys are often undertaken at sea, with the gas freeing of the tanks being one of the main problems. In-water surveys of the outer hull are also done. Some thought at the design stage of the ship should enable the stern bush, pintle and rudder bush clearances to be measured in the water. Provision should also exist for unshipping the propeller in the water. Anodes should be bolted to the shell and therefore easily replaced. Blanks for sealing off inlets should be carried by the ship, to enable the overhaul of shipside valves. The frame markings should be painted on the outside of the ship at the weather deck edge to assist in identifying frames and bulkheads. An in-water survey plan should be prepared by the shipbuilder. The hull plating surface must be clean prior to survey. This can be achieved by the use of rotary hand-held brushes which may be hydraulically or pneumatically powered. In-water cleaning of the hull is possible, with divers using these brushes or specially designed boats is with long rotating brushes attached .
One particular system uses a 'Brush Kart'. This is a hydraulically-powered vehicle with three brushing heads. It is driven by a diver over the surface of the hull to clear the plating of all forms of marine fouling. The Brush Kart is shown in Figure 12.1. The shell plating may then be surveyed by using an underwater survey vehicle such as the 'Scan' unit shown in Figure 12.2. The various camera units enable close scrutiny of all the areas of the shell plating by the surveyor observing the monitoring units. The Scan unit is fully manoeuverable over the hull surface.

Figure 12.1 'Scan' underwater survey vehicle (from 'Wet-docking of large ships', in ln-Water Maintenance Conference, 1975, by D.F. Jones)



Examination in drydock

The drydocking of a ship provides a rare opportunity for examination of the underwater areas of a ship. Every opportunity should therefore be taken by the ship's staff, the shipowner and the classification society to examine the ship thoroughly. Some of the more important areas are now listed.

Shell plating

The shell plating must be thoroughly examined for any corrosion of welds, damage, distortion and cracks at openings or discontinuities. Any hull attachments such as lugs, bilge keels, etc., must be checked for corrosion, security of attachment and any damage. All openings for grids and sea boxes must also be examined.

Cathodic protection equipment

Sacrificial anodes should be checked for security of attachment to the hull and the degree of wastage that has taken place. With impressed current systems the anodes and reference anodes must be checked, again for security of attachment. The inert shields and paintwork near the anodes should be examined for any damage or deterioration.

Rudder

The plating and visible structure of the rudder should be examined for cracks and any distortion. The drain plugs should be removed to check for the entry of any water. Pintle or bearing weardown and clearances should be measured and the security of the rudder stock coupling bolts and any pintle nuts should be ensured.

Sternframe

The surface should be carefully checked for cracks, particularly in the areas where a change of section occurs or large bending moments are experienced.


Propeller

The cone should be checked for security of attachment and also the rope guard. The blades should be examined for corrosion and cavitation damage, and any cracks or damage to the blade tips. It is usual to examine any tailshaft seals and also measure the tailshaft weardown.

Paintwork

The shell plating should be examined for areas of paintwork which must be repaired. The whole surface of the shell will then be cleaned and prepared for recoating with paint. In some instances the hull may be cleaned down to the bare metal and completely recoated; most situations, however, will only require preparation of the surface for recoating.

Preparation

Several methods are used for cleaning the ship's hull prior to recoating. Some of the more common ones will now be discussed.
Manual wire brushing and scraping with steel scrapers usually takes place on the wet surface as the water level drops in the dock. The finish is poor, the operation slow and the effectiveness varies according to the skill and effort of the operatives involved.
Power discing or wire brushing uses either an electrically or pneumatically driven machine which is hand held. The method is slow but provides a relatively good finish.
High pressure water jetting is being increasingly used for hull cleaning. Water at pressures of 150-500 bar is directed on to the hull by a tubular steel lance. The lower pressure is sufficient to remove weed fouling growths, while higher pressure will clean the hull down to the bare metal. The results from this method are excellent and very fast, although time is lost while waiting for the hull to dry. It is, however, a skilled operation requiring competent trained personnel for efficient safe performance.
Shot-blasting or abrasive-only cleaning utilises a jet of abrasive at 5-7 bar pressure fired from a nozzle on to the ship's hull. This method rapidly produces a clean dry surface ready for painting. The dusty, dirty nature of the work, however, stops any other activities in the area.
Abrasive and water-blasting combines in effect the foregoing two methods and claims the advantages of each. The method is fast, clean and effective, the abrasive speeding the cleaning and the water suppressing the dust. With this method and water jetting, corrosion inhibitors are added to the water to allow time between cleaning, drying and painting.

Painting

The successful application of paint requires the correct technique during painting and suitable conditions during which the application takes place.
Painting should take place in warm dry weather but not in direct sunlight. The presence of moisture in the air or on the metal surface may damage the paintwork or slow down its curing process. Where poor conditions are unavoidable, specially formulated paints for curing under these conditions should be used. The use of shelters or awnings perhaps supplied with warm air will greatly improve curing and adhesion of the paint. Any scuppers, discharges or overflows which may direct water on to the surface to be painted should be blocked or diverted before work is begun.
The principal methods of paint application are the airless spray, the air-assisted spray, the roller and the brush. Brush and roller application is employed where rough surfaces exist and small often inaccessible areas are to be covered. The method is slow, labour intensive and difficult with certain types of paints. Air-assisted spraying has been largely replaced by the airless spray technique for which most modern paints are formulated. Airless spray is the fastest and cleanest application method. High build materials are suitable for this method of application with dry film thicknesses up to 300 μm possible in one application.
Throughout the preparation and painting of a ship the need for good, safe, suitable means of access is paramount. Freedom of movement to maintain the appropriate distances for water jetting and paint spraying, for example, is essential. Free-standing scaffolding is used to some extent and also hydraulically operated mobile platforms.
A final mention on the subject of safety is required. Paints in their various forms can be poisonous, skin irritants and of a highly inflammable nature. Adequate protection and ventilation is therefore necessary. In addition, care is required in the location and operation of equipment to avoid the possibility of fires and explosions. Most manufacturers apply their own symbols to paint containers to indicate the various hazards, in addition to any mandatory requirements on labelling.

检验和维护

和所有机器一样,船需要定期检修和维护。几乎全钢结构的特别恶劣的工作条件需要持续关注钢结构。停泊、货物装卸、持续浸泡在海水中以及遇到的各种极端气候都会对结构及其保护涂层造成损害。船级社要求在船舶的整个生命周期内定期对其进行检查或检验。随着船只的老化,检验的性质和范围也在增加。

定期检验
所有船舶都必须进行年度检验,检验由船级社雇用的验船师进行。该检验最好在干船坞进行,但坞内检验的间隔时间可延长至两年半。如果船舶涂有高电阻涂料,并安装了经批准的自动外加电流阴极保护系统,则允许进行这种延长。允许对船龄小于10年、宽度大于38米且具有上述油漆和阴极保护系统的船舶进行水中检验。每4年需要进行一次更严格的特别检验。如果在连续检验之间的5年时间内,所有不同的船体舱室都要轮流进行检验,则允许连续检验。
在年度检验期间,必须检查所有舱口和其他可能进水的船体开口上的各种关闭装置是否处于有效状态。诸如泄水孔和舷墙排水孔之类的清除水布置也必须运行良好。护栏、救生索和舷梯也进行了检查。
在干船坞检验时,船外板被仔细检查是否有任何损坏或腐蚀的迹象。还检查了艉架和方向舵是否有裂纹等,还测量了舵和传动轴轴承的磨损。
客船的防火、探测和灭火布置每年检查一次,货船每两年检查一次。
对于特殊检验,必须满足年度检验的要求,并进行额外检查。可以通过拆除盖子和衬里对结构进行详细检查。可能需要检查任何有损耗区域的金属厚度。双层底和首尾尖舱必须通过向最大工作水头注水进行测试。必须检查甲板、机舱棚和上层建筑以及任何不连续区域是否有裂缝或故障迹象。必须检查从居住空间或工作空间的所有逃生路线,还必须证明从驾驶台到机舱和辅助操舵位置的紧急通信。
对于油轮,额外的特殊检验要求包括检查所有货油舱和隔离空舱空间。货油舱舱壁必须通过填充至所有或备用舱的舱口顶部进行测试。船龄越长,对可疑或易腐蚀空间的检查和测试就越详细。
如前所述,液化气船有年度检验的要求,还有几个附加项目。所有舱、隔离空舱、管道等,测量前必须排除气体。如液舱的最大蒸汽压力为0.7巴或以下,则须检查液舱的内表面。此外,舱必须在舱顶部以上1.45米处进行水压试验。所有液位装置、气体探测器、惰性装置等,必须证明运行令人满意。特殊检验要求如前所述,以及所有舱室的内部和外部检验(如可能)。还必须检查舱的固定、支撑、管道连接和甲板密封装置。绝缘样品(如有安装)必须移除,并检查下面的板。减压阀和真空阀必须证明是有效的。如果安装了制冷机器,必须对其进行检查。

超大型油船的船体检验
这些船只的尺寸使得在进行任何检验之前必须进行大量的图纸和准备工作。需要大量的脚手架来提供进入该结构的通道。还需要良好的照明、安全通道和一些通信手段。检验通常在海上进行,清除舱中的气体是主要问题之一。船体外板的水下检验也已经完成。在船舶设计阶段应该考虑能够在水中测量船尾衬套、枢轴和舵衬套的间隙。还应提供在水中卸下螺旋桨的设备。阳极应该用螺栓固定在船体外板上,因此容易更换。船上应携带封闭入口的盲板,以便对船边阀门进行检修。肋骨标记应涂在船舶外部露天甲板边缘,以帮助识别肋骨和舱壁。造船者应该准备一份水下检验图纸。检验前,船体板表面必须清洁。这可以通过使用液压或气动的旋转手持刷子来实现。在水中清洗船体是可能的,潜水员使用这些刷子或特别设计附有长旋转刷的小船。
一个特殊的系统使用“刷卡丁车”。这是一辆液压驱动的车,有三个刷头。它由潜水员在船体表面驾驶,清除各种形式的海洋污垢。刷车如图12.1所示。然后,可以使用水下勘测船,例如图12.2所示的“扫描”装置,对外板进行勘测。各种摄像装置使观测监测装置的验船师能够仔细检查外板的所有区域。扫描装置在船体表面上是完全可操纵的。

图12.1“刷卡丁车”水下清扫车

图12.1“扫描”水下勘测船(摘自D.F. Jones于1975年召开的“大型船舶的湿船坞”水下维护会议)

干船坞检验
船舶的干船坞为检查船舶的水下区域提供了难得的机会。因此,船员、船东和船级社应抓住一切机会对船舶进行彻底检查。现在列出了一些更重要的领域。

船外板
必须彻底检查外板是否有任何焊缝腐蚀、损坏、变形以及开口或间断处的裂纹。任何船体附件,如吊耳、舭龙骨等,必须检查腐蚀、附件的安全性和任何损坏。还必须检查栅格和海水箱的所有开口。

阴极保护设备
应检查牺牲阳极与船体连接的安全性以及已经发生的损耗程度。对于外加电流系统,必须检查阳极和参考阳极,再次检查连接的安全性。应检查阳极附近的惰性屏蔽和油漆是否有任何损坏或退化。


应检查方向舵的板和可见结构是否有裂纹和任何变形。应取下排水塞,检查是否有水进入。应测量枢轴或轴承磨损和间隙,并应确保舵杆连接螺栓和任何枢轴螺母的安全。

艉架
应仔细检查表面是否有裂缝,尤其是在截面发生变化或承受较大弯矩的区域。

螺旋桨
应检查锥体连接的安全性以及绳索防护装置。应检查叶片是否有腐蚀和气蚀损坏,以及叶尖是否有任何裂纹或损坏。通常检查任何尾轴密封,并测量尾轴磨损。

油漆工作
应检查外板中必须修补的油漆区域。外板的整个表面将被清洁,并准备重新涂漆。在某些情况下,船体可能会被清理到裸露的金属,并完全重新涂层;然而,在大多数情况下,只需要对表面进行重新涂覆的准备工作。

表面处理
在重新涂装之前,有几种方法可以用来清洁船体。现在将讨论一些更常见的问题。
当船坞中的水位下降时,通常在潮湿的表面上用钢丝刷和钢刮刀进行手工刮擦。光洁度很差,操作缓慢,并且效率根据所涉及的操作者的技能和努力而变化。
电动或钢丝刷使用电动或气动手持式机器。该方法很慢,但是提供了相对较好的光洁度。
高压水射流越来越多地用于船体清洗。压力为150-500巴的水通过管状钢枪喷到船体上。较低的压力足以清除杂草污垢生长,而较高的压力将清理船体到裸露的金属。这种方法的结果非常好,非常快,尽管在等待船体干燥的过程中会浪费时间。然而,这是一项需要熟练操作的工作,需要训练有素的合格人员进行有效的安全操作。
喷丸清理或仅使用磨料的清理利用喷嘴向船体喷射压力为5-7巴的磨料。这种方法可以迅速产生一个干净干燥的表面,为喷漆做好准备。然而,这项工作的尘土飞扬和肮脏的性质阻止了该地区的任何其他活动。
研磨和喷水实际上结合了上述两种方法,并声称各有优点。该方法快速、清洁、有效,磨料加速清洁,水抑制灰尘。使用这种方法和水喷射,腐蚀抑制剂被添加到水中,以留出清洁、干燥和上漆之间的时间。

涂漆
油漆的成功应用需要涂漆过程中的正确技术和合适的应用条件。
涂漆应在温暖干燥的天气进行,但不能在阳光直射下进行。空气中或金属表面的湿气可能会损坏漆面或减缓其固化过程。在恶劣条件不可避免的情况下,应使用特殊配方的涂料在这些条件下固化。使用遮蔽物或遮阳棚,也许供应温暖的空气,将大大改善涂料的固化和附着力。任何可能将水引至待涂漆表面的排水口、排放口或溢流口应在工作开始前堵塞或转移。
涂装的主要方法有无气喷涂、空气辅助喷涂、辊涂和刷涂。在存在粗糙表面和要覆盖的通常难以接近的小区域,使用刷子和滚筒。这种方法速度慢,劳动强度大,并且对于某些类型的油漆来说很困难。空气辅助喷涂已在很大程度上被无空气喷涂技术所取代,大多数现代涂料都是采用无空气喷涂技术配制的。无气喷涂是最快和最干净的应用方法。厚浆建筑材料适用于这种结构方法,在一次结构中干膜厚度可达300微米。
在船舶准备和喷漆的整个过程中,良好、安全、合适的通道是最重要的。例如,保持喷水和喷漆的适当距离的自由移动是至关重要的。在一定程度上使用独立式脚手架,也使用液压操作的移动平台。
需要最后提一下安全问题。各种形式的油漆可能有毒,刺激皮肤,并具有高度易燃性。因此,充分的保护和通风是必要的。此外,需要注意设备的位置和操作,以避免火灾和爆炸的可能性。除了标签上的任何强制性要求之外,大多数制造商在油漆船上使用他们自己的符号来指示各种危险。

回复 支持 反对

使用道具 举报

 楼主| 发表于 2023-2-18 23:11 | 显示全部楼层 来自: 中国上海
13
Principal Ship Dimensions and Glossary of Terms

Principal ship dimensions
A ship is defined and described in size, shape and form by a number of particular terms, which are listed below and some of which are shown in Figure 13.1.
Forward perpendicular. An imaginary line drawn perpendicular to the waterline at the point where the forward edge of the stem intersects the summer load line.
After perpendicular. An imaginary line drawn perpendicular to the waterline, either (1) where the after edge of the rudder post meets the summer load line, or (2) in cases where no rudder post is fitted, the centreline of the rudder pintles is taken.
Length between perpendiculars (LBP). The distance between the forward and after perpendiculars, measured along the summer load line.
Length overall (LOA). The distance between the extreme points of the ship forward and aft.
Amidships. The point midway between the forward and after perpendiculars. A special symbol is used to represent this point (Figure 13.1).
Extreme breadth. The maximum breadth over the extreme points port and starboard of the ship.
Extreme draught. The distance from the waterline to the underside of the keel.
Extreme depth. The depth of the ship from the upper deck to the underside of the keel.
Moulded dimensions are measured to the inside edges of the plating, i.e. they are the frame dimensions.
Base line. A horizontal line drawn along the top edge of the keel from midships.
Moulded breadth. The greatest breadth of the ship, measured to the inside edges of the shell plating.
Moulded draught. The distance from the summer load line to the base line, measured at the midship section.
Moulded depth. The depth of the ship from the upper deck to the base line, measured at the midship section.
Half-breadth. At any particular section half-breadth distances may be given since a ship is symmetrical about the longitudinal centreline.
Freeboard. The vertical distance from the summer load waterline to the top of the freeboard deck plating, measured at the ship's side amidships. The uppermost complete deck exposed to the weather and the sea is normally the freeboard deck. The freeboard deck must have permanent means of closure of all openings in it and below it.
Sheer. The curvature of the deck in a longitudinal direction. It is measured between the deck height at midships and the particular point on the deck.
Camber. The curvature of the deck in a transverse direction. Camber is measured between the deck height at the centre and the deck height at the side.
Rise of floor. The height of the bottom shell plating above the base line. Rise of floor is measured at the moulded beam line.
Bilge radius. The radius of the plating joining the side shell to the bottom shell. It is measured at midships.
Flat of keel. The width of the horizontal portion of the bottom shell, measured transversely.
Tumblehome. An inward curvature of the midship side shell in the region of the upper deck.
Flare. An outward curvature of the side shell at the forward end above the waterline .
Rake. A line in dined from the vertical or horizontal.
Parallel middle body. The ship length for which the midship section is constant in area and shape.
Entrance. The immersed body of the ship forward of the parallel middle body.
Run. The immersed body of the ship aft of the parallel middle body.
Displacement. The weight of the ship and its contents, measured in tonnes. The value will vary according to the ship's draught.
Lightweight. The weight of the ship, in tonnes, complete and ready for sea but without crew, passengers, stores, fuel or cargo on board.
Deadweight. The difference between the displacement and the lightweight at any given draught, again measured in tonnes. Deadweight is the weight of cargo, fuel, stores, etc., that a ship can carry.
Tonnage. A measure of the internal capacity of a ship where 100 ft3 or 2.83 m3 represents 1 ton. Two values are currently in use - the gross tonnage and the net tonnage.

主要船舶尺寸和术语汇编

主要船舶尺寸
一艘船的大小、形状和外形是由一些特殊的术语来定义和描述的,这些术语列在下面,其中一些在图13.1中示出。

图13.1船舶术语和尺寸
艏垂线。一条垂直于水线的假想线,在艏柱前缘与夏季载重线的交点处。
艉垂线。一条垂直于水线的假想线,在(1)舵柱后缘与夏季载重线相交之处,或(2)在没有安装舵柱的情况下,取舵枢轴的中心线。
垂线间长(LBP)。艏垂线和艉垂线之间的距离,沿夏季载重线测量。
总长(LOA)。船首和船尾两个极端点之间的距离。
船中。艏垂线和艉垂线之间的中点。一个特殊的符号用来表示这一点(图13.1)。
极限船宽。最大宽度,超过船的左右舷的极限点。
极限吃水。从水线到龙骨底面的距离。
极限船深。船从上甲板到龙骨底面的深度。
模制尺寸测量到板的内边缘,即它们是骨架尺寸。
基线。从船中部沿龙骨顶部边缘画的水平线。
型宽(模制宽度)。船的最大宽度,测量到船外板的内边缘。
型吃水。从夏季载重线到基线的距离,在船中测量。
型深。从上甲板到基线的船的深度,在船中测量。
半宽。由于船舶是关于纵向中心线对称的,所以在任何特定的剖面上可以给出半宽距离。
干舷。从夏季载重水线到干舷甲板顶部的垂直距离,在船舯的船舷测量。暴露在天气和海洋中的最上面的完整甲板通常是干舷甲板。干舷甲板必须有永久的方法关闭甲板上和甲板下的所有开口。
舷弧。甲板在纵向上的曲率。它是在船中部的甲板高度和甲板上特定点之间测量的。
拱高。甲板在横向上的曲率。拱高是在中间的甲板高度和侧面的甲板高度之间测量的。
肋板上升。基线上方船底外板的高度。在型宽线上测量肋板的高度。
舭半径。连接侧外板和底外板的板半径。它是在船中部测量的。
平板龙骨宽。船底外板水平部分的宽度,横向测量。
舷缘内倾。上甲板区域的船中舷侧外板的向内弯曲。
外飘。水线以上艏端的舷侧外板向外弯曲。
倾度。从垂直或水平方向切入的一条线。
平行中体。船中部面积和形状不变的船舶长度。
入水区。平行中间体前方的浸入水中的船体。
出水区。平行中间体后方的浸入水中的船体。
排水量。船舶及其货物的重量,以吨为单位。价值将根据船的吃水深度而变化。
轻船(空船)。船的重量,以吨为单位,已完成并准备出海,但船上没有船员、乘客、储备物、燃料或货物。
载重量。在任何给定的吃水深度下,排水量和轻船重量之间的差值,同样以吨为单位。载重量是一艘船可以运载的货物、燃料、储备等的重量。
吨位。衡量船舶内部容量的单位,100立方英尺或2.83立方米代表1吨。目前使用的两个数值是总吨位和净吨位。

Glossary of terms

Aft. in the direction of, at, or near the stern.
Aft peak. A watertight compartment between the aftermost watertight bulkhead and the stern.
Athwartship. ln a direction across the ship, at right-angles to the fore and aft centreline.
Ballast. A weight of liquid positioned in a ship- to change the trim, increase the draught or improve the seaworthiness.
Bilge. Rounded region between the side and shell plating; the space where water collects after draining down from cargo holds, etc.
Bitter end. The end of the anchor cable which is secured in the chain locker by the clench pin.
Bollard. A pair of short metal columns on a rigid baseplate which are used to secure the mooring ropes or wires.
Bow. The forward end of a ship.
Bracket. A plate which is used to rigidly connect a number of structural parts; it is often triangular in shape.
Break. The point at which a side shell plating section drops to the deck below, such as the poop or forecastle.
Bulkhead, aft peak. The first major transverse watertight bulkhead forward of the sternframe.
Bulkhead, collision or forepeak. The foremost major watertight bulkhead.
Cofferdam. A void or empty space between two bulkheads or floors which prevents leakage from one to the other.
Cowl. The shaped top of a natural ventilation trunk which may be rotated to draw all into or out of the ventilated space.
Deep tanks. Tanks which extend from the shell or double bottom up to or beyond the lowest deck. They are usually arranged for the carriage of fuel oil or water ballast but may be fitted with hatches and used for cargo.
Devil's claw. A stretching screw with two heavy hooks or claws. It is used to secure the anchor in the hawse pipe.
Dog. A small metal fastener or clip used to secure doors, hatch covers, etc.
Erection. The positioning and temporary fastening together of units or fabricated parts of a ship prior to welding.
Fabrication. The various processes which lead to the manufacture of structural parts for a ship.
Fair. To smoothly align the adjoining parts of a ship's structure or its design lines.
Fairlead. An item of mooring equipment used to maintain or change the direction of a rope or wire in order to provide a straight lead to a winch drum.
Flange. The portion of a plate or bracket bent at right-angles to the remainder; to bend over at right angles.
Flat. A minor section of internal deck often without sheer or camber, also known as a platform.
Forepeak. A watertight compartment between the foremost watertight bulkhead and the stem.
Forward. ln the direction of, at, or near the stem.
Frame. A transverse structural member which acts as a stiffener to the shell and bottom plating.
Gasket. A joint, usually of flexible material, which is positioned between metal surfaces to prevent leak age.
Goose neck. A fitting on the end of a boom or derrick which connects it to the mast or post and permits a swivel motion.
Grommet. A ring of soft material positioned beneath a nut or bolthead to provide a watertight joint.
Gudgeon. A solid lug on the sternframe or rudder which is drilled to take the pintle.
Gusset plate. A bracket plate usually positioned in a horizontal or almost horizontal plane.
Holds. The lowest cargo stowage compartments in a ship.
Inboard. In a direction towards the centreline of the ship.
Intercostal. Composed of separate parts, non-continuous.
Offsets. The coordinates of a ship’s form.
Outboard. In a direction away from the centreline of the ship.
Panting. The in and out movement of a ship’s plating.
Pintle. The hinge pin on which certain types of rudder swing.
Port. The left-hand side of a ship when facing forward.        .
Samson post.        A rigid vertical post use in place of a mast to support derricks.
Scantlings. The dimensions of the structural items of a ship, e.g. frames, girders, plating, etc.
Scupper. Deck drains to remove sea water, rain water or condensation.
Seat. The structural support for an item of machinery equipment.
Seaworthy. A term used to describe a ship which has adequate strength, freeboard and stability in order to carry and deliver its cargo in good condition.
Spectacle frame. A large casting which projects outboard from the ship and supports the end of the propeller shaft in a twin screw ship. The casting is plated into the surrounding shell.
Starboard. The right-hand side of a ship when facing forward.
Stays. Wires or ropes from the deck to the head of a mast, Sampson post or boom to provide support or prevent movement.
Stealer strake. A single wide plate which replaces two narrow plates in adjacent strakes.
Stern. The after end of a ship.       
Stiffener. A flat bar, section or built-up section used to stiffen plating.
Tarpaulin. A tough waterproof canvas-type cloth cover used to cove r non-watertight hatch covers.
Tiller. A casting or forging which is keyed to the rudder stock and used to turn the rudder.
Topping wire. A wire used to raise, lower or fix the position of a boom and to support it.
Transverse. A direction at right-angles to the centreline of the ship or an item of structure in this position.
Tripping bracket. A flat bar or plate fitted to a deck girder, stiffener, beam, etc., to reinforce the free edge.
Trunk. A passage extending through one or more decks to provide access or ventilation to a space.
Tunnel. A watertight access passage surrounding the propeller shaft which is fitted on a ship where the machinery space is positioned towards midships.
Tween decks. The upper cargo stowage compartments or the space between any two adjacent decks.        .
Uptake. A metal casing or large bore piping which carries exhaust gases up through the funnel to the atmosphere.
Web frame. A deep-section built-up frame which provides additional strength to the structure.
Well. A space into which bilge water drains.
Winch. A machine which utilises the winding or unwinding of rope or wire around a barrel for various cargo and mooring duties.
Windlass. A machine used for hoisting and lowering the anchor.

术语表

船尾。在船尾方向,在船尾附近。
尾尖舱。在最后方的水密舱壁和船尾之间的水密舱。
横向。在穿过船的方向上,与首尾中心线成直角。
压载。放置在船上的液体重量-改变纵倾,增加吃水深度或改善适航性。
舭部(舱底)。舷侧外板和外底板之间的圆形区域;水从货舱等排出后聚集的空间。
苦端。通过紧固销固定在锚链舱中的锚缆末端。
带缆桩(系船柱)。刚性基板上的一对短金属柱,用于固定系泊绳索或缆绳。
艏。船的艏端。
肘板。用于刚性连接多个结构部件的板;它通常是三角形的。
间断点。船舷外板部分下降到下面甲板的点,如船尾楼或艏楼。
尾尖舱壁。艉架前面的第一个主要的横向水密舱壁。
防撞或艏尖舱壁。最艏端的主要水密舱壁。
隔离空舱。两个舱壁或实肋板之间的空隙或空间,防止从一个舱壁到另一个舱壁的渗漏。
通风罩。自然通风管道的成型顶部,可旋转以将所有空气吸入或排出通风空间。
深舱。从船体外板或双层底延伸至或超过最低甲板的舱。它们通常用于装载燃油或压舱水,但也可能装有舱口,用于装载货物。
恶魔之爪。有两个重钩或爪的拉伸螺丝。它是用来固定锚链筒中的锚的。
夹扣。用来固定门、舱口盖等的小金属扣或夹子。
竖起。焊接前将船的部件或装配部件定位并临时固定在一起。
建造。制造船舶结构部件的各种过程。
光顺。使船的结构或设计线的相邻部分平滑对齐。
导缆器。一种系泊设备,用于保持或改变绳索或钢丝的方向,以便为绞车滚筒提供直线导向。
折边。板或肘板的一部分,与其余部分成直角弯曲;弯成直角。
平板。内部甲板的一小部分,通常没有舷弧或拱度,也称为平台。
艏尖舱。最艏端的水密舱壁和船首之间的水密舱。
艏。在往船首柱的方向上,在艏柱上或附近。
肋骨。一个横向结构件,作为壳体和底板的加强件。
垫圈。一种通常由柔性材料制成的接头,位于金属表面之间以防止泄漏。
鹅颈。吊杆或井架末端的配件,将吊杆或井架连接到桅杆或柱子上,并允许旋转运动。
索环。位于螺母或螺栓头下方的一圈软材料,用于提供防水连接。
舵枢。艉架或方向舵上的实耳片,钻孔后用于安装枢轴。
角撑板。通常位于水平面或几乎水平面的肘板板。
货舱。船上最低的货物存放舱。
舷内。朝着船的中心线的方向。
肋间。由分离的部分组成的,不连续的。
型值。船形的坐标。
舷外。在远离船中心线的方向上。
拍击颤振。船板的进出运动。
枢轴。某些类型的舵在其上摆动的铰链销。
左舷。面向前方时船的左侧。
萨姆森柱。代替桅杆用来支撑起重机坚硬的垂直柱子。
结构尺寸。船的结构部件的尺寸,如骨架、纵桁、板等,
排水孔。甲板排水,清除海水、雨水或冷凝水。
底座。机器设备的结构支撑。
适航性。该术语用于描述一艘具有足够强度、干舷和稳性的船舶,以便以良好的状态运输和交付货物。
眼镜架。一种大型铸件,从船的外侧伸出,支撑双螺旋桨船的螺旋桨轴的末端。铸件被镀入周围的壳中。
右舷。面向艏端时船的右侧。
牵索。从甲板到桅杆顶部、萨姆森柱或吊杆的电线或绳索,以提供支撑或防止移动。
盗列板。取代相邻列板中两块窄板的一块宽板。
The girth of the ship decreases toward the ends and so the width of plates must be decreased in these parts. To save making the plates too narrow at the ends of the ship, it is usual to run a number of pairs of adjacent strakes into one. This is done by means of a stealer plate. The end-plate of a strake of outside or inner-bottom plating which is dropped out as the girth of the vessel narrows toward the ends.
船的围长向两端减小,因此在这些部分板的宽度必须减小。为了避免在船的两端把板做得太窄,通常把许多对相邻的列板连成一条。这是通过一个盗板来完成的。外板或内底板列板的端板,当船的周长向两端变窄时,端板脱落。
船尾。船的尾部。
加强筋(扶强材)。用于加强板的扁钢、型材或组合型材。
防水油布。一种结实的防水帆布类型的布盖,用于覆盖非防水舱口盖。
舵柄。用键固定在舵杆上用来转动舵的铸件或锻件。
顶层线。用于提升、降低或固定吊杆位置并支撑吊杆的金属线。
横向。与船的中心线或该位置的结构件成直角的方向。
防倾肘板。安装在甲板纵桁、加强筋、横梁等上的扁钢或平板。,以加固自由边。
围阱。穿过一层或多层甲板的通道,为空间提供入口或通风。
隧道。围绕螺旋桨轴的水密通道,安装在机舱位于船中部的船舶上。
中层甲板。上层货舱或任何两个相邻甲板之间的空间。
排气管。一种金属外壳或大口径管道,通过烟囱将废气向上输送到大气中。
强肋骨。为结构提供额外强度的深截面组合肋骨。
井。舱底水排入的空间。
绞盘。一种机器,利用绕在桶上的绳索或金属线的缠绕或展开来完成各种货物和系泊任务。
锚机。用来提升和放下锚的机器。
回复 支持 反对

使用道具 举报

发表于 2023-2-19 17:52 | 显示全部楼层 来自: 中国湖北武汉
谢谢楼主分享。非常好资料,基础知识非常全面。
回复 支持 反对

使用道具 举报

发表于 2023-2-19 22:10 | 显示全部楼层 来自: 中国山东东营
好书,要是有图就更好了
回复 支持 反对

使用道具 举报

 楼主| 发表于 2023-2-24 16:48 | 显示全部楼层 来自: 中国上海
牙牙1974 发表于 2023-2-19 22:10
好书,要是有图就更好了

之前的下载地址搞错了,是一本相同名字的书,我把pdf发上来了。
回复 支持 反对

使用道具 举报

您需要登录后才可以回帖 登录 | 立即注册

本版积分规则

小黑屋|标签|免责声明|龙船社区

GMT+8, 2024-4-29 22:16

Powered by Imarine

Copyright © 2006, 龙船社区

快速回复 返回顶部 返回列表